Canon | i-SENSYS LBP621Cw | User manual | Canon i-SENSYS LBP621Cw User manual

Canon i-SENSYS LBP621Cw User manual
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw / LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw
User's Guide
USRMA-3594-00 2019-04 en
Copyright CANON INC. 2019
Contents
Important Safety Instructions ...........................................................................................................
Installation
............................................................................................................................................................... 3
Power Supply
Handling
2
............................................................................................................................................................ 5
................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Maintenance and Inspections
Consumables
.................................................................................................................................... 9
.......................................................................................................................................................... 10
Setting Up ..........................................................................................................................................................
Main Functions
14
....................................................................................................................................................... 15
Preparations Required Before Use
Preventing Unauthorized Access
.............................................................................................................................. 17
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide
Setting the Date/Time
........................................................................................................................... 16
............................................................................................................................ 19
............................................................................................................................................. 21
Setting Up the Network Environment
...................................................................................................................... 23
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN
Connecting to a Wired LAN
..................................................................................................................... 25
.................................................................................................................................. 26
Connecting to a Wireless LAN
............................................................................................................................... 27
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode
....................................................................................... 29
........................................................................................... 31
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
....................................................................................... 33
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
Checking the SSID and Network Key
Setting IP Addresses
...................................................................................... 36
............................................................................................................... 39
........................................................................................................................................... 40
Setting IPv4 Address
..................................................................................................................................... 41
Setting IPv6 Addresses
Viewing Network Settings
.................................................................................................................................. 44
.................................................................................................................................... 47
Configuring Settings for Communication with a Computer
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions
Configuring Printer Ports
Setting Up Print Server
...................................................................................... 50
........................................................................................... 51
............................................................................................................................... 54
.................................................................................................................................. 57
Configuring the Machine for Your Network Environment
Configuring Ethernet Settings
......................................................................................... 60
........................................................................................................................ 61
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit
...................................................................................................... 63
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
.............................................................................................. 64
Configuring DNS
.......................................................................................................................................... 65
Configuring SMB
.......................................................................................................................................... 69
Configuring WINS
......................................................................................................................................... 71
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP
Other Network Settings
Installing Drivers
......................................................................................... 73
................................................................................................................................. 77
.................................................................................................................................................... 81
Basic Operations .......................................................................................................................................... 84
Parts and Their Functions
........................................................................................................................................ 87
I
Front Side
.......................................................................................................................................................... 88
Back Side
........................................................................................................................................................... 90
Interior
.............................................................................................................................................................. 91
Multi-Purpose Tray
Paper Drawer
.............................................................................................................................................. 92
..................................................................................................................................................... 93
Operation Panel
................................................................................................................................................. 95
Turning ON the Machine
......................................................................................................................................... 99
Turning OFF the Machine
................................................................................................................................... 100
Turning OFF the Machine by Remote Operation
Powering OFF at a Fixed Time
............................................................................................. 101
...................................................................................................................... 102
Restarting the Machine
..................................................................................................................................... 104
Using the Operation Panel
.................................................................................................................................... 106
Basic Screens
................................................................................................................................................... 107
Home Screen
............................................................................................................................................. 108
<Status Monitor> Screen
Message Display
Basic Operation
Entering Text
......................................................................................................................................... 115
................................................................................................................................................ 116
................................................................................................................................................... 121
Logging in to the Machine
Loading Paper
............................................................................................................................. 111
..................................................................................................................................... 125
....................................................................................................................................................... 126
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
.................................................................................................................... 128
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray
Loading Envelopes
............................................................................................................. 134
............................................................................................................................................ 139
Loading Preprinted Paper
.................................................................................................................................. 142
Specifying Paper Size and Type
.......................................................................................................................... 144
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer
....................................................................................... 145
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray
................................................................................ 147
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray
Registering a Custom Paper Size
......................................................................... 150
.................................................................................................................. 153
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed
................................................................................................................ 155
Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function
Customizing the Display
........................................................................................................................................ 158
Customizing the Home Screen
........................................................................................................................... 159
Changing the Default Settings for Functions
Setting Sounds
............................................................ 156
.......................................................................................................... 161
...................................................................................................................................................... 162
Entering Sleep Mode
............................................................................................................................................. 163
Using a USB Memory Device
.................................................................................................................................. 165
Printing .............................................................................................................................................................. 168
Printing from a Computer
Canceling Prints
..................................................................................................................................... 169
............................................................................................................................................... 171
Checking the Printing Status and Log
Various Printing Methods
.................................................................................................................. 174
...................................................................................................................................... 176
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)
Printing via Secure Print
............................................................................................ 177
.............................................................................................................................. 178
II
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)
Receiving I-Faxes for Printing
.................................................................................... 182
............................................................................................................................. 196
Linking with Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................ 200
Connecting with Mobile Devices
............................................................................................................................ 201
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)
............................................................................................................. 204
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)
........................................................................................................... 209
Utilizing the Machine through Applications
Using AirPrint
........................................................................................ 202
....................................................................................................................................................... 210
Printing with AirPrint
........................................................................................................................................ 215
................................................................................................................................. 218
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used
Using Google Cloud Print
....................................................................................................................................... 219
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control
....................................................................................................... 221
Managing the Machine ........................................................................................................................
Setting Access Privileges
....................................................................................................................................... 225
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN
.............................................................................................................. 226
Setting the Department ID Management
Setting a Remote UI PIN
............................................................................................................. 228
.................................................................................................................................... 234
Configuring the Network Security Settings
............................................................................................................ 236
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls
..................................................................................................... 238
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings
.................................................................................................. 239
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings
Changing Port Numbers
Setting a Proxy
.............................................................................................. 242
.................................................................................................................................... 245
................................................................................................................................................. 246
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS
.......................................................................................................... 248
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network Communication
Generating a Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
Configuring IPSec Settings
Restricting the Machine's Functions
.................................................................................................. 266
...................................................................................................................... 270
Restricting Printing from a Computer
.................................................................................................................. 272
.................................................................................................................................. 273
Disabling HTTP Communication
Disabling Remote UI
......................................................................................................................... 275
......................................................................................................................................... 276
Restricting Use of the Operation Panel
................................................................................................................ 277
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)
Starting Remote UI
...................................................................... 257
................................................................................................................................. 259
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings
Restricting USB Functions
...................................................................... 251
................................................................................... 254
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network Communication
............................................................................................ 278
........................................................................................................................................... 279
Checking the Status and Logs
............................................................................................................................ 282
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI
Security Policy
223
........................................................................................................... 288
.................................................................................................................................................. 291
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data
Updating the Firmware
................................................................................................................. 296
......................................................................................................................................... 299
III
Initializing Settings
............................................................................................................................................... 302
Setting Menu List ......................................................................................................................................
<Preferences>
....................................................................................................................................................... 306
<Display Settings>
............................................................................................................................................ 307
<English Keyboard Layout>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Network>
<Accessibility>
................................................................................................................................... 313
.......................................................................................................................................... 341
.................................................................................................................................................. 342
<Volume Settings>
............................................................................................................................................ 345
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Maintenance>
.................................................................................................................................. 347
..................................................................................................................................... 348
<Adjust Image Quality>
................................................................................................................................................ 362
<Function Settings>
<Common>
................................................................................................................................ 312
....................................................................................................................................................... 320
<External Interface>
<Printer>
305
.............................................................................................................................................. 364
...................................................................................................................................................... 365
......................................................................................................................................................... 369
<Receive>
........................................................................................................................................................ 416
<Access Files>
.................................................................................................................................................. 418
<Secure Print>
.................................................................................................................................................. 428
<Management Settings>
....................................................................................................................................... 429
........................................................................................................................................ 430
<User Management>
<Device Management>
...................................................................................................................................... 432
<License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware>
........................................................................................................................................ 438
<Data Management>
<Security Settings>
..................................................................................... 436
........................................................................................................................................... 440
Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................
Regular Cleaning
443
.................................................................................................................................................. 445
........................................................................................................................................ 446
Cleaning the Exterior
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly
............................................................................................................................. 447
Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB)
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
.......................................................................................................................... 450
............................................................................................................................... 451
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables
Relocating the Machine
......................................................................................................................................... 458
Adjusting Image Quality
Adjusting Gradation
.................................................................................................. 457
....................................................................................................................................... 460
.......................................................................................................................................... 461
Correcting "Print Color Mismatch"
...................................................................................................................... 462
Adjusting Print Position
..................................................................................................................................... 463
Viewing the Counter Value
.................................................................................................................................... 465
Printing Reports and Lists
Consumables
..................................................................................................................................... 466
........................................................................................................................................................ 470
IV
Troubleshooting (FAQ) ..........................................................................................................................
474
Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................... 476
Third Party Software
Feature Highlights
............................................................................................................................................. 478
................................................................................................................................................ 479
Going Green and Saving Money
Improving Efficiency
So Much More
Specifications
Main Unit
......................................................................................................................................... 481
.................................................................................................................................................. 482
....................................................................................................................................................... 484
........................................................................................................................................................ 485
Available Paper
................................................................................................................................................ 489
Cassette Feeding Module-AF
Printer Functions
.............................................................................................................................. 493
.............................................................................................................................................. 494
Management Functions
..................................................................................................................................... 497
......................................................................................................................................... 499
System Environment
Network Environment
Options
....................................................................................................................................... 500
................................................................................................................................................................ 501
Optional Equipment
System Options
.......................................................................................................................................... 502
................................................................................................................................................ 503
Manuals and Their Contents
Using User's Guide
.................................................................................................................................. 505
................................................................................................................................................ 506
Screen Layout of User's Guide
Viewing User's Guide
............................................................................................................................ 507
........................................................................................................................................ 510
Basic Windows Operations
Notice
......................................................................................................................... 480
.................................................................................................................................... 512
.................................................................................................................................................................. 519
V
Important Safety Instructions
Important Safety Instructions
Important Safety Instructions ................................................................................................................... 2
Installation ............................................................................................................................................................ 3
Power Supply ......................................................................................................................................................... 5
Handling ................................................................................................................................................................. 6
Maintenance and Inspections .............................................................................................................................. 9
Consumables ....................................................................................................................................................... 10
1
Important Safety Instructions
Important Safety Instructions
3S2W-000
The content described in this chapter is for the prevention of damage to property and injury to users of the machine
and others. Before using this machine, read this chapter and follow the instructions to properly use this machine. Do
not perform any operations not described in this manual. Canon will not be responsible for any damages resulting
from use not described in this manual, improper use, or repair/changes not performed by Canon or a third party
authorized by Canon.
Installation(P. 3)
Power Supply(P. 5)
Handling(P. 6)
Maintenance and Inspections(P. 9)
Consumables(P. 10)
2
Important Safety Instructions
Installation
3S2W-001
To use this machine safely and comfortably, carefully read the following precautions and install the machine in an
appropriate location.
Do not install in a location that may result in a fire or electrical shock
● A location where the ventilation slots are blocked
(too close to walls, beds, sofas, rugs, or similar objects)
● A damp or dusty location
● A location exposed to direct sunlight or outdoors
● A location subject to high temperatures
● A location exposed to open flames
● Near alcohol, paint thinners or other flammable substances
Other warnings
● Do not connect unapproved cables to this machine. Doing so may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Do not place necklaces and other metal objects or containers filled with liquid on the machine. If foreign
substances come in contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Do not use near medical equipment. Radio waves emitted from this machine may interfere with medical
equipment, which may result in malfunctions and accidents.
● When installing and removing the optional accessories, be sure to turn OFF the power, unplug the power
plug, and then disconnect all the interface cables and power cord from the machine. Otherwise, the power
cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
● If any foreign substance falls into this machine, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Do not install in the following locations
● The machine may drop or fall, resulting in injury.
- An unstable location
- A location exposed to vibrations
Other cautions
● When carrying this machine, follow the instructions in this manual. If carried improperly, it may fall, resulting
in injury.
● When installing this machine, be careful not to get your hands caught between the machine and the floor or
walls. Doing so may result in injury.
3
Important Safety Instructions
Avoid poorly ventilated locations
● This machine generates a slight amount of ozone and other emissions during normal use. These emissions
are not harmful to health. However, they may be noticeable during extended use or long production runs in
poorly ventilated rooms. To maintain a comfortable working environment, it is recommended that the room
where the machine operates be appropriately ventilated. Also avoid locations where people would be
exposed to emissions from the machine.
Do not install in the following locations that may result in damage
● A location subject to dramatic changes in temperature or
humidity
● A location near equipment that generates magnetic or
electromagnetic waves
● A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur
● A location exposed to corrosive or toxic gases
● A location that may warp from the weight of the machine or
where the machine is liable to sink (a carpet, etc.)
Do not install in a location where condensation occurs
● Water droplets (condensation) may form inside the machine when the room where the machine is installed
is heated rapidly, and when the machine is moved from a cool or dry location to a hot or humid location.
Using the machine under these conditions may result in paper jams, poor print quality, or damage to the
machine. Let the machine adjust to the ambient temperature and humidity for at least 2 hours before use.
In altitudes of above sea level 3,000 m or higher
● Machines with a hard disk may not operate properly when used at high altitudes of about 3,000 meters
above sea level, or higher.
4
Important Safety Instructions
Power Supply
3S2W-002
● Use only a power supply that meets the specified voltage requirements. Failure to do so may result in a fire
or electrical shock.
● The machine must be connected to a socket-outlet with grounding connection by the provided power cord.
● Do not use power cords other than the one provided, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● The provided power cord is intended for use with this machine. Do not connect the power cord to other
devices.
● Do not modify, pull, forcibly bend, or perform any other act that may damage the power cord. Do not place
heavy objects on the power cord. Damaging the power cord may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Do not plug in or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in an electrical shock.
● Do not use extension cords or multi-plug power strips with the machine. Doing so may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
● Do not wrap the power cord or tie it in a knot, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Insert the power plug completely into the AC power outlet. Failure to do so may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
● Remove the power plug completely from the AC power outlet during a thunder storm. Failure to do so may
result in a fire, electrical shock, or damage to the machine.
● Install this machine near the power outlet and leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be
unplugged easily in an emergency.
When connecting power
● Do not connect the power cord to an uninterruptible power source. Doing so may result in malfunction of or
damage to the machine at power failure.
● If you plug this machine into an AC power outlet with multiple sockets, do not use the remaining sockets to
connect other devices.
● Do not connect the power cord to the auxiliary AC power outlet on a computer.
Other precautions
● Electrical noise may cause this machine to malfunction or lose data.
5
Important Safety Instructions
Handling
3S2W-003
● Immediately unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet
and contact an authorized Canon dealer if the machine makes
an unusual noise, emits an unusual smell, or emits smoke or
excessive heat. Continued use may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
● Do not disassemble or modify this machine. There are highvoltage and high-temperature components inside the machine
which may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Place the machine where children will not come in contact with the power cord and other cables or internal
and electrical parts. Failure to do so may result in unexpected accidents.
● Do not use flammable sprays near this machine. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical
parts inside this machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● When moving this machine, be sure to turn OFF the power of this machine and your computer, and then
unplug the power plug and interface cables. Failure to do so may damage the power cord or interface
cables, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
● When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power plug is plugged into an AC power outlet, do not
touch the metal part of the connector, as this may result in an electrical shock.
If you are using a cardiac pacemaker
● This machine generates a low level magnetic flux and ultrasonic waves. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and
feel abnormalities, please move away from this machine and consult your physician immediately.
● Do not place heavy objects on this machine as they may fall, resulting in injury.
● For your safety, please unplug the power cord if the machine will not be used for a long period of time.
● Use caution when opening and closing covers to avoid injury to your hands.
● Keep hands and clothing away from the rollers in the output area. If the rollers catch your hands or clothing,
this may result in personal injury.
● The inside of the machine and the output slot are very hot during and immediately after use. Avoid contact
with these areas to prevent burns. Also, printed paper may be hot immediately after being output, so use
caution when handling it. Failure to do so may result in burns.
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
LBP623Cdw
LBP621Cw
6
Important Safety Instructions
● Do not carry the machine with any of the paper drawer or
optional cassette feeding module installed. Otherwise, they may
fall, resulting in injury.
Laser beam
● If the laser beam should escape and enter your eyes, exposure may cause damage to your eyes.
When transporting the machine
● To prevent damage to the machine during transport, perform the following.
- Remove the toner cartridges.
- Securely pack the machine in the original box with packing materials.
If the operating noise concerns you
● Depending on the use environment and operating mode, if the operating noise is of concern, it is
recommended that the machine be installed in a place other than the office.
Other precautions
● Follow the caution instructions on labels and the like found on this machine.
● Avoid shaking or applying shock to this machine.
● Do not forcibly open and close doors, covers, and other parts. Doing so may result in damage to the
machine.
● Do not touch the contacts (
) inside the machine. Doing so may result in damage to the machine.
7
Important Safety Instructions
● To prevent a paper jam, do not turn OFF the power, open/close the covers, and load/unload the paper when
printing.
8
Important Safety Instructions
Maintenance and Inspections
3S2W-004
Clean this machine periodically. If dust accumulates, the machine may not operate properly. When cleaning, be sure to
observe the following. If a problem occurs during operation, see Troubleshooting.
● Before cleaning, turn OFF the power and unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet. Failure to do so
may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Unplug the power plug periodically and clean with a dry cloth to remove dust and grime. Accumulated dust
may absorb humidity in the air and may result in a fire if it comes into contact with electricity.
● Use a damp, well wrung-out cloth to clean the machine. Dampen cleaning cloths with water only. Do not use
alcohol, benzine, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. Do not use tissue paper or paper towels. If
these substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, they may generate static
electricity or result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Check the power cord and plug periodically for damage. Check the machine for rust, dents, scratches,
cracks, or excessive heat generation. Use of poorly-maintained equipment may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
● The inside of the machine has high-temperature and high-voltage components. Touching these components
may result in burns. Do not touch any part of the machine that is not indicated in the manual.
● When loading paper or removing jammed paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
● When removing jammed paper or replacing toner cartridges or the like, be careful not to get any toner on
your hands or clothing. If toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately with cold water.
9
Important Safety Instructions
Consumables
3S2W-005
● Do not dispose of used toner cartridges or the like in open flames. Also, do not store toner cartridges or
paper in a location exposed to open flames. This may cause the toner to ignite, and result in burns or fire.
● If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully gather the toner particles together or wipe them up with a
soft, damp cloth in a way that prevents inhalation. Never use a vacuum cleaner that does not have
safeguards against dust explosions to clean up spilled toner. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the
vacuum cleaner, or result in a dust explosion due to static discharge.
● Use caution not to inhale any toner. If you should inhale toner, consult a physician immediately.
● Use caution so that toner does not get into your eyes or mouth. If toner should get into your eyes or mouth,
immediately wash with cold water and consult a physician.
● Use caution so that toner does not come into contact with your skin. If it should, wash with soap and cold
water. If there is any irritation on your skin, consult a physician immediately.
● Keep the toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If toner is ingested,
consult a physician or poison control center immediately.
● Do not disassemble or modify the toner cartridge or the like. Doing so may cause the toner to scatter.
● When removing the sealing tape from the toner cartridge, pull it out completely but without using excessive
force. Doing otherwise may cause the toner to scatter.
Handling the toner cartridge
● Be sure to hold the toner cartridge using the handle.
● To avoid scratching the surface (
electrical contacts (
) of the drum inside the machine or exposing it to light. Do not touch the
) or the toner cartridge memory (
10
).
Important Safety Instructions
● Except when necessary, do not take out the toner cartridge from the packing material or from this machine.
● The toner cartridge is a magnetic product. Do not move it close to products susceptible to magnetism
including floppy disks and disk drives. Doing so may result in data corruption.
Storing the toner cartridge
● Store in the following environment to ensure safe and satisfactory use.
Storage temperature range: 0 °C to 35 °C
Storage humidity range: 35 % to 85 % RH (relative humidity/no condensation)*
● Store without opening until the toner cartridge is to be used.
● When removing the toner cartridge from this machine for storage, place the removed toner cartridge in the
original packing material.
● When storing the toner cartridge, do not store it upright or upside down. The toner will solidify and may not
return to its original condition even if it is shaken.
*Even within the storable humidity range, water droplets (condensation) may develop inside the toner cartridge if there is a
difference of temperature inside and outside the toner cartridge. Condensation will adversely affect the print quality of
toner cartridges.
Do not store the toner cartridge in the following locations
● Locations exposed to open flames
● Locations exposed to direct sunlight or bright light for five minutes or more
● Locations exposed to excessive salty air
● Locations where there are corrosive gases (i.e. aerosol sprays and ammonia)
● Locations subject to high temperature and high humidity
● Locations subject to dramatic changes in temperature and humidity where condensation may easily occur
● Locations with a large amount of dust
● Locations within the reach of children
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges
● Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit
toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any
malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.
For more information, see global.canon/ctc.
Availability period of repairing parts and toner cartridges and the like
● The repairing parts and toner cartridges and the like for the machine will be available for at least seven (7)
years after production of this machine model has been discontinued.
Toner cartridge packing materials
● Save the packing materials for the toner cartridge. They are required when transporting this machine.
11
Important Safety Instructions
● The packing materials may be changed in form or placement, or may be added or removed without notice.
● After you pull out the sealing tape from the toner cartridge, dispose of it in accordance with the applicable
local regulations.
When disposing of a used toner cartridge or the like
● When discarding a toner cartridge or the like, place it in the original packing material to prevent toner from
scattering from inside, and dispose of it in accordance with the applicable local regulations.
12
Setting Up
Setting Up
Setting Up ............................................................................................................................................................. 14
Main Functions .................................................................................................................................................... 15
Preparations Required Before Use ..................................................................................................................... 16
Preventing Unauthorized Access ........................................................................................................................ 17
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide ...................................................................................................................... 19
Setting the Date/Time ......................................................................................................................................... 21
Setting Up the Network Environment ............................................................................................................... 23
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN .............................................................................................................. 25
Connecting to a Wired LAN ............................................................................................................................. 26
Connecting to a Wireless LAN ......................................................................................................................... 27
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ............................................................................. 29
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode .................................................................................. 31
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ............................................................................. 33
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings ............................................................................ 36
Checking the SSID and Network Key ........................................................................................................ 39
Setting IP Addresses ....................................................................................................................................... 40
Setting IPv4 Address ................................................................................................................................ 41
Setting IPv6 Addresses ............................................................................................................................ 44
Viewing Network Settings ............................................................................................................................... 47
Configuring Settings for Communication with a Computer ............................................................................ 50
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ................................................................................. 51
Configuring Printer Ports ......................................................................................................................... 54
Setting Up Print Server ............................................................................................................................ 57
Configuring the Machine for Your Network Environment ............................................................................... 60
Configuring Ethernet Settings ................................................................................................................. 61
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit ............................................................................................. 63
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network .................................................................................... 64
Configuring DNS ...................................................................................................................................... 65
Configuring SMB ...................................................................................................................................... 69
Configuring WINS .................................................................................................................................... 71
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ............................................................................... 73
Other Network Settings ........................................................................................................................... 77
Installing Drivers ................................................................................................................................................. 81
13
Setting Up
Setting Up
3S2W-006
Before using the functions of the machine, the environmental conditions must be set in advance. To begin with, check
the sequences of flow required to complete the setup, and then perform the actual settings. Preparations Required
Before Use(P. 16)
● The functions installed on the machine vary depending on the model you purchased. Before using the
machine, see Main Functions(P. 15) and check the available functions.
Configuring Initial Settings of the Machine (Setup Guide)
● You can easily configure the initial settings required to use the machine, such as date, time, and network
settings, by following the on-screen guidance. Setting Up Using the Setup Guide(P. 19)
14
Setting Up
Main Functions
3S2W-007
This manual covers all the functions of the model series you purchased. Before getting started, check which functions
are available on the model you purchased.
: With function
: Without function
Function
Display
LBP664Cx
LBP663Cdw
LBP623Cdw
LBP621Cw
Touch panel Black and white LCD Black and white LCD Black and white LCD
2-sided printing
Wireless LAN
NFC
Default System Manager ID
7654321
Not specified
Not specified
Not specified
Default System Manager PIN
7654321
Not specified
Not specified
Not specified
Application Library
Cassette Feeding Module-AF *
Barcode Printing Kit *
*This
is an optional item.
● For the available driver types, see the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM supplied with the machine, or see
the Canon website (https://global.canon).
● In the User's Guide, when operations differ depending on screens, distinctions are highlighted with the
different descriptions: "touch panel model" and "black and white LCD model."
● When operations are the same for both models, the screens from the touch panel display will be used for
explanation in most cases. The black and white LCD model has screens different from those of the touch
panel model. In either case, follow the on-screen terms to perform operations.
LINKS
Viewing User's Guide(P. 510)
15
Setting Up
Preparations Required Before Use
3S2W-008
Set up the machine following steps 1 to 3 in order. For more information about a particular step, click on the link to go
to the corresponding section. In addition, to use the machine safely, also check Preventing Unauthorized
Access(P. 17) .
Step 1
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide(P. 19)
Step 2
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 23)
● Configure the network settings that are not covered in the Setup Guide. If you do not need
to use the Setup Guide, configure the network settings from here.
Step 3
Installing Drivers(P. 81)
Setting from the Remote UI
● When the network environment settings are complete, you can efficiently set the machine from a computer
using Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 279)
Importing data from another machine to save time
● As long as the model is the same, you can save setting data registered on another Canon printer/
multifunction machine to a computer (export) and load the setting data to this machine (import).
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 296)
16
Setting Up
Preventing Unauthorized Access
3S2W-009
This section describes the security measures on how to prevent unauthorized access from the external network. This is
a must-read for all users and administrators before using this machine, other printers, and multifunction machines
connected to the network. In recent years, a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network can offer you a
variety of useful functions, such as printing from a computer, operating from a computer using the remote function,
and sending scanned documents via the Internet. On the other hand, it is essential to take security measures to
reduce the security risk for information leakage, as a printer/multifunction machine has become more exposed to
threats, such as unauthorized access and theft, when it is connected to the network. This section explains necessary
settings you need to specify to prevent unauthorized access before using a printer/multifunction machine connected
to the network.
Security Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access from the External Network
Assigning a Private IP Address(P. 17)
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission(P. 18)
Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication (P. 18)
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine(P. 18)
Assigning a Private IP Address
An IP address is a numerical label assigned to each device participating in a computer network. A "global IP address" is
used for the communication connecting to the Internet, and a "private IP address" is used for the communication
within a local area network, such as a LAN in the company. If a global IP address is assigned, your printer/
multifunction machine is open to the public and can be accessed via the Internet. Thus, the risk of information leakage
due to unauthorized access from external network increases. On the other hand, if a private IP address is assigned,
your printer/multifunction machine is closed to a local area network and can be accessed by only users on your local
area network, such as a LAN in the company.
Global IP Address
Can be accessed from the external network
Private IP Address
Can be accessed from the users within a local area network
Basically, assign a private IP address to your printer/multifunction machine. Make sure to confirm the IP address,
assigned to the printer/multifunction machine you are using, is a private IP address or not. A private IP address is
found in one of the following ranges.
Ranges for Private IP addresses
● From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
● From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
● From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
For information on how to confirm the IP address, see
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41) .
● If a global IP address is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine, you can create a network environment
to reduce the risk of unauthorized access by installing security software, such as a firewall that prevents
17
Setting Up
access from the external networks. If you want to assign a global IP address to and use a printer/
multifunction machine, contact your network administrator.
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission
A firewall is a system that prevents unauthorized access from the external networks and protects against attacks/
intrusions to a local area network. You can use a firewall on your network environment to block access from the
external network that appears to be dangerous, by restricting communication from specified IP address of the
external network. The function installed to a Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to set up the IP
address filter. For information on how to set up an IP address filter, see Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall
Settings(P. 239) .
Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication
For information on the TLS Encrypted Communication, see Configuring the Network Security Settings(P. 236) ,
and on the procedures to specify, see Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 248) .
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine
If a malicious third party attempts to gain unauthorized access to a printer/multifunction machine, setting PIN to
information stored in the machine will reduce the risk of information leakage. Canon printers/multifunction machines
enable you to protect various type of information by setting PIN.
Setting PIN to Each Function
● Setting PIN for Using Remote UI
For more information, see Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 234) .
● Setting PIN for the System Manager Settings
For more information, see
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 226) .
Listed above are some examples of security measures for preventing unauthorized access. For more information on
the other security measures, see Managing the Machine(P. 223) and take necessary security measures for
preventing unauthorized access to suit your environment.
18
Setting Up
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide
3S2W-00A
1660-009
When the machine is turned on ( Turning ON the Machine(P. 99) ) for the first time, the Setup Guide starts up to
assist you to configure the initial settings of the machine by following the on-screen guidance. In the Setup Guide, the
setting screens are displayed in the following order.
Step 1
Setting the Display Language and the Country or Region
Set the language to be displayed on the operation panel screen or in reports, as well as the
country or region where the machine will be used.
Step 2
1
Select a language.
2
For a Touch panel model, select <Yes>.
3
Select a country or region.
Setting the Date and Time
Adjust the machine's date/time.
1
Select a time zone.
What is UTC?
● Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the
world regulates clocks and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required
for Internet communications.
2
Enter the date and time, and press <Apply> (
).
Touch panel model
● Tap the entry field, and enter the date and time.
Black and white LCD model
● Use
or
to move the cursor, and enter the date and time using the
numeric keys.
Step 3
Setting the Access Security Measures
Set a PIN to access the Remote UI. Because the Remote UI can be used to change the machine
settings from a computer, setting of a PIN is recommended.
1
Select <Yes>.
● If you select <No>, PIN is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 4.
● You can also set the access security measure of the Remote UI later.
a Remote UI PIN(P. 234)
Step 4
2
Enter a PIN, and then press <Apply> (
3
Enter the same PIN, and then press <Apply> (
).
).
Configuring Automatic Cleaning of the Fixing Assembly
19
Setting
Setting Up
If the model of your machine is LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw, configure to automatically clean the
fixing assembly. If you are using LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw, the Setup Guide proceeds to step 5.
1
Check the message displayed on the screen, and select (
) <Yes>.
● If you select <No>, automatic cleaning is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds
to step 5.
● You can set automatic cleaning of the fixing assembly later.
Fixing Assembly>(P. 355)
2
<Auto Clean
Select <On>.
● If you select <Off>, automatic cleaning is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds
to step 5.
3
Set available paper sources to <On>.
● When cleaning is performed, paper is fed from the paper source for which you
set <On>.
● You can use the following paper for cleaning.
- Paper sizes: A4/Letter
- Paper types: Plain 1 to 3/Recycled 1 or 2
4
Step 5
Select <Apply>.
Setting the Wireless LAN
Configure the settings to connect to the network using the wireless LAN.
1
Select <Yes>.
● If you select <No>, wireless LAN is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to
step 6.
2
Select <OK>.
3
Select the setting method.
● For more information about the wireless LAN settings, see
Wireless LAN(P. 27) .
Step 6
Connecting to a
Viewing Application Library
The one-touch button referred to as "Application Library" is provided in the Home screen. You
can read the description of each function.
1
To finish the Setup Guide, select <End>.
➠ When the Setup Guide is complete, the Home screen appears.
20
Setting Up
Setting the Date/Time
3S2W-00C
Set the date and time for the machine. The date and time are used as the reference for the functions specifying the
time, therefore, they need to be set accurately.
Setting the Time Zone(P. 21)
Setting the Current Date and Time(P. 21)
Setting the Daylight Saving Time(P. 22)
Setting the Time Zone
If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also changed accordingly.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
3
Select the time zone.
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Date/Time Settings>
<Time
Zone>.
What is UTC?
● Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks and
time. Time differences exist depending on the country or area where the machine is used. The correct UTC
time zone setting is required for Internet communications.
Setting the Current Date and Time
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
3
Enter the date and time.
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Timer/Energy Settings>
21
<Current Date/Time Settings>.
Setting Up
Touch panel model
● Tap the entry field, and enter the date and time.
Black and white LCD model
● Use
4
or
to move the cursor, and enter the date and time using the numeric keys.
Press <Apply> (
).
● Set <Time Zone> before setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed later, the
current date and time are also changed accordingly.
● The display format of the date and time can be changed, respectively.
<Date Format>(P. 314)
<Time Format>(P. 315)
Setting the Daylight Saving Time
If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to which daylight saving time is in effect.
1
2
3
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 108)
Select <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings>
Saving Time Settings>.
<Date/Time Settings>
<Daylight
Select <Off> or <On> in <Daylight Saving Time>.
● When you select <On>, select <Start Date> and <End Date>, and set the month and day for each item. To set
the day, specify "what day of which week."
4
Select <Apply>.
22
Setting Up
Setting Up the Network Environment
3S2W-00E
When connecting the machine to a wired or wireless local area network (LAN), you need to set an IP address unique to
the selected network. Select "wired" or "wireless" depending on your communication environment and networking
devices. For specific IP address settings, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
● If the machine is connected to an unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third
party.
● The machine cannot connect to both wired and wireless LANs at the same time.
● The machine does not come with a LAN cable or router. Have them ready as necessary.
● For more information about your networking devices, see the instruction manuals for the devices or contact
your manufacturer.
◼ Before You Start
Follow these steps to connect the machine to a network.
Check your computer settings.
● Make sure that the computer is correctly connected to the network. For more
information, see the instruction manuals for the devices you are using, or contact the
device manufacturers.
● Make sure that the network settings have been completed on the computer. If the
network has not been set up properly, you will not be able to use the machine on the
network, even if you perform the rest of the procedure below.
● Depending on the network, you may need to change settings for the communication
method or the Ethernet type ( Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 61) ). For more
information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
● To check the MAC address of the machine.
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 47)
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 48)
23
Setting Up
● To connect to an IEEE 802.1X network, see
Authentication Settings(P. 266) .
Configuring IEEE 802.1X
Select wired or wireless LAN.
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 25)
Connect to a wired or wireless LAN.
● Proceed to the section that corresponds to the setting you selected in step 2.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 26)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
Set the IP address as necessary.
● At the time of purchase, the machine is set to automatically acquire an IP address.
Change this setting if you want to use a specific IP address. Setting IP
Addresses(P. 40)
LINKS
Configuring Settings for Communication with a Computer(P. 50)
Configuring the Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 60)
24
Setting Up
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN
3S2W-00F
After you decide on wired or wireless LAN to connect the machine to the computer, select wired LAN or wireless LAN
using the operation panel. Note that if you change the setting from <Wired LAN> to <Wireless LAN> or vice versa, you
will need to uninstall the drivers installed on your computer and then reinstall them. For more information, see the
manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
Select <Select Wired/Wireless LAN>.
4
Select <Wired LAN> or <Wireless LAN>.
LINKS
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 23)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 26)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
25
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
Setting Up
Connecting to a Wired LAN
3S2W-00H
Connect the machine to a computer via a router. Use a LAN cable to connect the machine to the router.
1
Connect a LAN cable.
● Connect the machine to a router by using a LAN cable.
● Push the connector in until it clicks into place.
2
Wait for several minutes.
➠ The IP address is set automatically.
● You can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 40)
LINKS
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 23)
26
Setting Up
Connecting to a Wireless LAN
3S2W-00J
Wireless routers (or access points) connect the machine to a computer via radio waves. If your wireless router is
equipped with Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), configuring your network is automatic and easy. If your networking
devices do not support automatic configuration, or if you want to specify authentication and encryption settings in
detail, you need to manually set up the connection. Make sure that your computer is correctly connected to the
network.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS(P. 27)
Manually Setting Up Connection(P. 28)
Risk of information leak
● Use wireless LAN connection at your own discretion and at your own risk. If the machine is connected to an
unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third party because radio waves used in
wireless communication can go anywhere nearby, even beyond walls.
Wireless LAN security
● The wireless LAN function of this machine supports WEP, WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK. For the wireless security
compatibility of your wireless router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact
your manufacturer.
Required devices for wireless LAN connection
● The machine does not come with a wireless router. Have the router ready as necessary.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS
When using WPS, two modes are available: push button mode and PIN code mode.
◼ Push Button Mode
Find the WPS mark shown below on the package of your wireless router. Also make sure that there is a WPS button on
your networking device. Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 29)
27
Setting Up
◼ PIN Code Mode
Some WPS routers do not support the push button mode. If WPS PIN code mode is mentioned on the package or in
the instruction manuals of your networking device, set up the connection by entering the PIN code. Setting Up
Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 31)
● If the wireless router is set to use WEP authentication, you may not be able to set up connection using WPS.
Manually Setting Up Connection
When manually setting up a wireless connection, you can either select a wireless router or manually enter the required
information. Regardless of the method, make sure that you have the required setup information, including the SSID
and network key. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 39)
◼ Selecting a Wireless Router
Select this setup option if you need to manually set up the connection but want to complete the setup as easily as
possible. Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 33)
◼ Manually Entering the Setup Information
If you want to specify security settings in detail, such as authentication and encryption settings, manually enter the
SSID and network key to set up the connection. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 36)
LINKS
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 23)
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 25)
28
Setting Up
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode
3S2W-00K
1660-00J
If your wireless router supports WPS push button mode, you can easily set up a connection with a WPS button.
● How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your
networking device for help.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
● If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <WPS Push Button Mode>.
6
Select <Yes>.
7
Press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router.
● The button must be pressed within 2 minutes after selecting <Yes> in step 6.
● Depending on the networking device, you may need to press and hold the button for 2 seconds or longer.
See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help.
If an error message is displayed during setup
● Select <Close> and return to step 5.
29
Setting Up
8
Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.
9
Select <Close>.
➠ Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
● When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
● You can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 40)
● While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or
the Basic Features screen of each function. Basic Screens(P. 107)
Reducing power consumption
● You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 321)
If the IP address of the machine has changed
● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
30
Setting Up
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode
3S2W-00L
If your wireless router supports WPS PIN code mode, generate a PIN code with the machine and register the code to
the networking device.
● How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your
networking device for help.
From a Computer
1
Access your wireless router from a computer and display the screen for entering a
WPS PIN code.
● For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking device.
From the Operation Panel
2
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
3
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
4
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
● If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
5
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
6
Select <WPS PIN Code Mode>.
7
Select <Yes>.
➠ The PIN code is generated and shown on the display.
From a Computer
8
Register the generated PIN code to the wireless router.
● Register the PIN code on the setup screen displayed in step 1.
31
Setting Up
● The PIN code must be registered within 10 minutes after selecting <Yes> in step 7.
If an error message is displayed during setup
● Select <Close> and return to step 6.
From the Operation Panel
9
10
Wait until the message <Connected.> is displayed.
Select <Close>.
➠ Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
● When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
● You can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 40)
● While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or
the Basic Features screen of each function. Basic Screens(P. 107)
Reducing power consumption
● You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 321)
If the IP address of the machine has changed
● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
32
Setting Up
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
3S2W-00R
You can search the wireless routers (or access points) available for connection and select one from the display of the
machine. For the network key, enter a WEP key or PSK. Before selecting a wireless router, check and write down the
required setup information, including the SSID and network key ( Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 39) ).
Security settings
● If the wireless connection is set up by selecting a wireless router, the WEP authentication method is set to
<Open System> or the WPA/WPA2 encryption method is set to <Auto> (AES-CCMP or TKIP). If you want to
select <Shared Key> for WEP authentication or <AES-CCMP> for WPA/WPA2 encryption, you need to set up
the connection using <Enter Manually>. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 36)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
● If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <SSID Settings>.
6
Select <Select Access Point>.
➠ The machine starts searching for available wireless routers.
● If a message is displayed telling that no access point can be found, check the network settings. For more
information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.
7
Select a wireless LAN router.
Touch panel model
Select the router whose SSID matches the one that you have written down, and select <Next>
Black and white LCD model
Select the router whose SSID matches the one that you have written down, and press
33
.
<OK>.
Setting Up
To view details of security settings on the Touch panel model
● Select the wireless LAN router, and select <Details>. To return to the original screen, select
.
If your wireless router is not found
● Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network. For more
information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.
8
Enter the network key that you have written down.
● Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.
● On how to enter text, see
9
Entering Text(P. 121) .
Select <Yes>.
If an error message is displayed during setup
● Select <Close>, check whether the network key is correct, and return to step 5.
10
Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.
11
Select <Close>.
➠ Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
● When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
● You can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 40)
● While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or
the Basic Features screen of each function. Basic Screens(P. 107)
Reducing power consumption
● You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 321)
34
Setting Up
If the IP address of the machine has changed
● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
35
Setting Up
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
3S2W-00S
If you want to specify the security settings in detail or cannot establish the wireless connection using the other
procedures, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection. Before specifying detailed
settings, check and write down the required information, including the SSID, network key, and wireless security
protocols. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 39)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
● If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <SSID Settings>
6
Enter the SSID that you have written down.
<Enter Manually>.
● Enter the SSID, and select <Apply>.
● On how to enter text, see
7
Entering Text(P. 121) .
Specify the security settings based on the information that you have written down.
● If you do not need to specify the security settings, select <None>.
Using WEP
1
Select <WEP>.
2
Select an authentication method.
36
Setting Up
<Open System>
Sets open system authentication, which is also called "open authentication."
<Shared Key>
Uses the WEP key as a password.
When <Open System> is selected
● When connecting to a wireless LAN, the machine experiences an authentication error if the shared key
authentication is set on the wireless router. If this happens, the machine automatically changes the
setting to <Shared Key> and retries the connection.
3
Select the WEP key you want to edit.
Touch panel model
● Select the WEP key (1 to 4), and select <Edit>.
Black and white LCD model
● Select <Edit WEP Key>
WEP key (1 to 4).
● Up to four WEP keys can be registered.
4
Enter the network key that you have written down.
● Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.
5
Select the desired WEP key.
Touch panel model
● Select the WEP key you have edited, and select <Register>.
Black and white LCD model
● Select <Select WEP Key>
the WEP key you have edited.
Using WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
1
Select <WPA/WPA2-PSK>.
2
Select an encryption method.
<Auto>
Sets the machine to automatically select AES-CCMP or TKIP to match the setting of the wireless router.
37
Setting Up
<AES-CCMP>
Sets AES-CCMP as the encryption method.
3
Enter the network key that you have written down.
● Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.
8
Select <Yes>.
If an error message is displayed during setup
● Select <Close>, check whether the specified settings are correct, and return to step 5.
9
10
Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.
Select <Close>.
➠ Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
● When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
● You can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 40)
● While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or
the Basic Features screen of each function. Basic Screens(P. 107)
Reducing power consumption
● You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 321)
If the IP address of the machine has changed
● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
38
Setting Up
Checking the SSID and Network Key
3S2W-00U
When manually setting up a wireless connection, you need to specify the SSID and network key of your wireless router.
The SSID and network key may be indicated on these networking devices. Check your devices and write down the
necessary information before setting up the connection. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your
networking devices or contact your manufacturer.
SSID
A name given for identifying a specific wireless LAN. Some other terms used for SSID include
"access point name" and "network name."
Network Key
A keyword or password used for encrypting data or authenticating a network. Some other
terms used for network key include "encryption key," "WEP key," "WPA/WPA2 passphrase,"
and "preshared key (PSK)."
Wireless Security Protocols
(Authentication/Encryption)
When manually setting up a wireless connection by specifying detailed settings, you need to
specify security settings. Check the following information:
● Security types (WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK)
● Authentication method (Open System/Shared Key)
● Encryption method (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 33)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 36)
39
Setting Up
Setting IP Addresses
3S2W-00W
Connecting the machine to a network requires a unique network IP address. Two versions of IP addresses are
available: IPv4 and IPv6. Configure these settings depending on the network environment. To use IPv6 addresses, you
need to properly configure the IPv4 address settings.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 44)
40
Setting Up
Setting IPv4 Address
3S2W-00X
1660-00W
The machine's IPv4 address can be either assigned automatically by a dynamic IP
addressing protocol, such as DHCP, or entered manually. When connecting the
machine to a wired LAN, make sure that the connectors of the LAN cable are firmly
inserted into the ports ( Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 26) ). You can test the
network connection if necessary.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
Testing the Network Connection(P. 43)
Setting IPv4 Address
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings>
4
Configure IP address settings.
<IPv4 Settings>
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
<IP Address Settings>.
<Auto Acquire>
Select to automatically assign an IP address via DHCP protocol. When <On> is displayed, automatic
addressing is enabled.
<Manually Acquire>
Select to configure the IP address settings by manually entering an IP address. In order to select this option,
the automatic acquirement must be set to <Off>.
<Check Settings>
Select when you want to view the current IP address settings.
Automatically assigning an IP address
1
Select <Auto Acquire>.
2
Select the protocol.
41
Setting Up
Touch panel model
● Select <On> in <Auto Acquire>, and select <Select Protocol>
<DHCP>.
Black and white LCD model
● Select <Select Protocol>
<DHCP>.
If you do not want to use DHCP/BOOTP/RARP to assign an IP address
● Select <Off>. If you select <DHCP> when these services are unavailable, the machine will waste time
and communications resources searching the network for these services.
3
Check that <Auto IP> is set to <On>.
● If <Off> is selected, change the setting to <On>.
4
Select <Apply>.
● IP addresses assigned via DHCP override the address obtained via Auto IP.
Manually entering an IP address
1
Configure a setting to disable auto-acquisition.
Touch panel model
● Select <Auto Acquire>, and select <Off> in <Auto Acquire>
<Apply>
<OK>.
Black and white LCD model
● Select <Auto Acquire>, and set both <Select Protocol> and <Auto IP> to <Off>.
2
Select <Manually Acquire>.
3
Specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address (or default gateway).
Touch panel model
● Enter <IP Address>, <Subnet Mask>, and <Gateway Address>, and select <Apply>.
Black and white LCD model
● Enter these values in each screen using the numeric keys, and press
5
For the touch panel model, select <OK>.
6
Restart the machine.
.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
Checking whether the settings are correct
● Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer ( Starting Remote
UI(P. 279) ). If a computer is not available, you can check the connection by using the operation panel (
Testing the Network Connection(P. 43) ).
42
Setting Up
When you have changed the IP address after installing the printer driver
● You need to add a new port.
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 54)
Testing the Network Connection
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings>
4
Enter the IPv4 address of another device on the network, and press <Apply> (
<IPv4 Settings>
<PING Command>.
➠ If a proper connection has been established, <Received response from the host.> is displayed.
LINKS
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 44)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 47)
Configuring WINS(P. 71)
43
).
Setting Up
Setting IPv6 Addresses
3S2W-00Y
The IPv6 addresses of the machine can be configured via the Remote UI. Before
setting IPv6 addresses, check the IPv4 address settings ( Viewing IPv4
Settings(P. 47) ). You need to set the correct IPv4 settings to use IPv6 addresses.
The machine can use the following multiple IPv6 addresses:
Type
Description
Link-local address
An address that is only valid within a subnet or link and cannot be used to communicate with
devices beyond a router. A link-local address is automatically set when the IPv6 function of the
machine is enabled.
Manual address
An address that is entered manually. When using this address, specify the prefix length and default
router address.
Stateless address
An address that is generated automatically using the MAC address of the machine and the network
prefix that is advertised by the router. Stateless addresses are discarded when the machine is
restarted (or turned ON).
Stateful address
An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use IPv6] check box and configure the required settings.
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[IPv6 Settings].
44
Setting Up
[Use IPv6]
Select the check box to enable IPv6 on the machine. When not using IPv6, clear the check box.
[Stateless Address 1]
Select the check box when using a stateless address. When not using a stateless address, clear the check box.
[Use Manual Address]
When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address, select the check box and enter the IP address, prefix
length, and default router address in the corresponding text boxes.
[IP Address]
Enter an IPv6 address. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be entered.
[Prefix Length]
Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address.
[Default Router Address]
Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast
address) cannot be entered.
[Use DHCPv6]
Select the check box when using a stateful address. When not using DHCPv6, clear the check box.
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
Checking whether the settings are correct
● Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer by using the IPv6 address of the
machine. Starting Remote UI(P. 279)
45
Setting Up
Selecting settings from the operation panel
● IPv6 settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<IPv4 Settings>/<IPv6 Settings>/<DNS Settings> (Touch panel model)(P. 324)
<IPv4 Settings>/<IPv6 Settings> (Black and white LCD model)(P. 328)
When you have changed the IP address after installing the printer driver
● You need to add a new port.
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 54)
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 47)
46
Setting Up
Viewing Network Settings
3S2W-010
Viewing IPv4 Settings(P. 47)
Viewing IPv6 Settings(P. 47)
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 47)
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 48)
● The IP address is not correctly configured if it is displayed as "0.0.0.0".
● Connecting the machine to a switching hub or bridge may result in a connection failure even when the IP
address is correctly configured. This problem can be solved by setting a certain interval before the machine
starts communicating. Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 64)
● You can print a list of the current network settings.
User Data List/System Manager Data List(P. 467)
Viewing IPv4 Settings
<Status Monitor> (
)
<Network Information>
<IPv4>
Select the setting to view
Check the
)
<Network Information>
<IPv6>
Select the setting to view
Check the
settings
Viewing IPv6 Settings
<Status Monitor> (
settings
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>.
➠ The MAC address is displayed.
47
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
Setting Up
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
3
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <Connection Information>/<Wireless LAN Information>.
6
Select the setting to view.
Viewing security information
● To view WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK information, use the following procedure.
Touch panel model
Select <Security Settings>.
Black and white LCD model
<Security Settings>
Select the displayed security protocol
Select the setting to view
Viewing from the <Status Monitor> screen
● <Wireless LAN Status> and <Latest Error Information> can be viewed from <Status Monitor> (
).
Touch panel model
<Status Monitor>
<Network Information>
<Network Connection Type>
Select the setting to view
Black and white LCD model
<Network Information>
setting to view
<Network Connection Method>
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
48
<Connection Information>
Select the
Setting Up
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 44)
Configuring DNS(P. 65)
49
Setting Up
Configuring Settings for Communication with a
Computer
3S2W-011
Specify the protocol and port when operating the machine from a computer via the network. Before configuring the
machine for printing from a computer, perform the basic setup procedures. For more information, see the manuals
for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 51)
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 54)
Setting Up Print Server(P. 57)
● Protocols explained here are rules for delivering document data between a computer and the machine, and
can be selected according to intended purposes or the network environment.
● Ports are gateways for passing data between network devices. If a communication failure occurs in the
network connection, the port settings may be the cause of the problem.
50
Setting Up
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions
3S2W-012
Configure the protocols that are used for printing documents from a networked computer.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Click [Network Settings].
4
Configure printing protocols.
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
Configuring LPD or RAW
1
Select [LPD Settings] or [RAW Settings]
2
Configure the settings as necessary.
[Edit].
[Use LPD Printing]
Select the check box to print via LPD. When not using LPD printing, clear the check box.
[Use RAW Printing]
Select the check box to print via RAW. When not using RAW printing, clear the check box.
[RX Timeout]
Set a value as the restart wait time for data reception. If data reception does not resume within the set
time, printing is canceled.
3
Click [OK].
51
Setting Up
Configuring WSD
1
Select [WSD Settings]
2
Configure the settings as necessary.
[Edit].
[Use WSD Printing]
Select the check box to print via WSD. When not using WSD printing, clear the check box.
[Use WSD Browsing]
Select the check box to obtain information about the machine from a computer via WSD. This check box is
automatically selected when the [Use WSD Printing] check box is selected.
[Use Multicast Discovery]
Select the check box to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages. If the check box is
cleared, the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast discovery messages are flowing on the
network.
3
5
Click [OK].
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
Selecting settings from the operation panel
● LPD, RAW, and WSD settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<LPD Settings>(P. 331)
<RAW Settings>(P. 331)
<WSD Settings>(P. 331)
Setting up WSD network devices
● The WSD network devices can be added from the printer folder. Open the printer folder ( Displaying the
Printer Folder(P. 512) ) click [Add a device] or [Add a printer] and follow the on-screen instructions. For
more information about how to install the driver for the WSD network, see the manuals for the relevant
drivers on the online manual website.
To change the port number
● The same port number used for the machine and a computer must be used for printing protocol.
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 54)
Changing Port Numbers(P. 245)
52
Setting Up
LINKS
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 54)
53
Setting Up
Configuring Printer Ports
3S2W-013
Printing errors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed, or when a printer has been added via
the Windows printer folder. These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings. For example, an
incorrect port number or port type may have been specified. In such situations, your attempt to print fails because the
document data cannot reach the machine. To fix this type of problem, configure the printer port settings on the
computer.
● To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
1
Open the printer folder.
2
Right-click the driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
3
Click the [Ports] tab and configure the required settings.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 512)
[Properties].
Adding a port
If you have changed the IP address of the machine or you have selected an incorrect port while installing
drivers, add a new port.
1
Click [Add Port].
2
Select [Standard TCP/IP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].
3
Click [Next].
4
Enter the IP address or the DNS name of the machine, and click [Next].
● The [Port Name] is entered automatically. If necessary, you can change it.
54
Setting Up
● When the next screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the screen.
*When
you select the [Device Type], select [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] under [Standard].
5
Click [Finish].
6
Click [Close].
Changing the port type or number
If the printing protocol (LPD or RAW) has been changed on the machine side ( Configuring Printing
Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 51) ) or the port number has been changed ( Changing Port
Numbers(P. 245) ), the corresponding settings on the computer must also be configured. This operation is
not needed for WSD ports.
1
Click [Configure Port].
2
Under [Protocol], select [Raw] or [LPR].
● If you selected [Raw], change the [Port Number].
● If you selected [LPR], enter "lp" in [Queue Name].
3
4
Click [OK].
Click [Close].
55
Setting Up
LINKS
Setting Up Print Server(P. 57)
56
Setting Up
Setting Up Print Server
3S2W-014
With a print server, you can reduce the load on the computer that you print from. The print server also makes it
possible to install the drivers on each computer over the network, which saves you the trouble of installing the drivers
on each computer by using the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM. To set up a computer on the network as a print server,
configure the settings for sharing the printer.
● To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
● You may be unable to install drivers over the network depending on the operating system and the bit
architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) of the print server and client computers.
● When implementing a print server in a domain environment, consult your Network Administrator.
To carry out Department ID Management when using a print server
● "Canon Driver Information Assist Service" must be added during the printer driver installation. For more
information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
1
2
3
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 512)
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
Click the [Sharing] tab, select [Share this printer], and enter the share name of the
machine.
● Click the [Change Sharing Options] button if displayed.
4
Install additional drivers as necessary.
● This operation is required if you want to install the drivers in other computers running a different bit
architecture via the print server.
57
Setting Up
1
Click [Additional Drivers].
2
Select the check box for the bit architecture that other computers are running, and click [OK].
● Select additional drivers from the following, according to the operating system of the print server.
Print server
Select the check box for
32-bit operating systems
[x64]
64-bit operating systems
[x86] under [Processor]
● If you do not know whether your Windows operating system is a 32-bit or 64-bit version, see
Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 514) .
3
4
5
Insert the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer, click [Browse] to specify the folder
that contains the drivers, and then click [OK].
● If the print server runs a 32-bit operating system, select [UFRII]
on the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
[uk_eng]
[x64]
● If the print server runs a 64-bit operating system, select [UFRII]
folders on the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
[uk_eng]
[32BIT]
[Driver] folders
[Driver]
Follow the on-screen instructions to install additional drivers.
Click [OK].
◼ Installing the Drivers on a Computer via the Print Server
1
Locate the shared printer in the print server.
2
Double-click the shared printer.
Print Server(P. 513)
58
Displaying Shared Printers in the
Setting Up
3
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.
LINKS
Printing from a Computer(P. 169)
59
Setting Up
Configuring the Machine for Your Network
Environment
3S2W-015
The configuration of a network varies depending on the purpose of the network. The machine has been designed to
be compatible with as many network configurations as possible, and it is equipped with a variety of technologies.
Consult your Network Administrator and set a configuration to suit your network environment.
Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 61)
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 63)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 64)
Configuring DNS(P. 65)
Configuring SMB(P. 69)
Configuring WINS(P. 71)
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 73)
Other Network Settings(P. 77)
60
Setting Up
Configuring Ethernet Settings
3S2W-016
Ethernet is a standard for communicating data in a local area network (LAN). You can set
the communication mode and the Ethernet type. In general, the machine can be used
without changing the defaults ( <Ethernet Driver Settings>(P. 336) ), but you can
change these settings to suit your network environment.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
3
Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>.
4
Select whether to configure Ethernet settings automatically or manually.
● If auto-detection is enabled, the machine detects and automatically sets the Ethernet communication mode
and the type that can be used.
Configuring Ethernet settings automatically
Touch panel model
Select <On> in <Auto Detect>.
Black and white LCD model
Select <Auto Detect>
<On>.
Configuring Ethernet settings manually
1
Configure a setting to disable Auto Detect.
Touch panel model
● Select <Off> in <Auto Detect>.
Black and white LCD model
● Select <Auto Detect>
2
<Communication Mode>
<Off>.
select the communication mode.
61
Setting Up
<Half Duplex>
Alternately sends and receives communication data. Select when the machine is connected to a
networking device using half duplex.
<Full Duplex>
Simultaneously sends and receives communication data. Use this setting for most environments.
3
<Ethernet Type>
4
Select <Apply>.
select the Ethernet type.
5
For the touch panel model, select <OK>.
6
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
LINKS
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 63)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 64)
62
Setting Up
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit
3S2W-017
In most Ethernet networks, the maximum size of a packet that can be sent is 1500 bytes. A packet refers to a chunk of
data into which the original data is divided before being sent. The maximum transmission unit (MTU) may vary on each
network. Change the settings of the machine as necessary. For more information, contact your Network Administrator.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings>
4
Select the MTU.
5
For the touch panel model, select <OK>.
6
Restart the machine.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
<MTU Size>.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
LINKS
Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 61)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 64)
63
Setting Up
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
3S2W-018
When a network is designed to enjoy redundant connectivity with multiple switching hubs or bridges, it must have a
mechanism to prevent packets from looping. One effective solution is to define the role of each switch port. However,
communication may still be disrupted for several tens of seconds immediately after you change the way that network
devices are connected, or if you add a new device. If this type of problem occurs, set a wait time for connecting to the
network.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
4
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
Select <Wait Time for Conn. at Startup>/<Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>.
Enter the waiting time required to start a communication with the network, and
press <Apply> ( ).
LINKS
Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 61)
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 63)
64
Setting Up
Configuring DNS
3S2W-019
DNS (Domain Name System) provides a service for name resolution that associates a host (or domain) name with an IP
address. Configure the DNS, mDNS, or DHCP option settings as necessary. Note that the procedures for configuring
DNS are different for IPv4 and IPv6.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Click [Network Settings].
4
Configure DNS settings.
Configuring IPv4 DNS
1
Select [IPv4 Settings]
2
Configure IPv4 DNS settings.
[Edit].
65
Starting Remote
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
Setting Up
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Acquire Host Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server.
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP
server.
[Acquire DNS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 6 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire Domain Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 15 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.
[Acquire WINS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 44 to obtain a WINS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire POP Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 70 to obtain a POP3 server address from the DHCP server.
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server.
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any.
[Host Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS
server.
[Domain Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as
"example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed. When specifying the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS
Dynamic Update Interval] text box.
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
66
Setting Up
Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the
[mDNS Name] text box.
3
Click [OK].
Configuring IPv6 DNS
1
Select [IPv6 Settings]
2
Configure IPv6 DNS settings.
[Edit].
● The [Use IPv6] check box must be selected to configure the settings.
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 44)
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Acquire DNS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 23 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire Domain Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 24 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be
entered.
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast
address) cannot be entered.
[Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.
[Host Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS
server.
[Domain Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as
"example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
67
Setting Up
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed. To specify the type(s) of addresses you want to register to the DNS server, select the
check box for [Register Manual Address], [Register Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless
Address]. To specify the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS Dynamic
Update Interval] text box.
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS.
[Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as in IPv4. To set a different name, clear the
check box and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.
3
5
Click [OK].
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
Selecting settings from the operation panel
● DNS settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<IPv4 Settings>/<IPv6 Settings>/<DNS Settings> (Touch panel model)(P. 324)
<IPv4 Settings>/<IPv6 Settings> (Black and white LCD model)(P. 328)
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 44)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 47)
68
Setting Up
Configuring SMB
3S2W-01A
Server Message Block (SMB) is a protocol for sharing resources, such as files and
printers, among multiple devices on a network. You need to use it to configure the
machine as a shared printer on an SMB network. Depending on your network, you may
have to set the NetBIOS name and workgroup name.
NetBIOS Name
In a Windows network that uses NetBIOS, NetBIOS names are used for identifying network-connected
computers as well as for file sharing and other network services. Most computers use the computer name as
the NetBIOS name.
Workgroup Name
Workgroup name is a name for grouping multiple computers so that basic network functions, such as file
sharing, become available in a Windows network. Specify the workgroup name to identify the group that the
machine belongs to.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Specify the required settings.
[SMB Settings].
69
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
Setting Up
[NetBIOS Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the NetBIOS name of the machine.
[Workgroup Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the workgroup that the machine belongs to.
● NetBIOS names or workgroup names that start with an asterisk (*) cannot be registered to a WINS server.
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
LINKS
Configuring WINS(P. 71)
70
Setting Up
Configuring WINS
3S2W-01C
Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) is a name resolution service that associates a NetBIOS name (a computer or
printer name in an SMB network) with an IP address. To enable WINS, the WINS server must be specified.
● In order to specify WINS server settings, NetBIOS name and workgroup name are required to be set.
Configuring SMB(P. 69)
● The function is not available in an IPv6 network.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [WINS Resolution] check box, and specify the required settings.
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[WINS Settings].
[WINS Resolution]
Select the check box to use WINS for name resolution. When not using WINS, clear the check box.
[WINS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of the WINS server.
71
Setting Up
● If the IP address of the WINS server is obtained from a DHCP server, the obtained IP address overrides the
IP address entered in the [WINS Server Address] text box.
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
Selecting settings from the operation panel
● WINS settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
72
<WINS Settings>(P. 331)
Setting Up
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP
3S2W-01E
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a
network by using Management Information Base (MIB). The machine supports SNMPv1 and security-enhanced
SNMPv3. You can check the status of the machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI.
You can enable either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3, or both at the same time. Specify the settings for each version to suit your
network environment and the purpose of use.
SNMPv1
SNMPv1 uses information called "community" to define the scope of SNMP communication. Because this
information is exposed to the network in plain text, your network will be vulnerable to attacks. If you want to
ensure network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3.
SNMPv3
With SNMPv3, you can implement network device management that is protected by robust security features.
Note that TLS must be enabled for the Remote UI before configuring SNMPv3 ( Configuring the Key and
Certificate for TLS(P. 248) ).
● The machine does not support the trap notification feature of SNMP.
● To change the port number of SNMP, see
Changing Port Numbers(P. 245) .
● SNMP management software, when installed on a computer on the network, enables you to configure,
monitor, and control the machine remotely from the computer. For more information, see the instruction
manuals for your management software.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager mode.
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
[SNMP Settings].
73
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
Setting Up
5
Specify SNMPv1 settings.
● If you do not need to change SNMPv1 settings, proceed to the next step.
[Use SNMPv1]
Select the check box to enable SNMPv1. You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Use Community Name 1]/[Use Community Name 2]
Select the check box to specify a community name. If you do not need to specify a community name, clear
the check box.
[Community Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the community.
[MIB Access Permission]
For each community, select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write]
Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only]
Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Use Dedicated Community]
Dedicated Community is a preset community, intended exclusively for Administrators using Canon software,
such as iW Management Console. Select the check box to use Dedicated Community, and specify [MIB Access
Permission]. If you do not need to use Dedicated Community, clear the check box.
6
Specify SNMPv3 settings.
● If you do not need to change SNMPv3 settings, proceed to the next step.
74
Setting Up
[Use SNMPv3]
Select the check box to enable SNMPv3. You can specify the rest of SNMPv3 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Enable User]
Select the check box to enable [User Settings 1]/[User Settings 2]/[User Settings 3]. To disable user settings,
clear the corresponding check box.
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.
[MIB Access Permission]
Select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write]
Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only]
Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Security Settings]
Select [Authentication On/Encryption On], [Authentication On/Encryption Off], or [Authentication Off/
Encryption Off] for the desired combination of authentication and encryption settings.
[Authentication Algorithm]
If you have selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] or [Authentication On/Encryption Off] in [Security
Settings], select the appropriate authentication algorithm for your network environment.
[Encryption Algorithm]
If you have selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] in [Security Settings], select the appropriate
encryption algorithm for your network environment.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the password in
the [Authentication Password] or [Encryption Password] text box. For confirmation, enter the same password
in the [Confirm] text box. Passwords can be set independently for authentication and encryption algorithms.
7
Specify Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings.
75
Setting Up
● With SNMP, the printer management information, such as printing protocols and printer ports, can be
monitored and obtained regularly from a computer on the network.
[Acquire Printer Management Information from Host]
Select the check box to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP.
To disable monitoring of the printer management information, clear the check box.
8
Click [OK].
9
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
Disabling SNMPv1
● If SNMPv1 is disabled, some of the functions of the machine become unavailable, such as obtaining machine
information via the printer driver.
Using the operation panel
● You can enable or disable the SNMP settings from <Menu>.
<SNMP Settings>(P. 333)
Enabling Both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3
● If both versions of SNMP are enabled, it is recommended that MIB access permission in SNMPv1 be set to
[Read Only]. MIB access permission can be set independently in SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 (and for each user in
SNMPv3). Selecting [Read/Write] (full access permission) in SNMPv1 negates the robust security features
that characterize SNMPv3 because most of the machine settings can then be controlled with SNMPv1.
LINKS
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 248)
76
Setting Up
Other Network Settings
3S2W-01F
Configure the following items according to your network environment.
Configuring SNTP(P. 77)
Monitoring the Machine from the Device Management Systems(P. 78)
Configuring SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) enables you to adjust the system clock by using the time server on the network.
If SNTP is used, the time server is checked at the specified intervals; therefore, the correct time can always be
maintained. The time is adjusted based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), so specify the time zone setting before
configuring SNTP ( Setting the Date/Time(P. 21) ). SNTP settings can be specified via the Remote UI.
● The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP (version 3) and SNTP (versions 3 and 4) servers.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 279)
Starting Remote
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use SNTP] check box and specify the required settings.
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[SNTP Settings].
[Use SNTP]
Select the check box to use SNTP for synchronization. If you do not want to use SNTP, clear the check box.
[NTP Server Name]
77
Setting Up
Enter the IP address of the NTP or the SNTP server. If DNS is available on the network, you can enter a host
name (or FQDN) consisting of alphanumeric characters instead (example: ntp.example.com).
[Polling Interval]
Specify the interval between one synchronization and the next.
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
Testing communication with the NTP/SNTP server
● You can view communication status with the registered server by clicking [Settings/Registration]
[Network
Settings] [Check NTP Server] in [SNTP Settings]. If a proper connection has been established, the result is
displayed as shown below. Note that this operation does not adjust the system clock.
Monitoring the Machine from the Device Management Systems
You can facilitate the collection and management of various information about networked devices by implementing
device management software, such as iW Management Console*, into the network. Information such as device
settings and error logs is retrieved and distributed via the server computer. If the machine is connected to such a
network, iW Management Console searches the network for the machine by using protocols such as Service Location
Protocol (SLP) to gather information from the machine, such as power supply status information. SLP settings can be
specified via the Remote UI. This section also describes the procedure to configure settings for communication
between the machine and plug-ins for iW Management Console.
*For
more information about iW Management Console, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
To use iW Management Console plug-ins
● You need to enable the settings of the dedicated port and the SNMP settings. As for the SNMP settings, set
[MIB Access Permission] to [Read/Write] for both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3.
<Use Dedicated Port>/<Dedicated Port Settings>(P. 335)
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 73)
Remote UI Operations
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
78
Setting Up
◼ Configuring SLP Communication with Device Management Software
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Click [Network Settings].
4
Specify SLP settings.
Starting Remote
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
Specifying multicast device discovery
1
Select [Multicast Discovery Settings]
2
Select the [Respond to Discovery] check box and specify the required settings.
[Edit].
[Respond to Discovery]
Select the check box to set the machine to respond to device management software multicast discovery
packets and enable monitoring by device management software.
● To change the port number for multicast discovery, see
Changing Port Numbers(P. 245) .
[Scope Name]
To include the machine into a specific scope, enter alphanumeric characters for the scope name.
3
Click [OK].
Notifying a device management software of the power status of the machine
1
Select [Sleep Mode Notification Settings]
2
Select the [Notify] check box and specify the required settings.
[Edit].
79
Setting Up
[Notify]
Select the check box to notify a device management software of the power status of the machine. When
[Notify] is selected, you can expect the machine to avoid unnecessary communication during sleep mode
and reduce the total power consumption.
[Port Number]
Change the port number for this function according to the network environment.
[Number of Routers to Traverse]
Specify how many routers the notification packets can pass through.
[Notification Interval]
Specify how often the machine notifies a device management software of its power status.
3
5
Click [OK].
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
◼ Configuring Settings for Communication between the Machine and Plug-ins
You can specify the settings to enable communication between the machine and iW Management Console plug-ins.
Use of plug-ins allows you to manage the machine's settings from iW Management Console.
<Menu>
<Preferences>
Management On/Off>
<Network>
<On>
80
<Device Settings Management>/<Device Settings
Setting Up
Installing Drivers
3S2W-01H
Install the various drivers and associated software on your computer.
1
Make the necessary preparation before proceeding with the installation.
● Install the optional devices on the main unit in advance.
Optional Equipment(P. 502)
● If the machine is supplied with a CD-ROM/DVD-ROM, insert the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the
computer.
● You can download drivers and software you are going to use from the Canon website (https://global.canon).
● When new versions of drivers and software become available, they will be uploaded to the Canon website.
You can download them as necessary after checking their system requirements.
● Depending on your machine or environmental conditions, some functions may not be available.
● Some of the drivers are not supported depending on the OS. For more information about the supported
status of the latest OS, see the Canon website.
2
Proceed with the installation.
● For more information about the installation procedure, see the manuals for the drivers and software you are
going to use.
● Installation of drivers is impossible if sending and receiving of the IP address are not permitted in [Firewall
Settings]. For more information, see Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 239) .
● If sending and receiving of the IP address of the computer on which drivers are installed become disabled by
[Firewall Settings], it is no longer possible to perform printing from that computer.
81
Basic Operations
Basic Operations
Basic Operations ............................................................................................................................................... 84
Parts and Their Functions ................................................................................................................................... 87
Front Side ....................................................................................................................................................... 88
Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................ 90
Interior ........................................................................................................................................................... 91
Multi-Purpose Tray ......................................................................................................................................... 92
Paper Drawer ................................................................................................................................................. 93
Operation Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 95
Turning ON the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 99
Turning OFF the Machine ............................................................................................................................. 100
Turning OFF the Machine by Remote Operation .................................................................................... 101
Powering OFF at a Fixed Time ................................................................................................................ 102
Restarting the Machine ................................................................................................................................ 104
Using the Operation Panel ............................................................................................................................... 106
Basic Screens ................................................................................................................................................ 107
Home Screen ......................................................................................................................................... 108
<Status Monitor> Screen ........................................................................................................................ 111
Message Display .................................................................................................................................... 115
Basic Operation ............................................................................................................................................ 116
Entering Text ................................................................................................................................................ 121
Logging in to the Machine ................................................................................................................................ 125
Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 126
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer .............................................................................................................. 128
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray ...................................................................................................... 134
Loading Envelopes ....................................................................................................................................... 139
Loading Preprinted Paper ............................................................................................................................ 142
Specifying Paper Size and Type .................................................................................................................... 144
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer ............................................................................. 145
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray ..................................................................... 147
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray .............................................................. 150
Registering a Custom Paper Size ........................................................................................................... 153
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed ........................................................................................................ 155
Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function ............................................... 156
Customizing the Display ................................................................................................................................... 158
Customizing the Home Screen ..................................................................................................................... 159
82
Basic Operations
Changing the Default Settings for Functions .................................................................................................. 161
Setting Sounds ................................................................................................................................................... 162
Entering Sleep Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 163
Using a USB Memory Device ............................................................................................................................. 165
83
Basic Operations
Basic Operations
3S2W-01J
This chapter describes basic operations, such as how to use the operation panel or how to load the paper, that are
frequently performed to use the functions of the machine.
◼ Parts and Their Functions
This section describes the exterior and interior parts of the machine and their functions, as well as how to use the keys
on the operation panel and how to view the display. Parts and Their Functions(P. 87)
◼ Turning ON the Machine
This section describes how to turn the machine ON and OFF.
Turning ON the Machine(P. 99)
◼ Using the Operation Panel
This section describes how to use the display for tasks such as selecting items and adjusting settings. Also, it describes
how to enter characters and numbers. Using the Operation Panel(P. 106)
◼ Logging in to the Machine
This section describes how to log in when a login screen is displayed.
84
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
Basic Operations
◼ Loading Paper
This section describes how to load the paper into the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray.
Loading Paper(P. 126)
◼ Customizing the Display
This section describes how to rearrange the displayed items in order to make it easier to use screens shown in the
display. Customizing the Display(P. 158)
◼ Changing the Default Settings for Functions
This section describes how to change the setting that is displayed initially when a function is selected.
Default Settings for Functions(P. 161)
Changing the
◼ Setting Sounds
This section describes how to adjust the volume of various machine sounds, such as those produced when an error
occurs. Setting Sounds(P. 162)
85
Basic Operations
◼ Entering Sleep Mode
This section describes how to set the sleep mode.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 163)
◼ Using a USB Memory Device
This section describes about the available USB memory devices and how to insert/remove the USB memory device.
Using a USB Memory Device(P. 165)
86
Basic Operations
Parts and Their Functions
3S2W-01K
This section describes the parts of the machine (exterior, front and back side, and interior) and how they function. In
addition to describing the parts of the machine used for such basic operations as loading paper and replacing the
toner cartridges, this section also describes the keys on the operation panel and display. Read this section for tips on
how to use the machine properly.
Front Side(P. 88)
Back Side(P. 90)
Interior(P. 91)
Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 92)
Paper Drawer(P. 93)
Operation Panel(P. 95)
87
Basic Operations
Front Side
3S2W-01L
Output tray
Printed paper is output to the output tray.
USB port (for USB device connection)
Use this port to connect a third-party USB memory device or USB keyboard. Connecting a USB memory
device allows you to print data from the memory device.
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 182)
Paper stopper
Open the paper stopper when you want to prevent paper from falling out of the output tray.
Lift handles
Hold the lift handles when carrying the machine.
Relocating the Machine(P. 458)
Power switch
Turns the power ON or OFF. To restart the machine, turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and
turn it back ON.
Front cover
Open the front cover when replacing toner cartridges.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 453)
Paper drawer
Load the type of paper you frequently use into the paper drawer.
Drawer(P. 128)
88
Loading Paper in the Paper
Basic Operations
Multi-purpose tray/Manual feed slot
Load the paper into the multi-purpose tray when you want to temporarily use a type of paper different from
that which is loaded in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 134)
● In the User's Guide, "manual feed slot," if it does not need to be distinguished from "multi-purpose tray," is
collectively referred to as "multi-purpose tray."
Ventilation slots
Air from inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in
front of the ventilation slots prevents ventilation.
Operation panel
The operation panel consists of keys such as Home key, Stop key, a display, and status indicators. You can
perform all the operations and specify settings from the operation panel.
Operation Panel(P. 95)
Basic Screens(P. 107)
89
Basic Operations
Back Side
3S2W-01R
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw / LBP623Cdw
LBP621Cw
Rear cover
Open the rear cover when clearing paper jams. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the
online manual website.
Rating label
The label shows the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine. For more
information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.
Power socket
Connect the power cord.
USB port (for USB device connection) (LBP664Cx)
Use this port to connect devices such as a third-party USB keyboard.
USB port (for computer connection)
Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer.
LAN port
Connect a LAN cable when connecting the machine to a wired LAN router, etc.
LAN(P. 26)
90
Connecting to a Wired
Basic Operations
Interior
3S2W-01S
Toner cartridge tray
Install the toner cartridges. Load the Y (yellow), M (magenta), C (cyan), and K (black) toner cartridges in the
slots from the rear to the front respectively. Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 453)
LINKS
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 451)
91
Basic Operations
Multi-Purpose Tray
3S2W-01U
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to exactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the
machine.
For LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
● Press the lock release lever that is indicated with an arrow in the illustration to release the lock and slide
the paper guides.
Paper tray
Pull out the paper tray when loading paper.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 134)
92
Basic Operations
Paper Drawer
3S2W-01W
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to exactly the size of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the
machine. Press the lock release levers that are indicated with arrows in the illustrations to release the locks
and slide the paper guides.
Lock release lever (for extending the paper drawer)
When loading Legal size paper, the paper drawer needs to be extended. Press this lever to release the lock
and extend the length of the paper drawer.
When loading Legal size paper
● When the extended paper drawer is inserted, its front side is not flush with the machine.
93
Basic Operations
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 128)
94
Basic Operations
Operation Panel
3S2W-01X
Operation Panel of Touch Panel Model(P. 95)
Operation Panel of Black and White LCD Model(P. 96)
Operation Panel of Touch Panel Model
● The angle of the operation panel can be adjusted. Adjust it to an angle that is most comfortable for
viewing the panel. Adjusting the Angle(P. 96)
Display
You can view the progress of the machine and error statuses. The display is also a touch panel, so you can
specify settings by touching the screen directly.
Basic Screens(P. 107)
Basic Operation(P. 116)
Sound Volume key
Press to adjust volume.
Setting Sounds(P. 162)
Energy Saver key
Press to put the machine into the sleep mode. The key lights up green when the machine is in the sleep
mode. Press the key again to exit sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 163)
Data indicator
Blinks while an operation is being performed, such as data transmission or printing. Lights up when there
are documents waiting to be processed.
Error indicator
Blinks or lights up when an error such as a paper jam occurs.
95
Basic Operations
Home key
Press to display the Home screen, which provides access to the setting menu and functions such as Memory
Media Print and Secure Print.
Home Screen(P. 108)
Customizing the Home Screen(P. 159)
Stop key
Press to cancel printing and other operations.
NFC (Near Field Communication) mark
You can also use functions such as printing by waving a mobile device with Canon PRINT Business installed
over this mark. Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 201)
Adjusting the Angle
When it is difficult to view the touch panel display, adjust the angle of the operation panel.
Operation Panel of Black and White LCD Model
Display
You can view the operation and error statuses of this machine, the amount remaining in the toner cartridges,
and other conditions. Basic Screens(P. 107)
Home key
Press to display the Home screen, which provides access to the setting menu and functions such as Memory
Media Print and Secure Print. Home Screen(P. 108)
96
Basic Operations
Back key
Press to return to the previous screen. If you press this key when specifying settings, for example, the
settings are not applied and the display returns to the previous screen.
Numeric keys ([0]-[9] keys)
Press to enter numbers and text.
Entering Text on the Black and White LCD Model(P. 122)
[*] key
Press to switch the type of text that is entered.
Data indicator
Blinks while an operation is being performed, such as data transmission or printing. Lights up when there
are documents waiting to be processed.
Error indicator
Blinks or lights up when an error such as a paper jam occurs.
Energy Saver key
Press to put the machine into sleep mode. The key lights up green when the machine is in sleep mode. Press
the key again to exit sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 163)
Status Monitor key
Press to check the printing status, to view the usage history, or to view the network settings such as the IP
address of the machine. You can also check the status of the machine, such as the remaining amount of
paper and the amount remaining in the toner cartridges, or whether any errors occurred. <Status
Monitor> Screen of Black and White LCD Model(P. 112)
[ID] key
Press after entering the ID and PIN to log on when Department ID Management is enabled. After you finish
using the machine, press this key again to log off. Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
Clear key
Press to delete the entered numbers and text.
Stop key
Press to cancel printing and other operations.
[#] key
Press to enter symbols such as "@" or "/".
[
] key
When specifying settings, press to return to the previous screen. When entering numbers, press to move the
cursor to the left.
97
Basic Operations
[
] key
When specifying settings, press to select the item immediately above the currently selected item. When
changing setting values, press to increase a value.
[
] key
When specifying settings, press to proceed to the next screen. When entering numbers, press to move the
cursor to the right.
[
] key
When specifying settings, press to select the item immediately below the currently selected item. When
changing setting values, press to decrease a value.
[
] key
Press to apply settings or specified details.
LINKS
Basic Operation(P. 116)
98
Basic Operations
Turning ON the Machine
3S2W-01Y
This section describes how to turn ON the machine.
1
Make sure that the power plug is firmly inserted into a power outlet.
2
Press the power switch.
➠ The Start screen appears.
Operation Panel(P. 95)
● You can select the screen that is displayed first after the machine is turned ON.
Startup/Restoration>(P. 307)
LINKS
Turning OFF the Machine(P. 100)
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
99
<Default Screen After
Basic Operations
Turning OFF the Machine
3S2W-020
This section describes how to turn OFF the machine.
1
Press the power switch.
● It may take some time for the machine to completely shut down. Do not unplug the power cord until the
display turns off.
● To restart the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds after the machine is turned OFF.
● You can also turn OFF the machine from a computer.
Operation(P. 101)
Turning OFF the Machine by Remote
● You can specify the time for each day of the week and configure a setting to automatically turn OFF the
machine. Powering OFF at a Fixed Time(P. 102)
100
Basic Operations
Turning OFF the Machine by Remote Operation
3S2W-021
You can turn OFF the machine from a computer on the same network without going to where the machine is installed.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Device Management]
4
Check [Device Status] to make sure that no functions are being processed, and click
5
Click [OK].
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Remote Shutdown].
[Execute].
Restarting the machine by remote operation
● You can restart the machine by clicking [Restart Device] on the [Settings/Registration] screen of the Remote
UI. Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
101
Basic Operations
Powering OFF at a Fixed Time
3S2W-022
You can make a setting so that the power is automatically tuned OFF at a specified time on each day of the week. This
allows you to avoid useless power consumption that may occur due to failure to turn OFF the power. By default, this
function is disabled.
● For information about the basic operation to set up the machine from Remote UI, see
Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Timer Settings]
4
Setting Up Menu
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Edit].
Select the check box for [Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer], and set the time to turn
OFF the power.
[Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer]
Selecting the check box allows you to set the time to turn OFF the power on each day of the week.
[Sunday] to [Saturday]
102
Basic Operations
Enter the desired time to turn OFF the power. For any day of the week, leaving the time field blank means
that the auto shutdown function is disabled for that day.
5
Click [OK].
If the power is not turned OFF automatically at the specified time*
● When the Data indicator is lit up or blinking
● When the menu screen or Check Counter screen is displayed
● When settings data is being imported/exported
● When the firmware is being updated
*If
the power cannot be turned OFF automatically at the specified time, a retry will be performed up to ten times at intervals
of one minute. If the power cannot be turned OFF even after ten retries, auto shutdown will be impossible for that day.
103
Basic Operations
Restarting the Machine
3S2W-08H
Depending on the setting items that have been changed, you may need to make the changes effective by restarting
the machine. This section describes how to restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine by an Operation on the Main Unit(P. 104)
Restarting the Machine by Remote Operation(P. 104)
Restarting the Machine by an Operation on the Main Unit
1
Press the power switch.
● It may take some time for the machine to completely shut down.
➠ When the machine shuts down, the display or Energy Saver key of the operation panel turns off.
2
Wait at least 10 seconds after the shutdown, then press the power switch again.
➠ The machine starts.
Restarting the Machine by Remote Operation
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Click [Restart Device] in the menu on the left side of the screen.
104
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
Basic Operations
4
Check [Device Status] to make sure that no functions are being processed, and click
5
Click [OK].
[Execute].
➠ A restart process begins. Communication remains disconnected until the main unit has restarted.
105
Basic Operations
Using the Operation Panel
3S2W-023
You can use the display and keys of the operation panel to configure machine settings or operate functions. This
section describes basic usage of the display and keys.
Basic Screens(P. 107)
Basic Operation(P. 116)
Entering Text(P. 121)
● If you want to invert the light and dark parts of the display:
● If you want to adjust the brightness of the display:
● If you want to adjust the contrast of the display:
<Invert Screen Colors>(P. 342)
<Brightness>(P. 342)
<Contrast>(P. 343)
LINKS
Operation Panel(P. 95)
106
Basic Operations
Basic Screens
3S2W-024
The Home screen or settings screen appears on the display, allowing you to initiate functions such as Memory Media
Print and Secure Print. You can also use the display to check information such as error messages and the machine's
operation status. To operate the touch panel model, directly touch the display.
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Status Monitor> Screen(P. 111)
Message Display(P. 115)
● You can customize the Home screen by rearranging frequently used buttons for easier access to the
respective functions. Customizing the Display(P. 158)
To Know How to Operate
● On some screens, the <?> button allows you to view the descriptions of functions or how to operate.
107
Basic Operations
Home Screen
3S2W-025
The Home screen is displayed when the power is turned ON or by pressing
to specify settings for and register functions.
on the operation panel. Use this screen
Home Screen of Touch Panel Model(P. 108)
Home Screen of Black and White LCD Model(P. 109)
Home Screen of Touch Panel Model
Change page
Use this to view another page in the Home screen. You
can also flick sideways to change pages.
Amount remaining in the toner cartridges
Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridges in
stages.
<Check Counter>
Displays the totals for black and white and color printouts
separately. Viewing the Counter Value(P. 465)
<Log Out>
Use this button to log out from the machine.
<Status Monitor>
Press to check the printing status, to view the usage
history, or to view the network settings such as the IP
address of the machine. You can also check the status of
the machine, such as the remaining amount of paper and
the amount remaining in the toner cartridges, or whether
any errors that occurred. <Status Monitor>
Screen(P. 111)
Wi-Fi icon
Displayed when the machine is connected to a wireless
LAN.
User name/ID
The name or ID of the logged in user is displayed.
108
Basic Operations
<Memory Media Print>
Prints files stored in a USB memory device. Printing
from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)
(P. 182)
<Secure Print>
Use this function to print a secure document. Printing
a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 177)
<Menu>
<Function Settings>, <Preferences>, and many other
machine settings start from this button. Setting Menu
List(P. 305)
<Paper Settings>
This button is used for specifying the size and type of
paper loaded in the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray.
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 144)
Application Library button
You can use these buttons to conveniently perform a
function by a one-touch operation. For more information,
see the manual for Application Library on the online
manual website.
<Mobile Portal>
Use this to establish a connection to a mobile device.
Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 201)
<Home Screen Settings>
Allows you to change the order that Home screen buttons
are displayed in. Customizing the Home
Screen(P. 159)
<Update Firmware>
Allows you to update the firmware via the Internet.
Updating the Firmware(P. 299)
Home Screen of Black and White LCD Model
Wi-Fi icon
Displayed when the machine is connected to a wireless
LAN.
109
Basic Operations
Amount remaining in the toner cartridges
Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridges in
stages. This is hidden while the Home screen is active.
<Menu>
<Function Settings>, <Preferences>, and many other
machine settings start from this button. Setting Menu
List(P. 305)
<Paper Settings>
This button is used for specifying the size and type of
paper loaded in the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray.
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 144)
<Memory Media Print>
Prints files stored in a USB memory device. Printing
from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)
(P. 182)
<Secure Print>
Use this function to print a secure document. Printing
a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 177)
<Mobile Portal>
Use this to establish a connection to a mobile device.
Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 201)
<Display Order (Home)>
Allows you to change the order that Home screen buttons
are displayed in. Customizing the Home
Screen(P. 159)
LINKS
Customizing the Home Screen(P. 159)
110
Basic Operations
<Status Monitor> Screen
3S2W-026
), a screen appears in which you can check the progress of documents as well as
When you press <Status Monitor> (
the status of the machine and network setting information.
<Status Monitor> Screen of Touch Panel Model(P. 111)
<Status Monitor> Screen of Black and White LCD Model(P. 112)
<Status Monitor> Screen of Touch Panel Model
<Error Information/Notification>
Displays the details of any errors that occurred. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the
online manual website.
<Device Information>
Displays the status of the machine.
<Paper Information>
Displays whether paper is loaded in each paper source.
<Cartridge Information>
Displays the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges. Other internal parts may reach the end of
their lifetime before the toner runs out.
<Secure Print Memory Usage>
Displays the amount of memory currently used for storing secured document data.
Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 177)
<Version Information>
Displays firmware version information.
111
Printing a
Basic Operations
<Serial Number>
Displays the serial number of the machine.
Status and logs of printed and received documents
Displays the current status of the selected item. The <Print Job> screen is shown below as an example.
<Network Information>
Displays the network settings such as the IP address of the machine and status such as the condition of
wireless LAN communications. Viewing Network Settings(P. 47)
IP Address
Displays the IPv4 address of the machine.
● You can specify whether to display the IP address on the <Status Monitor> screen by setting <Display IP
Address>. <Display IP Address>(P. 311)
<Rmv. Mem. Media>
Used to safely remove a USB memory device. This is only displayed when a USB memory device is connected
to the machine. Remove the USB Memory Device(P. 165)
<Status Monitor> Screen of Black and White LCD Model
IP Address
Displays the IPv4 address of the machine.
112
Basic Operations
● You can specify whether to display the IP address on the <Status Monitor> screen by setting <Display IP
Address>. <Display IP Address>(P. 311)
<Error Information/Notification>
Displays the details of any errors that occurred. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the
online manual website.
<Device Status>
Displays the status of the machine.
<Paper Information>
Displays whether paper is loaded in each paper source.
<Cartridge Level>
Displays the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges. Other internal parts may reach the end of
their lifetime before the toner runs out.
<Remove Memory Media>
Used to safely remove a USB memory device. This is only displayed when a USB memory device is
connected to the machine. Remove the USB Memory Device(P. 165)
<Check Counter>
Displays the separate totals for black and white and color printouts.
Viewing the Counter Value(P. 465)
<Secure Print Memory Usage>
Displays the amount of memory currently used for storing secured document data.
Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 177)
Printing a
<Version Information>
Displays firmware version information.
<Serial Number>
Displays the serial number of the machine.
Status and logs of printed and received documents
Displays the current status of the selected item. The <Print Job Status> screen is shown below as an example.
<Network Information>
Displays the network settings such as the IP address of the machine and status such as the condition of
wireless LAN communications. Viewing Network Settings(P. 47)
113
Basic Operations
114
Basic Operations
Message Display
3S2W-027
Messages are displayed on the screen in situations such as when paper runs out or when the expiration of the toner
cartridge lifetime is reached. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.
Touch panel model
Black and white LCD model
When an Error Occurs
In some cases when an error occurs, instructions on how to respond to the error are displayed. Follow the onscreen instructions to solve the problem. The screen displayed when a paper jam occurs is shown below as an
example.
Touch panel model
Black and white LCD model
115
Basic Operations
Basic Operation
3S2W-028
Basic Operation of Touch Panel Model(P. 116)
Basic Operation of Black and White LCD Model(P. 118)
Basic Operation of Touch Panel Model
The display is a touch panel, allowing you to operate directly on the screen.
Avoid the following actions.
● The display may malfunction or be damaged.
- Pressing forcefully
- Pressing with pointed objects (fingernails, ballpoint pen, pencil, etc.)
- Operating with wet/soiled hands
- Operating the display while an object is placed on it
● Before using the touch panel display, peel off the protective film from the display.
Tap
Touch the screen lightly and quickly. Use for selecting or finalizing items.
Flick
Flick with the finger on the display. The effect of flicking varies depending on the screen. For instance, flicking in
the Home screen moves you one page in the direction of the flick.
116
Basic Operations
◼ Selecting Items
Tap an item name or button to make a selection.
If an item is mistakenly touched
● Slide your finger away then release it from the screen to cancel the selection.
To return to the previous screen
● Tap
to return to the previous screen.
◼ Scrolling the Screen
The scroll bar appears on the screen when there is still information that is undisplayed. If the scroll bar is displayed,
flick the screen to scroll in the direction of the flick. Note that the scroll bar only appears while the screen is being
touched.
117
Basic Operations
◼ Changing the Setting Value
Tap <+>/<-> to adjust the setting on the scale. You can also adjust a setting by flicking the slider left or right.
● You can change a variety of display-related settings, such as the display language:
Settings>(P. 307)
<Display
● You can change the screen that is automatically displayed when the machine remains idle for a specified
length of time: <Function After Auto Reset>(P. 316)
● You can change various settings about the operability such as screen brightness:
<Accessibility>(P. 342)
Basic Operation of Black and White LCD Model
Use the keys shown below to specify settings and adjust values.
Using
/
Scrolling the Screen
The scroll bar is displayed on the right side of the screen when not all of the information fits on one screen. If
the scroll bar is displayed, use
/
to scroll up or down. The text and background colors of an item are
inverted when it is selected.
118
Basic Operations
Changing Setting Values
/
to enter values. If an icon such as below is displayed at the upper left of the screen, you can
Use
enter values directly using the numeric keys. Entering Text(P. 121)
● Values in ( ) displayed below the entry box are the enterable value range.
/
Using
Proceeding to the Next Screen/Returning to the Previous Screen
Press
to proceed to the next screen. Press
to return to the previous screen.
● You can also proceed to the next screen by pressing
, and return to the previous screen by pressing
.
Changing Setting Values
Use
/
to adjust the slider scale.
Moving the Cursor
Use
/
to enter text and values.
Entering Text(P. 121)
Using
Press
to apply a setting.
Using the Numeric Keys
Use the numeric keys to enter text and values.
Entering Text(P. 121)
119
Basic Operations
● You can change a variety of display-related settings, such as the display language:
Settings>(P. 307)
<Display
● You can change the screen that is automatically displayed when the machine remains idle for a specified
length of time: <Function After Auto Reset>(P. 316)
● You can change a variety of accessibility-related settings, such as the scroll speed:
120
<Accessibility>(P. 342)
Basic Operations
Entering Text
3S2W-029
20HS-029
Entering Text on the Touch Panel Model(P. 121)
Entering Text on the Black and White LCD Model(P. 122)
Entering Characters Using a USB Keyboard(P. 124)
Entering Text on the Touch Panel Model
When entering text or a number, use the keyboard displayed on the screen. The numeric keys are displayed on the
screen to enter only numbers.
Switching the Type of Character
Tap <a> or <1/#> to switch the type of character that is entered.
● To enter upper case characters, tap
.
Deleting Text
One character is deleted each time
characters.
is tapped. Holding down
allows you to delete successive
Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)
Tap
or
to move the cursor. To enter a space, move the cursor to the end of the text, and tap
.
When the Numeric Keys are Displayed
When you are supposed to enter only a numeric value, the numeric keys are displayed on the screen. Tap
numeric keys to enter the numeric value.
121
Basic Operations
Value range
● The values in ( ) displayed the entry box are the enterable value range.
When buttons other than the numeric keys are displayed
● When <+>/<-> or
/
are displayed, you can tap the buttons to increase or decrease the numeric
value or move the cursor.
Entering Text on the Black and White LCD Model
Use the numeric keys to enter text and values.
Switching the Type of Text
Press
to switch the type of text that is entered.
● You can also select <Entry Mode> and press
Types of Text That Can Be Entered
Text that can be entered is listed below.
122
to switch the type of text.
Basic Operations
Key
A
a
12
@.-_/
1
ABC
abc
2
DEF
def
3
GHI
ghi
4
JKL
jkl
5
MNO
mno
6
PQRS
pqrs
7
TUV
tuv
8
WXYZ
wxyz
9
(Not available)
0
(space) -.*#!",;:^`_=/|'?$@%&+\~()[]{}<> (Not available)
● Press
or select <Symbol> and press
when the type of text that is entered is <A> or <a> to
display enterable symbols in the screen. Use
and press
/
/
/
to select the symbol you want to enter,
.
Deleting Text
One character is deleted each time
is pressed. Press and hold
to delete all of the entered text.
Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)
Press
or
to move the cursor. To enter a space, move the cursor to the end of the text, and press
Example of Entering Text and Numbers
Example: "Canon-1"
1
Press
repeatedly until <A> is selected.
2
Press
repeatedly until the letter "C" is selected.
3
Press
repeatedly until <a> is selected.
4
Press
repeatedly until the letter "a" is selected.
5
Press
repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.
6
Press
repeatedly until the letter "o" is selected.
7
Press
repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.
8
Press
repeatedly until the symbol "-" is selected.
9
Press
repeatedly until <12> is selected.
10
Press
.
123
.
Basic Operations
11
Select <Apply> and press
.
Entering Characters Using a USB Keyboard
You can connect a keyboard to the USB port for USB devices on the
Front Side(P. 88) or Back Side(P. 90) and
enter text from the keyboard. Even while the keyboard is connected, you can enter text from the operation panel.
● Some keys on the USB keyboard, such as the [Backspace], [Home] and [End] keys, cannot be used. When
keys that cannot be used are pressed, nothing is entered or changed.
● To delete text, press the [Delete] key.
● Pressing the [RETURN/ENTER] key completes text entry in the same way as selecting <Apply>.
● You can specify the type of keyboard layout (US layout or UK layout).
<English Keyboard Layout>(P. 312)
● You can disconnect the USB keyboard from the machine at any time. No special operation is required to
disconnect it.
● Depending on the display language, you may not be able to enter some characters correctly.
● The USB keyboard may not operate correctly depending on its type.
124
Basic Operations
Logging in to the Machine
3S2W-02A
If Department ID Management is enabled or System Manager IDs are enabled, you must log in before using the
machine. When the login screen appears, use the procedure below to enter the Department ID and PIN.
1
Enter the ID.
1
Select <Department ID> or <System Manager ID>.
2
Enter the ID.
● If no PIN is registered, proceed to step 3.
2
Enter the PIN.
1
Select <PIN>.
2
Enter the PIN.
3
Press <Log In> (
).
➠ The login screen will be changed to the Home screen.
● After you finish using the machine, press <Log Out> (
LINKS
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 228)
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 226)
125
) to display the login screen.
Basic Operations
Loading Paper
3S2W-02C
You can load the paper into the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray. Load the paper you usually use into the paper
drawer. The paper drawer is convenient when using large amounts of paper. Use the multi-purpose tray when you
temporarily use a size or type of paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer. See Available Paper(P. 489) for
available paper sizes and types.
About Paper
Precautions for Paper(P. 126)
Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine(P. 127)
How to Load Paper
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 128)
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 134)
Loading Envelopes(P. 139)
Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 142)
Configuring the Settings for the Loaded Paper
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 144)
Precautions for Paper
Do not use the following types of paper:
● A paper jam or printing error may occur.
- Wrinkled or creased paper
- Curled or rolled paper
- Torn paper
- Damp paper
- Very thin paper
- Thin coarse paper
- Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
- Back side of paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
- Highly textured paper
- Glossy paper
Notes on use of paper
● Only use paper that has fully acclimatized to the environment in which the machine is installed. Using paper
that has been stored under different temperature or humidity conditions may cause paper jams or result in
poor print quality.
126
Basic Operations
Paper handling and storage
● It is recommended that you use paper as soon as possible after unwrapping. Paper remaining unused
should be covered with the original wrapping paper and stored on a flat surface.
● Keep the paper wrapped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness.
● Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold.
● Do not store the paper vertically or do not stack too much paper.
● Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place subject to high humidity, dryness, or drastic changes
in temperature or humidity.
When printing on paper that has absorbed moisture
● Steam may emit from the paper output area, or water droplets may form around the paper output area.
There is nothing unusual about any of these occurrences, which occur when the heat generated from fixing
toner on the paper causes moisture in the paper to evaporate (most likely to occur at low room
temperatures).
Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine
When handling/storing the paper printed with the machine, take the following precautions.
◼ How to Store the Printed Paper
● Store on a flat surface.
● Do not store together with articles made of PVC (polyvinyl chloride) such as clear folders. Toner may melt, resulting
in the paper's sticking to PVC articles.
● Take care that the paper does not get folded or creased. Toner may peel off.
● To store over a long period of time (two years or longer), store in binders or equivalent.
● When the paper is stored over a long period of time, it may become discolored and thus the print may seem to have
undergone a change of color.
● Do not store in a place where the temperature is high.
◼ Precautions When Applying Adhesive
● Always use insoluble adhesive.
● Before applying adhesive, perform a test using a printout no longer required.
● When putting adhesive-applied paper sheets one over another, make sure that the adhesive is completely dried out.
LINKS
Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 153)
127
Basic Operations
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
3S2W-02E
1660-02Y
Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer. When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the
paper drawer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 134)
Loading Regular Size Paper(P. 128)
Loading Custom Size Paper(P. 130)
● When using A5 size paper, see Loading Custom Size Paper(P. 130) and load it in the landscape
orientation. When loading paper in the portrait orientation, follow the steps shown in Loading Regular
Size Paper(P. 128) .
Landscape orientation
Portrait orientation
● Follow the procedure below when loading paper into the optional cassette feeding module.
Loading Regular Size Paper
To load paper whose size is found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use the following procedure. For
paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings, see Loading Custom Size Paper(P. 130) .
1
Pull out the paper drawer until it stops, and remove it while lifting the front side.
2
Adjust the positions of the paper guides to the paper size you want to use.
● While pressing the lock release lever, move the paper guide to align the projection to the appropriate paper
size marking.
128
Basic Operations
When loading Legal size paper
● Press the lock release lever, and extend the paper drawer.
3
Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the paper guide
on the front side of the paper drawer.
● Load the paper with the print side face up.
● Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges of the paper stack.
Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper
● Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line (
cause paper jams.
129
). Loading too much paper can
Basic Operations
● When loading paper with a logo, see
4
Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 142) .
Insert the paper drawer into the machine.
● When you insert the paper drawer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a confirmation screen
is displayed.
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 434)
When loading Legal size paper
● When the extended paper drawer is inserted, its front side is not flush with the machine.
»
Continue to
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 145)
When changing the paper size or type
● The factory default settings for paper size and type are <A4> and <Plain 2>, respectively. If you load a
different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not change
the settings, the machine cannot print properly.
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
● You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
paper drawer or multi-purpose tray ( Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 134) ), with the side to
print face up (previously printed side face down).
- When using the multi-purpose tray, load one sheet of paper each time you print.
- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
- If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.
<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>(P. 350)
- If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.
Loading Custom Size Paper
To load custom size paper or other paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use
the following procedure.
130
Basic Operations
1
Pull out the paper drawer until it stops, and remove it while lifting the front side.
2
Spread the paper guides apart.
● Press the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward.
When loading longer paper than A4 size
● Press the lock release lever, and extend the paper drawer.
3
Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the rear side of
the paper drawer.
● Load the paper with the print side face up.
● Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges of the paper stack.
131
Basic Operations
Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper
● Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line (
). Loading too much paper can
cause paper jams.
● When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see
4
Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 142) .
Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
● Press the lock release lever and slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the
edges of the paper.
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
● Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
5
Insert the paper drawer into the machine.
● When you insert the paper drawer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a confirmation screen
is displayed.
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 434)
132
Basic Operations
When loading longer paper than A4 size
● When the extended paper drawer is inserted, its front side is not flush with the machine.
»
Continue to
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 145)
When changing the paper size or type
● The factory default settings for paper size and type are <A4> and <Plain 2>, respectively. If you load a
different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not change
the settings, the machine cannot print properly.
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
● You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
paper drawer or multi-purpose tray ( Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 134) ), with the side to
print face up (previously printed side face down).
- When using the multi-purpose tray, load one sheet of paper each time you print.
- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
- If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.
<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>(P. 350)
- If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.
LINKS
Available Paper(P. 489)
133
Basic Operations
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray
3S2W-02F
1660-030
When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray.
Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 128)
For LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw(P. 134)
For LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw(P. 136)
For LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
Make sure to insert the paper drawer
● The machine only prints when the paper drawer is inserted, even if paper is loaded in the multi-purpose
tray. An error message is displayed if you attempt to print without inserting the paper drawer.
When loading A5 size paper
● When setting the paper size, make sure the current paper orientation.
the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 147)
Landscape orientation
1
Portrait orientation
Open the cover.
● Hold the both sides of the cover to open it.
2
Pull out the paper tray.
134
Specifying Paper Size and Type in
Basic Operations
3
Spread the paper guides apart.
● Press the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward.
4
Insert the paper into the multi-purpose tray until the paper stops.
● Load the paper with the print side face up.
● Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges of the paper stack.
Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper
● Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line (
cause paper jams.
135
). Loading too much paper can
Basic Operations
● When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see
Paper(P. 142) .
5
Loading Envelopes(P. 139) or
Loading Preprinted
Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
● Slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the paper.
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
● Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
»
Continue to
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 147)
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
● You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
paper drawer ( Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 128) ) or multi-purpose tray, with the side to print
face up (previously printed side face down).
- When using the multi-purpose tray, load one sheet of paper each time you print.
- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
- If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.
<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>(P. 350)
- If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.
For LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw
Make sure to insert the paper drawer
● The machine only prints when the paper drawer is inserted, even if paper is loaded in the manual feed slot.
An error message is displayed if you attempt to print without inserting the paper drawer.
Load only one sheet of paper at a time
● Only one sheet of paper can be loaded each time you print.
136
Basic Operations
When loading A5 size paper
● When setting the paper size, make sure the current paper orientation.
the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 147)
Landscape orientation
1
Specifying Paper Size and Type in
Portrait orientation
Spread the paper guides apart.
● Slide the paper guides outward.
2
Insert the paper and align the paper guides against the width of the paper.
● Load the paper with the print side face up.
● Insert the paper 10 mm to 20 mm into the manual feed slot, and then slide the paper guides inward until
they are aligned securely against the edges of the paper.
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
● Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
3
Insert the paper slowly into the manual feed slot until it reaches the back of the slot.
● The paper is pulled slightly into the machine after it reaches the back of the slot.
137
Basic Operations
● To ensure that the paper is loaded squarely, hold it with both hands until the pull-in operation is complete.
● When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see
Paper(P. 142) .
»
Continue to
Loading Envelopes(P. 139) or
Loading Preprinted
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 147)
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
● You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
paper drawer (
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 128) ) or manual feed slot, with the side to print
face up (previously printed side face down).
- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
- If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.
<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>(P. 350)
- If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.
LINKS
Available Paper(P. 489)
138
Basic Operations
Loading Envelopes
3S2W-02H
Make sure to flatten any curls on envelopes before loading them. Also pay attention to the orientation of envelopes
and which side is face up.
Before Loading Envelopes(P. 139)
In the Paper Drawer(P. 140)
In the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 140)
● This section describes how to load envelopes in the orientation you want, as well as procedures that you
need to complete before loading envelopes. For a description of the general procedure for loading
envelopes in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray, see Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 128) or
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 134) .
Before Loading Envelopes
Follow the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading.
● On the LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw, only one envelope at a time can be loaded in the manual feed slot. Follow
steps 1 to 3 in the procedure below to prepare the envelope for loading.
1
2
3
Close the flap of each envelope.
Flatten them to release any remaining air, and make sure that the edges are pressed
tightly.
Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and flatten any curls.
139
Basic Operations
4
Align the edges of the envelopes on a flat surface.
In the Paper Drawer
Load the envelopes Monarch, COM10, DL, or ISO-C5 in portrait orientation (with the long edges on either side), with
the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.
● Load the envelopes so that the edge with the flap is toward the left side as shown in the illustration.
In the Multi-Purpose Tray
Load the envelopes Monarch, COM10, DL, or ISO-C5 in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine),
with the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.
● Load the envelopes so that the edge with the flap is toward the left side as shown in the illustration.
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw
140
Basic Operations
141
Basic Operations
Loading Preprinted Paper
3S2W-02J
When you use paper that has been preprinted with a logo, pay attention to the orientation of the paper when loading.
Load the paper properly so that printing is performed on the correct side of the paper with a logo.
Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 142)
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 142)
● This section mainly describes how to load preprinted paper with the proper facing and orientation. For a
description of the general procedure for loading paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray, see
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 128) or
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 134) .
Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the first page of the document) face down.
142
Basic Operations
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
The <Switch Paper Feed Method> setting
● When you print on preprinted paper, you need to change the facing of the paper to load each time you
perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing. However, if <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Side Priority>,
the facing that you use for loading preprinted paper for 2-sided printing (logo side face down) can also be
used for 1-sided printing. This setting is especially useful if you frequently perform both 1-sided and 2-sided
printing. <Switch Paper Feed Method>(P. 366)
143
Basic Operations
Specifying Paper Size and Type
3S2W-02K
You must specify the paper size and type settings to match the paper that is loaded. Make sure to change the paper
settings when you load the paper that is different from the previously loaded paper.
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 145)
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 147)
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 150)
Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 153)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 155)
Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function(P. 156)
● If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper, a paper jam or printing error may occur.
144
Basic Operations
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer
3S2W-02L
1
Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
2
Select the target paper drawer.
Home Screen(P. 108)
● When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.
Touch panel model
3
Black and white LCD model
Select the paper size.
● If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.
When loading custom size paper (Touch panel model)
1
Select <Custom>.
2
Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.
● Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using the numeric keys.
● If you register the paper size you use frequently on buttons <S1> to <S3>, you can call them up with
one touch. Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 153)
3
Select <Apply>.
145
Basic Operations
When loading A5 size paper
● In the landscape orientation, select <A5>. In the portrait orientation, select <A5R>.
Landscape orientation
Portrait orientation
About <Free Size>
● If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free Size>; this will reduce the number of
steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in
the printer driver is significantly different from the size of the loaded paper. <Action When Free Paper
Size Mismatch>(P. 369)
4
Select the paper type.
About <Free>
● If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free>; this will reduce the number of
steps required to change the setting each time. However, take note that this setting lets the machine
perform printing even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the
paper type actually loaded in the machine.
● When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when
the paper type is [Plain 1].
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 128)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 155)
Available Paper(P. 489)
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 434)
146
Basic Operations
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose
Tray
3S2W-02R
The screen shown here is displayed when paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Follow the on-screen instructions
to specify settings that match the size and type of the loaded paper.
If the screen shown above is not displayed when paper is loaded
● If you always load the same paper in the multi-purpose tray, you can skip the paper setting operations by
registering the paper size and type as the default setting. When the default setting is registered, however,
the screen shown above is not displayed. To display the screen, select <Specify When Loading Paper> (
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 150) ).
1
Select the paper size.
● If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.
When loading custom size paper
1
Select <Custom>.
2
Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.
Touch panel model
● Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using the numeric keys.
147
Basic Operations
● If you register the paper size you use frequently on buttons <S1> to <S3>, you can call them up with
one touch. Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 153)
Black and white LCD model
● Execute the following steps in sequence: <X>
enter the paper width
<Y>
enter the paper
length
3
Select <Apply>.
When loading A5 size paper
● In the landscape orientation, select <A5>. In the portrait orientation, select <A5R>.
Example for LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw:
Portrait orientation
Landscape orientation
About <Free Size>
● If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free Size>; this will reduce the number of
steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in
the printer driver is significantly different from the size of the loaded paper.
Size Mismatch>(P. 369)
2
<Action When Free Paper
Select the paper type.
About <Free>
● If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free>; this will reduce the number of
steps required to change the setting each time. However, take note that this setting lets the machine
perform printing even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the
paper type actually loaded in the machine.
● When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when
the paper type is [Plain 1].
148
Basic Operations
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 134)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 155)
Available Paper(P. 489)
149
Basic Operations
Registering Default Paper Settings for the MultiPurpose Tray
3S2W-02S
You can register default paper settings for the multi-purpose tray. Registering default settings can save yourself the
effort of having to specify the settings each time you load the same paper into the multi-purpose tray.
● After the default paper setting is registered, the paper setting screen is not displayed when paper is loaded,
and the same setting is always used. If you load a different paper size or type without changing the paper
settings, the machine may not print properly. To avoid this problem, select <Specify When Loading Paper> in
step 3, and then load the paper.
1
Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
2
Select multi-purpose tray.
Touch panel model
3
Home Screen(P. 108)
Black and white LCD model
Select the paper size.
● If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.
Registering a custom paper size
1
Select <Custom>.
2
Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.
Touch panel model
● Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using the numeric keys.
150
Basic Operations
● If you register the paper size you use frequently on buttons <S1> to <S3>, you can call them up with
one touch. Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 153)
Black and white LCD model
● Execute the following steps in sequence: <X>
enter the paper width
<Y>
enter the paper
length
3
Select <Apply>.
When loading A5 size paper
● In the landscape orientation, select <A5>. In the portrait orientation, select <A5R>.
Example for LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw:
Landscape orientation
Portrait orientation
About <Free Size>
● If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free Size>; this will reduce the number of
steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in
the printer driver is significantly different from the size of the loaded paper. <Action When Free Paper
Size Mismatch>(P. 369)
4
Select the paper type.
About <Free>
151
Basic Operations
● If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free>; this will reduce the number of
steps required to change the setting each time. However, take note that this setting lets the machine
perform printing even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the
paper type actually loaded in the machine.
● When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when
the paper type is [Plain 1].
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 134)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 155)
Available Paper(P. 489)
152
Basic Operations
Registering a Custom Paper Size
3S2W-02U
You can register up to three frequently used custom paper sizes.
1
Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Register Custom Paper>.
3
Select the registration number.
Home Screen(P. 108)
● On the black and white LCD model, if you have selected the registered number, continue on to select <Edit>.
Deleting a setting
● Select the registered number, and then select <Delete>
4
<Yes>.
Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.
Touch panel model
● Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using the numeric keys.
Black and white LCD model
● Execute the following steps in sequence: <X>
enter the paper width
<Y>
enter the paper
length
Changing the display name of a registration number (Touch panel model)
● Select <Name>, enter the display name, and then select <Apply>.
5
Select <Apply>.
6
On the black and white LCD model, continue on to select the paper type.
153
Basic Operations
About <Free>
● If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free>; this will reduce the number of
steps required to change the setting each time. However, take note that this setting lets the machine
perform printing even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the
paper type actually loaded in the machine.
● When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when
the paper type is [Plain 1].
Setting to the registered custom size
Touch panel model
The paper sizes that are registered in the procedure above can be called when <Custom> is selected on the
paper size selection screen for the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.
Black and white LCD model
The paper sizes that are registered in the procedure above are displayed on the paper size selection screen
for the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.
Example for multi-purpose tray:
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 128)
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 134)
154
Basic Operations
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed
3S2W-02W
You can ensure that only frequently used paper sizes are shown in the screen for selecting the paper size setting.
1
Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes>.
3
Select the paper source you want to limit the paper sizes to be displayed for.
Home Screen(P. 108)
● When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.
4
Clear the check boxes for paper sizes you do not want displayed.
● Ensure that only the check boxes for frequently used paper sizes are selected.
● Paper sizes that are not selected can be viewed by selecting <Other Sizes> in the paper size setting
selection screen.
5
Select <Apply>.
LINKS
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 145)
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 147)
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 150)
155
Basic Operations
Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source
for Each Function
3S2W-02X
Enable or disable the automatic paper source selection feature for each paper source. If this feature is set to <On>, the
machine automatically selects a paper source that is loaded with paper of the appropriate size for each print job. Also,
when the paper in the selected paper source runs out, this feature enables continuous printing by switching from that
paper source to another that is loaded with the same paper size.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Function Settings>
3
Select <Paper Source Auto Selection>/<Drawer Auto Selection On/Off>.
4
Select the target function.
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Common>
<Paper Feed Settings>.
● When the target function is report/list printing or memory media print, select <Other>.
5
For each paper source to which you want to apply the automatic paper source
selection feature, specify <On>.
● When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.
Touch panel model
For each target paper source, select <On>.
Black and white LCD model
Select the target paper source
<On>.
● Always specify <On> for at least one of the paper drawers. If you select <Off> for all the drawers, then you
cannot finish the setting procedure.
156
Basic Operations
6
Select <Apply>.
157
Basic Operations
Customizing the Display
3S2W-02Y
In order to make the Home screen easier to use, you can customize it.
Customizing the Home Screen
You can rearrange the displayed items and customize the screen to make it easier to select functions.
Customizing the Home Screen(P. 159)
158
Basic Operations
Customizing the Home Screen
3S2W-030
You can change the item display order to make it easier to access the Home screen, and customize the Home screen.
Changing the Arrangement of Buttons (Touch Panel Model)(P. 159)
Changing the Item Display Order (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 160)
Changing the Arrangement of Buttons (Touch Panel Model)
To make the buttons easier to use, you can rearrange the buttons however you like. You can also insert a blank (space)
instead of a button to make it easier to view the Home screen.
1
Select <Home Screen Settings> in the Home screen.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
2
Select <Set Display Order>.
3
Select the button to move.
Home Screen(P. 108)
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
● The selected button is highlighted. Tap the selected button again to deselect it.
4
Select <Move Left> or <Move Right>.
● The button moves as many times as you tapped.
● A long touch on <Move Left> or <Move Right> moves the selected button continuously.
Inserting a blank
● When <Insert Blank> is selected, a blank is inserted on the left side of the selected button.
● If the button at the end is selected, a blank is inserted even if <Move Right> is selected.
Deleting a blank
● Select the blank to be deleted, and select <Del. Blank>.
5
Select <Apply>.
159
Basic Operations
Changing the Item Display Order (Black and White LCD Model)
To make the buttons easier to use, you can freely change the item display order.
1
Select <Display Order (Home)> in the Home screen.
2
Use
/
to select the item to be moved, and press
.
3
Use
/
to move to the target position, and press
.
4
When the buttons are rearranged in the way you want, press
LINKS
Basic Operation(P. 116)
160
Home Screen(P. 108)
.
Basic Operations
Changing the Default Settings for Functions
3S2W-031
The default settings are the settings that are displayed when you turn ON the machine. If you change these default
settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to specify the same settings
every time you perform an action.
◼ Memory Media Print
For information about changeable setting items, see
<Access Stored Files Settings>(P. 418) .
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Access Files> <Memory Media Settings> <Access Stored
Files Settings> <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)> Select the setting Change
the default value of the selected item
<Apply>
● If you select <Initialize> on each setting screen, you can restore the default settings.
LINKS
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 182)
161
Basic Operations
Setting Sounds
3S2W-032
The machine produces sounds in a variety of situations, such as when a paper jam or error occurs. You can set the
volume of each of these sounds individually.
1
Displaying the <Volume Settings> screen.
Touch panel model
Press
(
).
Black and white LCD model
Select <Menu>
2
<Preferences>
<Volume Settings>.
Select a setting.
Setting
Description
Action
<Entry Tone>
Confirmation sound each time a key on the operation Select <On> (produce a tone) or
panel or button on the display is pressed
<Off> (not produce a tone).
<Invalid Entry Tone>
Sound produced when an invalid key operation is
performed, such as when you enter a number
outside the valid setting range
<Restock Supplies Tone>
Sound produced when a toner cartridge is almost
empty
<Warning Tone>
Touch panel model
Sound telling that a trouble has occurred on the
machine, such as a paper jam or incorrect operation
Black and white LCD model
Sound telling that a trouble has occurred on the
machine, such as a paper jam, incorrect operation, or
press of an inoperable key
<Job Done Tone>
Sound produced when an operation such as printing
is complete
<Energy Saver Alert>
Sound produced when the machine enters or exits
sleep mode
162
Basic Operations
Entering Sleep Mode
3S2W-033
The sleep mode function reduces the amount of power consumed by the machine by disabling power flow to the
operation panel. If no operations will be performed on the machine for a while, such as during a lunch break, you can
on the operation panel.
save power simply by pressing
When in sleep mode
● When the machine enters sleep mode,
lights up yellow green.
Situations in which the machine does not enter sleep mode
● When the machine is in operation
● When the Data indicator is lit up or blinking
● When the machine is performing an operation such as adjustment or cleaning
● When a paper jam occurs
● When the menu screen is displayed
● When an error message is displayed on the screen (There are some exceptions. The machine sometimes
enters sleep mode when an error message is displayed.)
● When the SSID/network key screen for Direct Connection is displayed
● When settings are being imported or exported
Changing the Auto Sleep Time Value
Auto Sleep Time is a function that automatically puts the machine into the sleep mode if it remains idle for a
specified length of time. We recommend using the factory default settings ( <Timer/Energy
Settings>(P. 313) ) to reduce power usage. If you want to change the amount of time that elapses before the
machine enters the auto sleep mode, perform the procedure below.
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Auto Sleep Time>
time that elapses before the machine automatically enters sleep mode
Set the amount of
<Apply> (
)
Changing the Sleep Mode Setting to the Specified Time
You can configure a setting so that the machine is placed into the sleep mode at the specified time. You can also
configure a setting so that the sleep mode is released at the specified time.
163
Basic Operations
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
Mode Exit Time Settings>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
Select <Auto Sleep Daily Timer> or <Sleep
Select <On> in <Set This Function>, and enter the time
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
Mode Exit Time Settings>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<On>
Select <Auto Sleep Daily Timer> or <Sleep
Enter the time
Exiting Sleep Mode
You can press
or any other key on the operation panel to exit the sleep mode.
● For the touch panel model, you can also tap the display to exit sleep mode.
164
Basic Operations
Using a USB Memory Device
3S2W-034
When using a USB memory, insert it into the USB port on the machine.
Before using a USB memory device
● The supported formats of USB memory device are FAT16 and FAT32.
The following devices and uses are not supported:
● USB memory devices that have security functions installed
● USB memory devices that do not meet the USB standards
● Memory card readers connected via USB
● USB memory devices that are used with extension cables
● USB memory devices used via a USB hub
Handling of USB memory devices
● Make sure that the USB memory device is correctly oriented before inserting it. If you attempt to insert it in
incorrect orientation, the memory device and the machine may be damaged.
● Do not remove, bump or otherwise move the USB memory device while data is being imported or exported.
Also, do not turn OFF the machine while processing is in progress.
● You may not be able to save data properly on some USB memory devices.
◼ Remove the USB Memory Device
● Always use the following procedure when removing USB memory devices. Using other methods to remove
USB memory devices may result in damage to the device and the machine.
165
Basic Operations
Touch Panel Model
1
Select <Status Monitor>.
2
Select <Rmv. Mem. Media>.
➠ Wait until the <The memory media can be safely removed.> message is displayed.
3
Disconnect the USB memory device.
Black and White LCD Model
1
Press
2
Select <Device Status>.
3
Select <Remove Memory Media>.
.
➠ Wait until the <The memory media can be safely removed.> message is displayed.
4
Disconnect the USB memory device.
LINKS
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 182)
166
Printing
Printing
Printing ................................................................................................................................................................ 168
Printing from a Computer ................................................................................................................................ 169
Canceling Prints ........................................................................................................................................... 171
Checking the Printing Status and Log ........................................................................................................... 174
Various Printing Methods ................................................................................................................................. 176
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) ................................................................................... 177
Printing via Secure Print ........................................................................................................................ 178
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print) ......................................................................... 182
Receiving I-Faxes for Printing ....................................................................................................................... 196
167
Printing
Printing
3S2W-035
There are many ways to use the machine as a printer. You can print documents on your computer by using the printer
driver or print image files from a USB memory device. Make full use of the print functions to suit your needs.
◼ Printing from a Computer
You can print a document made on your computer by using the printer driver.
Printing from a Computer(P. 169)
◼ Useful Functions When Printing
You can assign a PIN to the print data to enhance security or directly print files stored in a USB memory device.
Various Printing Methods(P. 176)
Printing from Mobile Devices
● Linking mobile devices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to
print photos and web pages. The machine also supports Google Cloud Print™.
Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 200)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 219)
168
Printing
Printing from a Computer
3S2W-036
You can print a document made with an application on your computer by using the printer driver. There are useful
settings on the printer driver, such as enlarging/reducing and 2-sided printing, that enable you to print your
documents in various ways. Before you can use this function, you need to complete some procedures, such as
installing the printer driver on your computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the
online manual website.
About the Printer Driver Help(P. 169)
To Use the Optional Items(P. 169)
Basic Printing Operations(P. 169)
About the Printer Driver Help
Clicking [Help] on the printer driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen, you can see the detailed
descriptions that are not in the User's Guide.
To Use the Optional Items
If the optional cassette feeding module is attached to the machine after installation of the printer driver, perform the
following operation on the printer driver.
● To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 512) ) Right-click the printer driver
icon for this machine [Printer properties] or [Properties] [Device Settings] tab [Paper
Source] Select the cassette feeding module from [1-Cassette Feeding Unit] in [Optional Drawer/
Cassette] [OK] [OK]
Basic Printing Operations
This section describes how to print a document on your computer by using the printer driver.
Paper settings on the machine
● Normally, it is necessary to specify the paper size and type for the paper loaded in each paper source before
proceeding to printing.
169
Printing
1
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
2
Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3
Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].
● Switch the tab according to the settings.
4
Click [Print] or [OK].
➠ Printing starts.
● If you want to cancel printing, see
Canceling Prints(P. 171) .
LINKS
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 174)
When Printing from the Windows Store App(P. 518)
170
Printing
Canceling Prints
3S2W-037
You can cancel printing from your computer or on the operation panel of the machine.
From a Computer(P. 171)
From the Operation Panel(P. 172)
From a Computer
You can cancel printing from the printer icon displayed on the system tray on the desktop.
1
Double-click the printer icon.
When the printer icon is not displayed
● Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 512) ), right-click the printer driver icon for
this machine, and click [See what's printing] (or double-click the icon of the printer driver for this machine).
2
Select the document you want to cancel, and click [Document]
3
Click [Yes].
[Cancel].
➠ Printing of the selected document is canceled.
● Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.
Canceling from the Remote UI
● You can cancel printing from the [Job Status] page on the Remote UI:
Documents(P. 282)
Checking Current Status of Print
Canceling from an application
● On some applications, a screen like shown below appears. You can cancel printing by clicking [Cancel].
171
Printing
From the Operation Panel
Cancel printing using
◼ Press
or <Status Monitor> (
).
to Cancel
If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When
Select the document you want to cancel, and select <Cancel>
is Pressed
<Yes>.
◼ Check the Print Job Status Before Canceling
Touch Panel Model
<Status Monitor>
<Yes>
<Print Job>
Select the document in the <Print Job Status> tab
Black and White LCD Model
<Print Job>
<Job Status>
Select the document
● Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.
172
<Cancel>
<Yes>
<Cancel>
Printing
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 169)
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 174)
173
Printing
Checking the Printing Status and Log
3S2W-038
You can check the current print statuses and the logs for printed documents.
● When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the print logs.
<Display Job Log>(P. 433)
Useful in the Following Cases
● When your documents are not printed for a long time, you may want to see the waiting list of the
documents waiting to be printed.
● When you cannot find your printouts that you thought had been printed, you may want to see whether an
error has occurred.
1
Press <Status Monitor> (
2
Select <Print Job>.
3
Check the print statuses and logs.
).
To check the print statuses
1
<Print Job Status> tab/<Job Status>
Select the document whose status you want to check.
➠ Displays detailed information about the document.
To check the print logs
1
<Print Job Log> tab/<Job Log>
Select the document whose log you want to check.
● <OK> is displayed when a document was printed successfully, and <Error> is displayed when a
document failed to be printed because it was canceled or there was some error.
174
Printing
➠ Displays detailed information about the document.
● The displayed document name or user name may not reflect the actual document or user name.
When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>
● This number represents an error code. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the
online manual website.
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 169)
Canceling Prints(P. 171)
175
Printing
Various Printing Methods
3S2W-039
This section describes how to print a document by adding a PIN, how to print a file stored on a USB memory device
without using the printer driver, and how to receive and print I-Faxes.
Printing a Document Secured by
a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 177)
Printing from a USB Memory
Device (Memory Media Print)
(P. 182)
176
Receiving I-Faxes for
Printing(P. 196)
Printing
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)
3S2W-03A
By setting a PIN to a document when printing from a computer, the document is held in the memory of the machine,
and is not printed until the correct PIN is entered on the operation panel of the machine. This function is called "Secure
Print," and the document that is protected by a PIN is called a "secured document." Using Secure Print keeps printouts
of confidential documents from being left unattended.
Printing via Secure Print(P. 178)
177
Printing
Printing via Secure Print
3S2W-03C
This section describes how to print a document from an application as a secured document. The first part of this
section describes how to send a secured document to the machine, and the second part of this section describes how
to print the secured document on the machine.
Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine(P. 178)
Printing Out Secured Documents(P. 179)
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents(P. 179)
Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine
1
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
2
Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3
Select [Secured Print] in [Output Method].
➠ The [Information] pop-up screen is displayed. Check the message, and click [Yes] or [No].
4
Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].
● Switch the tab according to the settings.
5
Click [Print] or [OK].
➠ After the secured document is sent to the machine, it is held in the memory of the machine waiting to be
printed.
178
Printing
Printing Out Secured Documents
Prints secured documents sent to the machine. After a valid time period ( Changing the Valid Time Period for
Secured Documents(P. 179) ) has elapsed, the secured document will be deleted from the memory of the machine
and can no longer be printed.
● If secured documents are left unprinted, they occupy the memory and may prevent the machine from
printing even ordinary (not secured) documents. Make sure that you print your secured documents as soon
as you can.
● You can check how much memory is being used for secured documents.
<Status Monitor> (
)
<Device Information>/<Device Status>
1
Select <Secure Print> in the Home screen.
2
Select the secured document to print.
<Secure Print Memory Usage>
Home Screen(P. 108)
● On the touch panel model, select the check box for the secured document to print, and select <Start>. You
can select multiple documents that have the same PIN.
If a screen for user selection is displayed
● If secured documents from two or more users are stored in memory, the screen for user selection is
displayed prior to the screen for file selection. Select your user name.
Deleting a secured document
● On the touch panel model, you can collectively delete multiple documents. Select the check box for the
secured document to delete, and select <Delete>.
3
Enter the PIN, and press <Apply> (
).
● On the touch panel model, when you select multiple documents with different PINs in step 2, a message is
displayed. Select <Close>, and select the secured documents again in step 2.
➠ Printing starts.
● If you want to cancel printing, select <Cancel>
<Yes>.
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents
You can change the valid time period from the time secured document data is sent to the machine until the time it is
deleted within a certain period of time.
◼ For the Touch Panel Model
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 108)
179
Printing
2
Select <Function Settings>.
3
Select <Secure Print>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
4
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
Select <Secure Print Deletion Time>.
When <Secure Print Deletion Time> cannot be selected
● Set <Use Secure Print> to <On>.
Disabling Secure Print
● Set <Use Secure Print> to <Off>, and then restart the machine.
5
Specify how long the machine holds secured documents, and select <Apply>.
● The secured document is deleted from the memory of the machine unless it is printed before the time
specified here elapses.
6
Select <Apply>.
7
Select <OK>.
8
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
◼ For the Black and White LCD Model
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Function Settings>.
3
Select <Secure Print>.
Home Screen(P. 108)
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
4
Select <Secure Print Deletion Time>.
When <Secure Print Deletion Time> cannot be selected
180
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
Printing
● Set <Use Secure Print> to <On>, restart the machine, and then start the setting procedure again.
Disabling Secure Print
● Set <Use Secure Print> to <Off>, and then restart the machine.
5
Specify how long the machine holds secured documents.
● The secured document is deleted from the memory of the machine unless it is printed before the time
specified here elapses.
6
Press
.
LINKS
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 174)
Restricting Printing from a Computer(P. 272)
181
Printing
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media
Print)
3S2W-03E
You can print files directly by connecting a USB memory device to the machine. Using this function, you can print
without using a computer. For more information about the available USB memory devices and how to insert/remove
the USB memory device, see Using a USB Memory Device(P. 165) .
Printing a File from a USB Memory Device in the Touch Panel Model(P. 182)
Printing a File from a USB Memory Device in the Black and White LCD Model(P. 190)
● It is necessary to set <Use Print Function> to <On>.
<Memory Media Settings>(P. 427)
Printing a File from a USB Memory Device in the Touch Panel Model
1
Select <Memory Media Print> in the Home screen.
2
Select the check box for the file you want to print.
Home Screen(P. 108)
● You can select multiple files.
● To clear a selection, select the file you have selected (
) again.
● Selecting a folder displays its contents. To return to the folder in the upper level, select
● Folders and files in a level deeper than the fifth directory are not displayed.
● When you move to another folder, the previous file selections will be cleared.
To select all files
1
Select <Select All>.
● To clear all selections, select <Clear Selection>.
182
.
Printing
2
If file types are mixed, select <JPEG/TIFF Files> or <PDF Files>.
To change the file display method
You can select the file display method from "Preview"/"Thumbnail"/"Details."
Preview
Thumbnail
Details
● You can specify the file display method used to display the <Memory Media Print> screen.
Display Settings>(P. 425)
<Default
To change the file sort order
You can change the sort order of the files in a USB memory device.
● You can specify a sort setting such as <Name (Ascending)> or <Date/Time (Ascending)> as the default
setting for the file sort order. <File Sort Default Settings>(P. 426)
1
Select <Sort Files>.
2
Select the criteria for file sorting.
● When you select <Date/Time (Ascending)> or <Date/Time (Descending)>, files are sorted based on the
modification dates and time of the files.
3
Select <Apply>.
4
Specify the print settings as necessary.
● You can select <Reset> to restore all the default print settings.
<Paper>
Select the paper source that contains the paper to use for printing.
183
Printing
Uses the paper that is loaded in the multi-purpose tray to print files.
Uses the paper that is loaded in the paper drawer (Drawer 1) of the machine to print files.
● When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.
● When specifying other print settings, select <Close>.
<Brightness>
You can adjust the brightness of printouts.
● When specifying other print settings, select <Close>.
<Number of Copies>
Enter the number of copies.
● When specifying other print settings, select <Close>.
<2-Sided Printing>
You can select 1-sided printing or 2-sided printing.
184
Printing
Prints on one side of paper.
Prints on both sides of paper in such a way that the printed pages are opened horizontally
when bound.
Prints on both sides of paper in such a way that the printed pages are opened vertically
when bound.
● <2-Sided Printing> may not be available with some sizes or types of paper.
Available Paper(P. 489)
<N on 1>
● <N on 1> is not available for printing TIFF files.
You can select an "N on 1" pattern to print multiple pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.
Does not apply N on 1.
Prints two pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.
Prints four pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.
Prints eight pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.
(PDF only)
● For a PDF file, you can print 9 or 16 pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper by using <N on 1>
under <Set PDF Details>.
<Set JPEG/TIFF Details>
You can change the print settings for JPEG and TIFF images.
185
Printing
<2-Sided Printing>
You can make 2-sided printouts. Select the binding position.
<N on 1> (JPEG files only)
Prints data for multiple pages of image data on the same side of a sheet of paper. You can specify the number
of pages to print on one side of a sheet of paper. For example, to print four pages on one side of a sheet of
paper, select <4 on 1>.
<Original Type>
You can select the type of original depending on the image to print.
<Photo Priority>
Gives priority to printing photo images smoothly.
<Text Priority>
Gives priority to printing text clearly.
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Gradation>
Prints images with fine gradation, such as digital camera images, with a smooth finish.
<Error Diffusion>
This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.
● The stability of the texture and fixed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.
186
Printing
<Set PDF Details>
You can change the print settings for PDFs.
<2-Sided Printing>
You can make 2-sided printouts. Select the binding position.
<N on 1>
Prints data for multiple pages of image data on the same side of a sheet of paper. You can specify the number
of pages to print on one side of a sheet of paper. For example, to print four pages on one side of a sheet of
paper, select <4 on 1>.
<Print Range>
Specify pages you want to print.
<All Pages>
Prints all pages.
<Specified Pages>
Specify the range of pages you want to print. Enter the desired value in each of <Start Page> and <End Page>,
and select <Apply>.
● When the specified page range does not match any of the pages of the PDF file, printing is not performed.
<Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size>
Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the original according to the print range of paper. Note that size
enlargement/reduction will not affect the aspect ratio of the original.
<Enlarge Print Area>
Specify whether to extend the print range to the paper size.
● If you set to <On>, part of print data may not be printed in edge areas or paper may be partly smudged
depending on the document.
187
Printing
<Print Comments>
This setting specifies whether to print annotations in the PDF file.
<Off>
Prints no annotations.
<Auto>
Prints only those annotations that are specified to be printed in the PDF file.
<Password to Open Document>
You can print password protected PDF files by entering the password required to open them. Enter the
password, and select <Apply>.
<Other Settings>
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality. You can make this setting for each of the types of
image contained in one document. See
<Halftones>(P. 408) for the description of the setting.
<Pure Black Text>
You can print black text of which color information is "R=G=B=0%," "C=M=Y=100%," or "C=M=Y=0%/K=100%,"
using only the K (black) toner. See
<Pure Black Text>(P. 404) for the description of the setting.
<Black Overprint>
Specify the printing method used when black text overlaps a colored background or figure. See
Overprint>(P. 404) for the description of the setting.
<Black
<RGB Source Profile>
Select the source profile for color matching to print RGB data, according to the monitor you are using. See
<RGB Source Profile>(P. 405) for the description of the setting.
<CMYK Simulation Profile>
This setting allows you to specify the simulation target to print the CMYK (Cyan Magenta Yellow blacK) data.
The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent CMYK color model based on this simulation. See
<CMYK Simulation Profile>(P. 405) for the description of the setting.
<Use Grayscale Profile>
Specify whether to convert gray data to CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) data using the grayscale
profile of the machine. See
<Use Grayscale Profile>(P. 406) for the description of the setting.
<Output Profile>
Select the appropriate profile for print data. This option can be specified for each image type in one
document. See
<Output Profile>(P. 406) for the description of the setting.
<Matching Method>
Select the element to be prioritized when making color adjustment in <RGB Source Profile>. See
<Matching Method>(P. 407) for the description of the setting.
<Composite Overprint>
Specify whether to overprint CMYK data, with overprint specified, as composite output. See
Overprint>(P. 410) for the description of the setting.
<Grayscale Conversion>
Specify the way of printing color data in black and white. See
description of the setting.
<Print Quality>
<Density>
188
<Composite
<Grayscale Conversion>(P. 410) for the
Printing
Adjust the toner density to be used for printing. See
<Density>(P. 371) for the description of the setting.
<Toner Save>
Selecting <On> prints in toner saving mode. Select <On> when you want to check the layout or other
<Toner Save>(P. 372)
appearance characteristics before proceeding to final printing of a large job. See
for the description of the setting.
<Gradation>
Specify the processing method used to reproduce gradation. <High 2> gives finer gradation than <High
<Gradation>(P. 372) for the description of the setting.
1>. See
<Density Fine Adjustment>
When fine lines or small text are faded, increase the density to give less faded print. See
Adjustment>(P. 373) for the description of the setting.
<Density Fine
<Resolution>
Specify the resolution to process print data. See
<Resolution>(P. 373) for the description of the setting.
<Special Smoothing Mode>
Specify the mode to print data with a smooth finish. If the quality of the printout is not acceptable in
<Mode 1> (default), try another mode. See
<Special Smoothing Mode>(P. 373) for the description of
the setting.
<Toner Volume Correction>
When the toner volume for text or lines exceeds the limit value of the machine, make a correction so that
<Toner Volume Correction>(P. 374) for the
the toner volume does not exceed the limit value. See
description of the setting.
<Line Control>
Specify the processing method used to reproduce lines. See
of the setting.
<Line Control>(P. 375) for the description
<Width Adjustment>
Configure a setting to print text or fine lines in bold. See
description of the setting.
<Width Adjustment>(P. 375) for the
<Advanced Smoothing>
Configure the smoothing setting to print the outline of graphics (e.g., illustrations created using
applications) or text with a smooth finish. <Level 2> applies a stronger smoothing effect than <Level 1>.
<Advanced Smoothing>(P. 376) for the
You can apply the setting separately for text and graphics. See
description of the setting.
<Gradation Smoothing>
Configure the smoothing setting to print the gradation (color density) of graphics (e.g., illustrations
created using applications) or bit map images with a smooth finish. <Level 2> applies a stronger
smoothing effect than <Level 1>. You can apply the setting separately for graphics and images. See
<Gradation Smoothing>(P. 377) for the description of the setting.
5
Select <Start>.
➠ Selecting <B&W> starts black and white printing. Selecting <Color> starts color printing.
● If you want to cancel printing, select <Cancel>
● If you always want to print with the same settings:
<Yes>.
Memory Media Print(P. 161)
189
Printing
Printing a File from a USB Memory Device in the Black and White LCD Model
1
Select <Memory Media Print> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Select File and Print>.
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Index Print>
● You can print thumbnails of the JPEG files stored in a USB memory device. To print the images in
thumbnails, select <Index Print> on the screen, and proceed to the next step.
<Sort Files>
● You can change the file sort order when selecting a file to be printed.
● For information about how to display files based on the same criteria every time, see
Settings>(P. 426) .
3
Select the file to print, and press
<File Sort Default
.
● You can select multiple files.
● To clear a selection, select the file you have selected (
) again, and press
.
● Selecting a folder displays its contents. To return to the folder in the upper level, select
● Folders and files lower than the third directory are not displayed.
● When you move to another folder, the previous file selections will be cleared.
To select all files
1
Select <Select All>.
● To clear all selections, select <Clear All>.
2
If file types are mixed, select <JPEG/TIFF> or <PDF>.
4
Select <Apply>.
5
Specify the print settings as necessary.
● Select the item you want to set.
190
.
Printing
<Number of Copies>
Specify the number of copies. Enter a quantity using numeric keys, and press
.
<Color Mode>
Select whether to print data in black and white or color.
<Paper>
Select the paper source that contains the paper to use for printing.
Uses the paper that is loaded in the multi-purpose tray to print files.
Uses the paper that is loaded in the paper drawer (Drawer 1) of the machine to print files.
● When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.
<N on 1>
● <N on 1> is not available for printing TIFF files.
Prints data for multiple pages of image data on the same side of a sheet of paper. You can specify the number
of pages to print on one side of a sheet of paper. For example, to print four pages on one side of a sheet of
paper, select <4 on 1>.
<2-Sided>
You can make 2-sided printouts. Select the binding position.
<Book Type>
Prints on both sides of paper in such a way that the printed pages are opened horizontally when bound.
191
Printing
<Calendar Type>
Prints on both sides of paper in such a way that the printed pages are opened vertically when bound.
● <2-Sided> may not be available with some sizes or types of paper.
Available Paper(P. 489)
<Set JPEG/TIFF Details>
You can change the print settings for JPEG and TIFF images.
<Original Type>
You can select the type of original depending on the image to print.
<Photo Priority>
Gives priority to printing photo images smoothly.
<Text Priority>
Gives priority to printing text clearly.
<Brightness>
You can adjust the brightness of images. Adjust the brightness, and press
.
● You can set the <Brightness> of TIFF files only when they are JPEG-compressed.
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
192
Printing
<Gradation>
Prints images with fine gradation, such as digital camera images, with a smooth finish.
<Error Diffusion>
This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.
● The stability of the texture and fixed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.
<Set PDF Details>
You can change the print settings for PDFs.
<Brightness>
You can adjust the brightness of images. Adjust the brightness, and press
.
<Print Range>
Specify pages you want to print.
<All Pages>
Prints all pages.
<Specified Pages>
Specify the range of pages you want to print. Enter the desired value in each of <First Page> and <Last Page>
using the numeric keys, and select <Apply>.
● When the specified page range does not match any of the pages of the PDF file, printing is not performed.
<Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size>
Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the original according to the print range of paper. Note that size
enlargement/reduction will not affect the aspect ratio of the original.
<Enlarge Print Area>
Specify whether to extend the print range to the paper size.
● If you set to <On>, part of print data may not be printed in edge areas or paper may be partly smudged
depending on the document.
193
Printing
<Print Comments>
This setting specifies whether to print annotations in the PDF file.
<Off>
Prints no annotations.
<Auto>
Prints only those annotations that are specified to be printed in the PDF file.
<Password to Open Document>
You can print password protected PDF files by entering the password required to open them. Enter the
password, and select <Apply>.
<Other>
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality. You can make this setting for each of the types of
image contained in one document. See
<Halftones>(P. 408) for the description of the setting.
<Pure Black Text>
You can print black text of which color information is "R=G=B=0%," "C=M=Y=100%," or "C=M=Y=0%/K=100%,"
using only the K (black) toner. See
<Pure Black Text>(P. 404) for the description of the setting.
<Black Overprint>
Specify the printing method used when black text overlaps a colored background or figure. See
Overprint>(P. 404) for the description of the setting.
<Black
<RGB Source Profile>
Select the source profile for color matching to print RGB data, according to the monitor you are using. See
<RGB Source Profile>(P. 405) for the description of the setting.
<CMYK Simulation Profile>
This setting allows you to specify the simulation target to print the CMYK (Cyan Magenta Yellow blacK) data.
The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent CMYK color model based on this simulation. See
<CMYK Simulation Profile>(P. 405) for the description of the setting.
<Use Grayscale Profile>
Specify whether to convert gray data to CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) data using the grayscale
profile of the machine. See
<Use Grayscale Profile>(P. 406) for the description of the setting.
<Output Profile>
Select the appropriate profile for print data. This option can be specified for each image type in one
document. See
<Output Profile>(P. 406) for the description of the setting.
<Matching Method>
Select the element to be prioritized when making color adjustment in <RGB Source Profile>. See
<Matching Method>(P. 407) for the description of the setting.
<Composite Overprint>
Specify whether to overprint CMYK data, with overprint specified, as composite output. See
Overprint>(P. 410) for the description of the setting.
<Grayscale Conversion>
Specify the way of printing color data in black and white. See
description of the setting.
<Composite
<Grayscale Conversion>(P. 410) for the
<Print Quality>
<Density>
Adjust the toner density to be used for printing. See
<Toner Volume Correction>
194
<Density>(P. 371) for the description of the setting.
Printing
When the toner volume for text or lines exceeds the limit value of the machine, make a correction so that
the toner volume does not exceed the limit value. See
<Toner Volume Correction>(P. 374) for the
description of the setting.
<Toner Save>
Selecting <On> prints in toner saving mode. Select <On> when you want to check the layout or other
<Toner Save>(P. 372)
appearance characteristics before proceeding to final printing of a large job. See
for the description of the setting.
<Gradation>
Specify the processing method used to reproduce gradation. <High 2> gives finer gradation than <High
<Gradation>(P. 372) for the description of the setting.
1>. See
<Density Fine Adjustment>
When fine lines or small text are faded, increase the density to give less faded print. See
Adjustment>(P. 373) for the description of the setting.
<Density Fine
<Resolution>
Specify the resolution to process print data. See
<Resolution>(P. 373) for the description of the setting.
<Special Smoothing Mode>
Specify the mode to print data with a smooth finish. If the quality of the printout is not acceptable in
<Mode 1> (default), try another mode. See
<Special Smoothing Mode>(P. 373) for the description of
the setting.
<Line Control>
Specify the processing method used to reproduce lines. See
of the setting.
<Line Control>(P. 375) for the description
<Width Adjustment>
Configure a setting to print text or fine lines in bold. See
description of the setting.
<Width Adjustment>(P. 375) for the
<Advanced Smoothing>
Configure the smoothing setting to print the outline of graphics (e.g., illustrations created using
applications) or text with a smooth finish. <Level 2> applies a stronger smoothing effect than <Level 1>.
<Advanced Smoothing>(P. 376) for the
You can apply the setting separately for text and graphics. See
description of the setting.
<Gradation Smoothing>
Configure the smoothing setting to print the gradation (color density) of graphics (e.g., illustrations
created using applications) or bit map images with a smooth finish. <Level 2> applies a stronger
smoothing effect than <Level 1>. You can apply the setting separately for graphics and images. See
<Gradation Smoothing>(P. 377) for the description of the setting.
6
Select <Start Printing>.
➠ Printing starts.
● If you want to cancel printing, select <Cancel>
● If you always want to print with the same settings:
<Yes>.
Memory Media Print(P. 161)
LINKS
<Access Files>(P. 418)
195
Printing
Receiving I-Faxes for Printing
3S2W-03F
Internet Fax (I-Fax) is a function that attaches a file to an e-mail as a TIFF image file and transfers it. This machine can
receive I-Faxes and print them. I-Faxes can be received automatically at the specified intervals, and also received
manually.
Configuring the I-Fax RX Settings(P. 196)
Receiving I-Faxes Manually(P. 198)
Configuring the I-Fax RX Settings
Configure the I-Fax RX setting from a computer, and the print settings from the operation panel of this machine.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
From a Computer
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Specify the required settings.
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[E-Mail/I-Fax Settings].
196
Starting Remote
Printing
[POP Server]
Enter alphanumeric characters as the POP3 server name or IP address for receiving I-Faxes.
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters as the user name for the specified e-mail account.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters in [Password].
[POP RX]
Select the check box to receive I-Faxes.
[POP Interval]
This sets the interval (in minutes) used for automatically connecting to the POP3 server. If there are any I-Fax
documents on the server, they are automatically received and printed.
To disable automatic reception
● Set [POP Interval] to [0]. When [0] is set, you receive I-Faxes manually.
Manually(P. 198)
Receiving I-Faxes
[Use APOP Authentication]
Select the check box to use APOP to encrypt the password during the authentication process.
[Use TLS for POP]
Select the check box to encrypt communication with the POP3 server using TLS. Select the check box for
[Verify Certificate] or [Add CN to Verification Items] depending on your needs.
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
From the Operation Panel
8
Specify the print settings as necessary.
Specifying the setting for 2-sided printing
<Print on Both Sides>(P. 416)
197
Printing
Specifying the paper size
<RX Print Size>(P. 417)
● Depending on the network you are using, you may need to change the POP3 port setting ( Changing Port
Numbers(P. 245) ). For more information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
Receiving I-Faxes Manually
If the I-Fax RX setting is completely configured from the POP3 server, you can manually receive I-Faxes and
print them. When you want to connect to the server before receiving I-Faxes automatically, or when the
machine is configured so that it does not receive I-Faxes automatically, use the method below to receive I-Faxes
manually.
1
Press <Status Monitor> (
2
Select <RX Job>.
3
Select <Check I-Fax RX>.
).
➠ Connect to the POP3 server. If there is a document on the server, printing begins.
● Printing a Received Document on Both Sides of Paper:
● Continuing printing even when toner is running low:
Print. When Amount in Cart. Low>(P. 416)
198
<Print on Both Sides>(P. 416)
<Continue Print. When Cart. Low>/<Continue
Linking with Mobile Devices
Linking with Mobile Devices
Linking with Mobile Devices .................................................................................................................... 200
Connecting with Mobile Devices ...................................................................................................................... 201
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) .............................................................................. 202
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode) ...................................................................................................... 204
Utilizing the Machine through Applications .................................................................................................... 209
Using AirPrint .................................................................................................................................................... 210
Printing with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................... 215
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ............................................................................................................................ 218
Using Google Cloud Print .................................................................................................................................. 219
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control .............................................................................................. 221
199
Linking with Mobile Devices
Linking with Mobile Devices
3S2W-03H
Linking the machine with mobile devices such as smart phones and tablets enables you to use an appropriate
application to perform printing, or other operation with ease. In addition, you can operate the machine from mobile
devices via remote control to confirm printing status and change the settings of the machine.
Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 201)
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 204)
Utilizing the Machine through Applications(P. 209)
Using AirPrint(P. 210)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 219)
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control(P. 221)
● Depending on your mobile device, the machine may not operate correctly.
● When [Restrict IPP Port (Port Number: 631)] or [Restrict mDNS Port (Port Number: 5353)] is enabled in
Security Policy (
Security Policy(P. 291) ), you can use neither Mopria® or AirPrint.
200
Linking with Mobile Devices
Connecting with Mobile Devices
3S2W-03J
There are two methods used to connect a mobile device with the machine: connecting via a wireless LAN router, and
communicating wirelessly and directly with the machine. Select a connection method in accordance with the
communication environment and the device you are using. Perform communication with mobile devices from <Mobile
Portal> ( Home Screen(P. 108) ).
◼ Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router
Just as connecting a computer to the machine, connect a mobile device to the machine via a wireless LAN router.
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)(P. 202)
◼ Connecting Directly
Directly connect a mobile device to the machine wirelessly without using wireless LAN. It is possible to immediately
connect to the machine wirelessly even outside of a wireless LAN environment. Connecting Directly (Access Point
Mode)(P. 204)
201
Linking with Mobile Devices
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)
3S2W-03K
If a wireless LAN router is connected to the network connected to the machine, you can establish a communication
with a mobile device via the wireless LAN router in the same way for a computer. For information about how to
connect a mobile device to your wireless LAN router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer. Connect the machine to a router via the wired or wireless LAN. Setting Up the Network
Environment(P. 23)
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (Touch Panel Model)(P. 202)
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 203)
● To perform the procedures below, use the IPv4 address.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
● Select <LAN Connection> and proceed with the procedure, if the Direct Connection screen is displayed after
<Mobile Portal> is selected in the procedure below.
● For information about the operating systems compatible with Canon PRINT Business, the detailed setting
procedure, and the operating procedure, please see the application's Help or the Canon website (https://
global.canon/gomp/).
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (Touch Panel Model)
◼ Connecting Manually
1
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
2
Connect from the mobile device to the IP address that appears on the screen.
Home Screen(P. 108)
◼ Connecting Using a QR Code
1
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
2
Select <QR Code>.
202
Home Screen(P. 108)
Linking with Mobile Devices
3
4
Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device.
Utilizing the Machine through
Applications(P. 209)
Read the QR code displayed on the screen using the mobile device.
◼ Connecting Using the NFC (Android)
Before using the NFC, check whether <Use NFC> is set to <On>.
1
<Use NFC>(P. 433)
Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device.
Applications(P. 209)
Utilizing the Machine through
2
Enable the NFC settings of the mobile device.
3
Move the mobile device closer to the NFC mark of the machine.
Operation
Panel(P. 95)
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (Black and White LCD Model)
1
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Display Device Name/IP Address>.
3
Connect from the mobile device to the IP address that appears on the screen.
203
Home Screen(P. 108)
Linking with Mobile Devices
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)
3S2W-03L
1660-068
Even in an environment without a wireless LAN router, using "Access Point Mode," which can directly connect a mobile
device to the machine wirelessly, enables you to connect the mobile device on hand to the machine without difficult
settings.
Preparing for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 204)
Connecting Directly (Touch Panel Model)(P. 205)
Connecting Directly (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 207)
Preparing for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)
Establish a connection by using Access Point Mode in the following order.
Check the network settings of the machine.
● Set the IPv4 address.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
Preparing the mobile device
● Configure settings to connect the mobile device to Wi-Fi.
Put the machine into the connection standby status.
● <Menu> <Preferences> <Network>
<Use Direct Connection> to <On>.
<Direct Connection Settings>
set
Specifying the value for time until auto termination
● You can specify the time to automatically establish a disconnection when the direct connection is enabled.
<Direct Connection Termination>/<Time Until Direct Connection Termination>(P. 322)
Connecting multiple mobile devices at the same time
● Configure the machine's SSID and network key arbitrarily.
204
<Access Point Mode Settings>(P. 322)
Linking with Mobile Devices
Canon PRINT Business
● For information about the operating systems compatible with Canon PRINT Business, the detailed setting
procedure, and the operating procedure, please see the application's Help or the Canon website (https://
global.canon/gomp/).
Connecting Directly (Touch Panel Model)
● It may take time until a connection of the machine and the mobile device is established.
◼ Connecting Manually
1
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 108)
● When any mobile device is already connected, proceed to step 3.
2
Select <Connect>.
3
Configure the Wi-Fi settings from the mobile device using the SSID and network key
4
information that appear on the screen.
When the target operation is completed, select <Disconnect>.
◼ Connecting Using a QR Code
1
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 108)
● When any mobile device is already connected, proceed to step 3.
2
Select <Connect>.
3
Select <QR Code>.
4
Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device.
5
Utilizing the Machine through
Applications(P. 209)
Read the QR code displayed on the screen using the mobile device.
205
Linking with Mobile Devices
6
When the target operation is completed, then select <Disconnect>.
◼ Connecting Using the NFC (Android)
Before using the NFC, check whether <Use NFC> is set to <On>.
1
<Use NFC>(P. 433)
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 108)
● When any mobile device is already connected, proceed to step 3.
2
Select <Connect>.
3
Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device.
Utilizing the Machine through
Applications(P. 209)
4
Enable the NFC settings of the mobile device.
5
Move the mobile device closer to the NFC mark of the machine.
6
When the target operation is completed, then select <Disconnect>.
Operation
Panel(P. 95)
● Select <Connection Information> on the <Direct Connection> screen to check the connected mobile device.
● When <Keep Enabled If SSID/Ntwk Key Spcfd> is set to <On>, it is not necessary to perform the operation of
selecting <Connect>. <Keep Enabled If SSID/Ntwk Key Spcfd>(P. 323)
● While connecting via direct connection, you may not be able to connect to the Internet depending on the
mobile device you are using.
206
Linking with Mobile Devices
● If a wireless connection from the mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while the SSID and
network key are displayed, the connection waiting state terminates.
● If the status without data transmission between the mobile device and the machine continues during
communication by direct connection, the communication may end.
● Power saving performance of sleep mode degrades while connecting via direct connection.
● If the machine is used with a wireless LAN, you need to keep the machine connected to the wireless LAN
when using direct connection. When the machine is not connected to a wireless LAN or the connection
process is not complete yet, the direct connection process cannot begin. If the connection between the
machine and the wireless LAN is lost during communication through direct connection, the communication
may end.
● When you finish the desired operation, be sure to terminate the connection between the machine and the
mobile device. If they remain connected, power saving performance of sleep mode degrades.
● If you use the direct connection, do not set the IP address manually on the mobile device. Doing so may
prevent proper communication after using the direct connection.
Connecting Directly (Black and White LCD Model)
● It may take time until a connection of the machine and the mobile device is established.
1
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
● When any mobile device is already connected, press
Home Screen(P. 108)
, and proceed to step 3.
2
Select <Connect>.
3
Select <Display SSID/Network Key>.
4
Configure the Wi-Fi settings from the mobile device using the SSID and network key
5
When the target operation is completed, press
information that appear on the display.
, then select <Disconnect>
<Yes>.
● Select <Connection Information> on the screen under the direct connection to check the connected mobile
device.
● When <Keep Enabled If SSID/Ntwk Key Spcfd> is set to <On>, it is not necessary to perform the operation of
selecting <Connect>. <Keep Enabled If SSID/Ntwk Key Spcfd>(P. 323)
207
Linking with Mobile Devices
● While connecting via direct connection, you may not be able to connect to the Internet depending on the
mobile device you are using.
● If a wireless connection from the mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while the SSID and
network key are displayed, the connection waiting state terminates.
● If the status without data transmission between the mobile device and the machine continues during
communication by direct connection, the communication may end.
● Power saving performance of sleep mode degrades while connecting via direct connection.
● If the machine is used with a wireless LAN, you need to keep the machine connected to the wireless LAN
when using direct connection. When the machine is not connected to a wireless LAN or the connection
process is not complete yet, the direct connection process cannot begin. If the connection between the
machine and the wireless LAN is lost during communication through direct connection, the communication
may end.
● When you finish the desired operation, be sure to terminate the connection between the machine and the
mobile device. If they remain connected, power saving performance of sleep mode degrades.
● If you use the direct connection, do not set the IP address manually on the mobile device. Doing so may
prevent proper communication after using the direct connection.
208
Linking with Mobile Devices
Utilizing the Machine through Applications
3S2W-03R
Perform printing and other operations from the mobile device connected to the machine using applications. Various
applications including those exclusive to Canon are supported. Use properly in accordance with your device, the
application, and the situation.
◼ Using Canon PRINT Business
This application is used to perform printing and other operations from mobile devices that support iOS/Android. When
printing, it is not necessary to perform operations on the machine. For more information on supported operating
systems, detailed setting methods, and operations, see the application's Help or the Canon website (https://
global.canon/gomp/).
● You can download Canon PRINT Business for free, but you will be charged the Internet connection fee.
◼ Printing with Canon Print Service
You can easily print from the menu of applications that support the Android print subsystem. For more information on
supported operating systems and detailed settings and procedures, see the Canon website (https://global.canon).
◼ Printing by Mopria®
The machine also supports Mopria®. Using Mopria® enables you to print from mobile devices that support Android
using common operations and settings, even if manufacturers and models differ. For example, if you are using
printers supporting Mopria® made by multiple manufacturers or a printer supporting Mopria® that is located in a
place you are visiting, you can print without installing an application exclusive for each manufacturer or model. For
more information on supporting models or operation environments, see http://www.mopria.org.
Confirming Mopria® Settings
Log in to the Remote UI with Administrator privileges (
Registration] [Network Settings] [Mopria Settings]
check box is selected [OK]
Starting Remote UI(P. 279) ) [Settings/
[Edit] Check that the [Use Mopria]
◼ Printing with Google Cloud Print
You can use applications and services which support Google Cloud Print to print from a computer or mobile device
without using a printer driver. Using Google Cloud Print(P. 219)
209
Linking with Mobile Devices
Using AirPrint
3S2W-03S
This section describes the settings required to use AirPrint and the procedures to be performed using Apple devices.
AirPrint Settings
Configuring AirPrint Settings(P. 210)
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 212)
Functions of the AirPrint
Printing with AirPrint(P. 215)
Troubleshooting
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used(P. 218)
Configuring AirPrint Settings
You can register information, including the name of the machine and installation location, that is used for identifying
the machine. You can also disable the AirPrint function of the machine. Use the Remote UI to change these settings.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
2
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 279)
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Starting Remote
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
● If you are using a mobile device, such as an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch, read "click" as "tap" in this section.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Specify the required settings.
[AirPrint Settings].
210
Linking with Mobile Devices
[Use AirPrint]
Select the check box to enable AirPrint. To disable AirPrint, clear the check box.
[Printer Name]
Enter the name of the machine. If an mDNS name has already been registered in [mDNS Settings] (
Configuring DNS(P. 65) ), the registered name is displayed.
[Location]
Enter the location of the machine. If a location has already been registered in [Device Information Settings]
([Device Management] in [Management Settings] (Settings/Registration)), the registered name is displayed.
[Latitude]
Enter the latitude of the location where the machine is installed.
[Longitude]
Enter the longitude of the location where the machine is installed.
6
Click [OK].
If you select [Use AirPrint], the following settings in <Network> are set to <On>.
● Use HTTP
● IPP Print Settings
● IPv4 Use mDNS
● IPv6 Use mDNS
● If you change [Printer Name] that you have once specified, you may be unable to print any more from the
Mac that has been able to be used for printing so far. This phenomenon occurs because <mDNS Name> (
Configuring DNS(P. 65) ) of IPv4 is also changed automatically. In this case, add the machine to the Mac
again.
● Entering the printer name makes it easier to identify multiple printers that support AirPrint.
◼ Changing the Setting of Functions Available with AirPrint
If you want to disable functions that you are not going to use with AirPrint or encrypt communications, configure the
necessary setting using the operation panel.
211
Linking with Mobile Devices
Changing Print Settings
To perform printing with AirPrint, IPP protocol is used.
Turning the Function On/Off
You can specify whether to perform printing with AirPrint. The factory default setting is <On>.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Network>
IPP Printing> to <Off> or <On>
<TCP/IP Settings>
<IPP Print Settings>
Set <Use
<TCP/IP Settings>
<IPP Print Settings>
<Use IPP
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
Printing>
<Preferences>
<Network>
Select <Off> or <On>
Changing the TLS Setting
You can specify whether to encrypt communications using TLS when performing printing with AirPrint. The factory
default setting is <Off>.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Network>
<TCP/IP Settings>
<Allow IPP Printing Only w/ TLS> to <Off> or <On>
<IPP Print Settings>
Set
<IPP Print Settings>
<Allow
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Network>
IPP Printing Only When Using TLS>
<TCP/IP Settings>
Select <Off> or <On>
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint
You can display the screen for AirPrint, on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view
information about consumables, such as paper and toner cartridge. Further, you can configure security function
settings.
1
Select [System Preferences]
[Printers & Scanners], then add the machine to the Mac
you are using.
● If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.
212
Linking with Mobile Devices
2
Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners].
3
Click [Options & Supplies].
4
Click [Show Printer Webpage].
5
Log in to the Remote UI.
● To change the AirPrint settings, it is necessary to log in as an administrator.
◼ AirPrint-Dedicated Page
When you log in with administrator privileges, the AirPrint-dedicated page is displayed as shown below.
[AirPrint Settings]
Enables you to check the values entered in the AirPrint settings, such as the name and location of the
machine. You can click [Edit] to change the settings.
[Other Settings]
[Print Security Settings]
Configure the print security settings using TLS or authentication.
[TLS Settings]
Enables you to change the key and certificate used for TLS.
TLS(P. 248)
[Key and Certificate Settings]
213
Configuring the Key and Certificate for
Linking with Mobile Devices
Enables you to generate and install a key and certificate, or request a certificate to be issued.
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 248)
[Consumables Information]
Enables you to check the information of each paper source and consumables of the machine and the device
version.
Trademarks
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
214
Linking with Mobile Devices
Printing with AirPrint
3S2W-03U
You can print from an iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, or Mac without using a printer driver.
Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch(P. 215)
Printing from a Mac(P. 216)
System Requirements
One of the following Apple devices is required to print with AirPrint.
● iPad (all models)
● iPhone (3GS or later)
● iPod touch (3rd generation or later)
● Mac (Mac OS X 10.7 or later)*
*OS
X v10.9 or later when using a USB connection
Network Environment
One of the following environments is required.
● An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN
● An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected directly
● An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB
● For printing, it is required to set <Use IPP Printing> to <On>.
Available with AirPrint(P. 211)
Changing the Setting of Functions
Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
1
Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Apple device.
● For how to make sure of this, see
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 23) .
● For information on the Direct Connection, see
2
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 204) .
From the application on your Apple device, tap
215
to display the menu options.
Linking with Mobile Devices
3
Tap [Print].
4
Select this machine from [Printer].
● The printers connected to the network are displayed here. Select this machine in this step.
● The screen for selecting this machine in [Printer] is not displayed on applications that do not support
AirPrint. You cannot print by using those applications.
5
Specify the print settings as necessary.
● The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
6
Tap [Print].
➠ Printing starts.
Checking the print status
● During printing, press the Home button of the Apple device twice
tap [Print].
Printing from a Mac
1
Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.
● For how to make sure of this, see
2
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 23) .
Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences]
[Printers & Scanners].
● If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.
3
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
● How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual or Help for the application you are using.
4
Select the machine in the print dialog box.
● The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select this machine in this step.
5
Specify the print settings as necessary.
216
Linking with Mobile Devices
● The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
6
Click [Print].
➠ Printing starts.
217
Linking with Mobile Devices
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used
3S2W-03W
If AirPrint cannot be used, try taking the following solutions.
● Make sure that the machine is turned ON. If the machine is turned ON, first turn it OFF, then wait for at least 10
seconds and then turn it back ON to check if the problem is solved.
● Make sure that no error messages are displayed on the machine.
● Make sure that Apple devices and the machine are connected to the same LAN. If the machine is turned ON, it may
take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication.
● Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled.
● Make sure that the machine is configured to enable execution of jobs from a computer even when no department
ID and password are entered. Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 232)
● For printing, make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and that the machine contains a sufficient amount
remaining in the toner cartridges. Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 212)
218
Linking with Mobile Devices
Using Google Cloud Print
3S2W-03X
Google Cloud Print is a service that enables a user with a Google account to print from a smartphone, tablet, or
computer connected to the Internet using applications compatible with Google Cloud Print. Unlike conventional
printing from a computer, it does not require a printer driver.
Checking the Settings of the Machine(P. 219)
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 219)
● An environment in which you can connect to the internet is required when registering the machine and
when printing using Google Cloud Print. In addition, the customer is responsible for any fees regarding
internet connection.
● Google Cloud Print may not be available, depending on your country or region.
● Google Cloud Print does not support printing from an IPv6 address.
● A Google account is required to use Google Cloud Print. If you do not have a Google account, create one on
the Google website.
Checking the Settings of the Machine
Check the following before configuring cloud printing.
● Make sure that the IPv4 address is specified for the machine, and that the machine is able to communicate with
computers on a network.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 26)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
● Check whether the date and time of the machine are specified correctly.
Setting the Date/Time(P. 21)
● If Department ID Management is set, make sure that you can print from a computer without entering a Department
ID or PIN. Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 232)
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print
Registering the machine with Google Cloud Print enables you to print from anywhere using the service.
219
Linking with Mobile Devices
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in as an administrator.
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit] for [Basic Settings].
5
Select the [Use Google Cloud Print] check box
6
Click [Register] in [Registration Status].
Starting Remote UI(P. 279)
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Google Cloud Print Settings].
[OK].
Re-Registering the Machine
● To re-register the machine, delete its registration before registering it again.
7
Click the URL link displayed for [URL for Registration].
8
Follow the instructions on the screen to register the machine.
➠ Printing can now be performed from applications that support Google Cloud Print, such as Google
Chrome™.
● For information on the latest applications that support Google Cloud Print, check the Google Cloud
Print home page.
Configuring Settings on the Operation Panel
● You can also enable or disable the Cloud Print function from <Menu> in the Home screen.
Print Settings>(P. 339)
<Google Cloud
Registering from a Mobile Device or Google Chrome
● You can register the machine from a mobile device or Google Chrome. The machine's display shows the
confirmation screen before completion of the registration. Press <Yes> to complete the registration.
● For information on registration methods, see the manual of your device or the Google Cloud Print website.
220
Linking with Mobile Devices
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control
3S2W-03Y
You can use the Remote UI from a smart phone or tablet Web browser. You can confirm the machine status or
perform various settings from a mobile device. Note that the Remote UI screen may not be displayed properly for
some devices and environments.
Starting the Remote UI from Mobile Devices
Enter the IP address of the machine on the Web browser to start the Remote UI. Prior to operation, confirm the IP
address set for the machine ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 47) ). If it is unknown, ask your network administrator.
1
Start the Web browser of the mobile device.
2
Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in the address entry column.
● If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets.
Example: http://[fe80:2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/
● For a "Smartphone Version" of the Remote UI, a portion of items displayed are omitted. If you want to
confirm all of the items, see the "PC Version."
LINKS
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 278)
221
Managing the Machine
Managing the Machine
Managing the Machine ............................................................................................................................... 223
Setting Access Privileges .................................................................................................................................. 225
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN ...................................................................................................... 226
Setting the Department ID Management ..................................................................................................... 228
Setting a Remote UI PIN ............................................................................................................................... 234
Configuring the Network Security Settings .................................................................................................... 236
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ............................................................................................. 238
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings ......................................................................................... 239
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings ..................................................................................... 242
Changing Port Numbers ............................................................................................................................... 245
Setting a Proxy ............................................................................................................................................. 246
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS .................................................................................................. 248
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network Communication .......................................................... 251
Generating a Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR) ........................................................................ 254
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network Communication .......................................................... 257
Configuring IPSec Settings ........................................................................................................................... 259
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings ......................................................................................... 266
Restricting the Machine's Functions ................................................................................................................ 270
Restricting Printing from a Computer ........................................................................................................... 272
Restricting USB Functions ............................................................................................................................. 273
Disabling HTTP Communication ................................................................................................................... 275
Disabling Remote UI ..................................................................................................................................... 276
Restricting Use of the Operation Panel ......................................................................................................... 277
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ................................................................................... 278
Starting Remote UI ....................................................................................................................................... 279
Checking the Status and Logs ....................................................................................................................... 282
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ................................................................................................... 288
Security Policy .............................................................................................................................................. 291
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data .......................................................................................................... 296
Updating the Firmware ..................................................................................................................................... 299
Initializing Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 302
222
Managing the Machine
Managing the Machine
3S2W-040
To reduce the various risks associated with the use of this machine, such as leaks of personal information or
unauthorized use by third parties, constant and effective security measures are required. An administrator should
manage important settings, such as access privileges and security settings, to ensure that the machine is used safely.
◼ Configuring the Basic Management System
Setting Access Privileges(P. 225)
Configuring the Network Security Settings(P. 236)
◼ Preparing for Risks from Negligence or Misuse
Restricting the Machine's Functions(P. 270)
◼ Ensuring Effective Management
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 278)
223
Managing the Machine
◼ Managing the System Configuration and Settings
Updating the Firmware(P. 299)
Initializing Settings(P. 302)
224
Managing the Machine
Setting Access Privileges
3S2W-041
Protect the machine from unauthorized access by only allowing users with access privileges to use the machine.
Access privileges are set separately for system administrators, general users, and the Remote UI. When privileges are
set, the user must enter an ID and PIN to print or change settings.
Set up an account with full access privileges called "System Manager ID" for a system manager. Registering an account
called "Department ID" allows you to manage general users. Using a Department ID, you can set a PIN for using this
machine as well as keep track of the number of pages printed for each department ID. And by setting a Remote UI
Access PIN, you can restrict use of the Remote UI.
System Manager ID
System Manager ID is an account with full access privileges. If you specify a System Manager ID, you need to
log on to the machine using the System Manager ID information in order to access items that requires
administrator privileges such as <Network> and <Management Settings>. We recommend that you set and
register the System Manager ID. Otherwise, anyone will be able to change the machine settings. Only one
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 226)
System Manager ID can be registered.
Department ID (Department ID Management)
You can specify access privileges for a user (or group of users) by registering a Department ID. You can register
multiple Department IDs. If a user tries to operate the machine when Department IDs are enabled, a login
screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own Department ID and PIN to use the machine. Information
such as how many pages have been printed for each Department ID can be compiled. Setting the
Department ID Management(P. 228)
Remote UI PIN (Remote UI Access PIN)
This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI.
Remote UI PIN(P. 234)
225
Setting a
Managing the Machine
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN
3S2W-042
Set the system manager account, "System Manager ID." You can also set a PIN for the System Manager ID. If the
System Manager ID is specified, you can access items that require administrator privileges, for example, <Network>
and <Management Settings>, only when the System Manager ID and PIN have been entered correctly. The System
Manager ID settings information is critical to the security of the machine, so make sure that only Administrators know
the System Manager ID and PIN.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Management Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 108)
If the System Manager ID has already been set
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
Select <User Management>
4
Select <System Manager ID and PIN>.
5
Specify the System Manager ID and PIN.
● Specify the <System Manager ID>
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
<System Manager Information Settings>.
<System Manager PIN>.
● Enter numbers for each item, and press <Apply> (
).
● The Confirm screen is displayed. Enter the PIN once again to confirm.
● You cannot register an ID or PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."
● To cancel the System Manager ID and PIN settings, clear the information you entered in
<Apply> (
) with the fields blank.
Setting the System Manager Name
1
Select <System Manager Name>.
2
Enter the System Manager Name, and select <Apply>.
● On how to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 121) .
226
and press
Managing the Machine
● Do not forget your PIN. If you forget your PIN, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help
line.
Configuring settings via the Remote UI
● Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Click [Settings/Registration]
[System Manager Information]
[User Management]
[Edit] and specify the necessary settings on the displayed screen.
● By using the Remote UI, you can register a variety of information, including contact information,
Administrator comments, the installation location of the machine, as well as the settings that you can
register by using the operation panel. The registered information can be viewed on the [Device Information]
page of the Remote UI. Checking System Manager Information(P. 285)
Logging in to the machine
● If you try to access items that require administrator privileges, for example, <Network> and <Management
Settings>, when the System Manager ID is specified, the Login screen is displayed. Logging in to the
Machine(P. 125)
● You must also enter the System Manager ID and PIN to log in using the Remote UI in System Manager
Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 279)
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 225)
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 228)
227
Managing the Machine
Setting the Department ID Management
3S2W-043
You can control access to the machine by using multiple IDs for multiple users or groups. If a user tries to operate the
machine when Department ID Management is enabled, a login screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own
Department ID and PIN to use the machine. When Department ID Management is enabled, usage of functions, such as
printing, is recorded for each Department ID. To configure Department ID Management, register department IDs as
necessary and then enable Department ID Management function. Additional settings are required if you want to
enable Department ID Management for operation from a computer.
Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN(P. 228)
Enabling the Department ID Management(P. 230)
Enabling the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer(P. 231)
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 232)
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN
Register a Department ID and set a PIN for it. Register all the department IDs to be managed.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [User Management]
4
Register or edit Department IDs.
Click [Register New Department].
2
Specify the required settings.
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Department ID Management].
Registering a Department ID
1
Starting Remote
228
Managing the Machine
[Department ID]
Enter the Department ID number to be registered.
[Set PIN]
To set a PIN, select the check box and enter the same number both in the [PIN] and [Confirm] text boxes.
[Restrict Functions]
You can restrict the number of pages to print and the available functions for departments to be
registered. To restrict the number of pages to print, select the check box for the target type, and enter
the appropriate number of pages in [Number of Pages]. Select the check box for the target functions to
restrict functions.
3
Click [OK].
Editing the settings of the registered Department ID
1
Click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] to edit.
2
Change the settings as necessary and click [OK].
Deleting a Department ID
● Click [Delete] on the right of the Department ID you want to delete
click [OK].
[Department ID Page Total]
● You can check the total number of pages for jobs that have been executed to date on a department ID basis.
● If you want to return the counts to zero, click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] and click
[Clear Count] [OK]. If you want to return the counts of all Department IDs to zero, click [Clear All Counts]
[OK].
229
Managing the Machine
Enabling the Department ID Management
After you register as many Department IDs as necessary, enable Department ID Management.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [User Management]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Department ID Management] check box.
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Department ID Management].
[Department ID Management]
Select the check box to enable Department ID Management. If you do not want to use Department ID
Management, clear the check box.
● For information about [Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs], see
Unknown(P. 232) .
6
Click [OK].
230
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is
Managing the Machine
Using the operation panel
● Department ID Management settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<Department ID Management>(P. 430)
Logging in to the machine
● When you try to operate the machine when Department ID Management is enabled, the login screen is
displayed. Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
Enabling the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer
When you want to enable Department ID Management for jobs from a computer, you need to specify the department
ID and PIN using the driver pre-installed on each computer.
● To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
1
2
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 512)
Right-click the driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
3
Click the [Device Settings] tab.
4
Select [Department ID Management] under [User Management].
5
Click [Settings] found to the right.
6
Specify the settings as necessary and click [OK].
[Allow PIN Setting]
Select the check box to enable the PIN setting.
[Department ID]
Enter the Department ID number.
[PIN]
Enter the PIN corresponding to the Department ID as necessary.
231
Managing the Machine
[Verify]
Click to verify that the correct ID and PIN are entered. This function is not available if the machine and the
computer are connected via a USB or WSD (Web Services on Devices) port.
[Confirm Department ID/PIN When Printing]
Select the check box to display the [Confirm Department ID/PIN] pop-up screen each time you send job from
a computer.
[Do Not Use Department ID Management When B&W Printing]
Select the check box to send black and white print data as an unknown ID job.
[Authenticate Department ID/PIN at Device]
Select the check box if the machine and the computer are connected via a USB or WSD port.
7
Click [OK].
Logging in to the machine
● When you try to send job from a computer when Department ID
Management is enabled, the following pop-up screen is displayed
(unless the [Confirm Department ID/PIN When Printing] check box is
cleared):
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown
"Printing from computer" is configured by default so that the user can execute jobs without entering an ID and PIN
even while Department ID Management is enabled. When you want to configure a setting so that functions cannot be
used unless the ID and PIN are entered, perform the following procedure.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [User Management]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Clear the check boxes as necessary.
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Department ID Management].
232
Managing the Machine
[Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs]
In order to send job from a computer when Department ID Management is enabled, you need to enter the
correct ID and PIN ( Enabling the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer(P. 231) ).
However, if the check box is selected for this setting, jobs are executed even when the ID and PIN are not
entered. When you want to configure a setting so that no jobs are executed unless the correct department ID
and PIN are entered, clear the check box.
6
Click [OK].
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 225)
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 226)
233
Managing the Machine
Setting a Remote UI PIN
3S2W-044
You can set a PIN for access to the Remote UI. All users use a common PIN.
● When Department ID Management is enabled, setting here is not required.
Management(P. 228)
Setting the Department ID
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [License/Other]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use Remote UI Access PIN] check box and set the PIN.
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Remote UI Settings].
[Use Remote UI Access PIN]
If you select the check box, you must enter a PIN to access the Remote UI.
[Set/Change PIN]
To set or change a PIN, select the check box and enter the same number both in the [PIN] and [Confirm] text
boxes.
6
Click [OK].
234
Managing the Machine
Using the operation panel
● Remote UI Access PIN settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
Settings>(P. 436)
<Remote UI
If <Management Settings> are initialized
● The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the PIN.
Menu>(P. 439)
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 225)
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 226)
235
<Initialize
Managing the Machine
Configuring the Network Security Settings
3S2W-045
Authorized users may incur unanticipated losses from attacks by malicious third parties, such as sniffing, spoofing,
and tampering of data as it flows over a network. To protect your important and valuable information from these
attacks, the machine supports the following features to enhance security and secrecy.
Firewall Settings
Unauthorized access by third parties, as well as network attacks and intrusions, can be blocked by limiting
communication only to devices that have a specific IP address or MAC address. Restricting Communication
by Using Firewalls(P. 238)
Changing Port Numbers
A protocol that is used to exchange information with other devices is assigned port numbers that are
predetermined according to the type of protocol. The port number must be the same for all communication
devices; therefore, changing it to an arbitrary number is important to prevent hacking from outside.
Changing Port Numbers(P. 245)
Proxy Settings
When the client devices are connected to an external network, communication is established through the proxy
server. When the proxy server is used, websites can be browsed more safely, therefore, security can be
expected to be enhanced. Setting a Proxy(P. 246)
TLS Encrypted Communication
TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web
browser or an e-mail application. TLS enables secure network communication when you access the machine
from a computer via the Remote UI. Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 248)
236
Managing the Machine
IPSec Communication
While TLS only encrypts data used on a specific application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail application,
IPSec encrypts the whole (or payloads of) IP packets. This enables IPSec to offer a more versatile security system
than TLS. Configuring IPSec Settings(P. 259)
IEEE 802.1X Authentication
IEEE 802.1X is a standard and mechanism for blocking unauthorized access to the network by collectively
managing user authentication information. If a device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must
go through user authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user.
Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication
to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point)
blocks access from the outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client
device. Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 266)
237
Managing the Machine
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls
3S2W-046
Without proper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are
connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet filter, a feature that
restricts communication to devices with specified IP addresses or MAC addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 239)
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 242)
238
Managing the Machine
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings
3S2W-047
You can either limit communication to only devices with specified IP addresses, or block devices with specified IP
addresses but permit other communications. You can specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit] for the target IP address filter.
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Firewall Settings].
● Select the filter that matches the target IP address. To restrict data sent from the machine to a computer,
select [Outbound Filter]. To restrict data received from a computer, select [Inbound Filter].
5
Specify the settings for packet filtering.
● Select the default policy to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine, and then
specify IP addresses for exceptions.
1
Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default Policy].
[Use Filter]
239
Managing the Machine
Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
[Default Policy]
Select the precondition to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine.
[Reject]
Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from
devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications
with other devices are prohibited.
[Allow]
2
Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from
devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications
with other devices are permitted.
Specify address exceptions.
● Enter the IP address (or the range of IP addresses) in the [Address to Register] text box and click
[Add].
Check for entry errors
● If IP addresses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI,
in which case you need to set <IPv4 Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>.
<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 337)
<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 338)
Entry form for IP addresses
Description
Entering a single address
Specifying a range of addresses
Specifying a range of addresses with a prefix
Example
IPv4:
Delimit numbers with periods.
192.168.0.10
IPv6:
Delimit alphanumeric characters with
colons.
fe80::10
Insert a hyphen between the addresses.
192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20
Enter the address, followed by a slash and
192.168.0.32/27
a number indicating the prefix length.
fe80::1234/64
When [Reject] is selected for an outbound filter
● Outgoing multicast and broadcast packets cannot be filtered.
Deleting an IP address from exceptions
● Select an IP address and click [Delete].
240
Managing the Machine
3
6
Click [OK].
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
Using the operation panel
● You can also enable or disable IP address filtering from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 337)
<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 338)
LINKS
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 242)
241
Managing the Machine
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings
3S2W-048
You can limit communication to only devices with specified MAC addresses, or block devices with specified MAC
addresses but permit other communications.
This function is unavailable when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit] for the target MAC address filter.
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Firewall Settings].
● To restrict data sent from the machine to a computer, select [Outbound Filter]. To restrict data received from
a computer, select [Inbound Filter].
5
Specify the settings for packet filtering.
● Select the precondition (default policy) to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the
machine, and then specify MAC addresses for exceptions.
242
Managing the Machine
1
Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default Policy].
[Use Filter]
Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
[Default Policy]
Select the precondition to allow or reject other devices to communicate with the machine.
[Reject]
Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from
devices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses].
Communications with other devices are prohibited.
Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from
[Allow]
devices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses].
Communications with other devices are permitted.
2
Specify address exceptions.
● Enter the MAC address in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add].
● You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons.
Check for entry errors
● If MAC addresses are incorrectly entered, you may become unable to access the machine from the
Remote UI, in which case you need to set <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>. <MAC Address
Filter>(P. 338)
When [Reject] is selected for an outbound filter
● Outgoing multicast and broadcast packets cannot be filtered.
Deleting a MAC address from exceptions
● Select a MAC address and click [Delete].
243
Managing the Machine
3
6
Click [OK].
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
Using the operation panel
● You can also enable or disable MAC address filtering from <Menu> in the Home screen.
Filter>(P. 338)
LINKS
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 239)
244
<MAC Address
Managing the Machine
Changing Port Numbers
3S2W-049
Ports serve as endpoints for communicating with other devices. Typically, conventional port numbers are used for
major protocols, but devices that use these port numbers are vulnerable to attacks because these port numbers are
well-known. To enhance security, your Network Administrator may change the port numbers. When a port number has
been changed, the new number must be shared with the communicating devices, such as computers and servers.
Specify the port number settings depending on the network environment.
● To change the port number for proxy server, see
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Setting a Proxy(P. 246) .
Home Screen(P. 108)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings>
4
Selecting the protocol of which you want to change the port number.
<Port Number Settings>.
Learning more about the protocols
● <LPD>/<RAW>/<WSD Multicast Discovery>
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 51)
● <HTTP>
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 275)
● <POP3>
Receiving I-Faxes for Printing(P. 196)
● <SNMP>
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 73)
● <Multicast Discovery>
Monitoring the Machine from the Device Management Systems(P. 78)
5
Enter the port number, and press <Apply> (
6
For the touch panel model, select <OK>.
7
Restart the machine.
).
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
LINKS
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 54)
245
Managing the Machine
Setting a Proxy
3S2W-04A
A proxy (or HTTP proxy server) refers to a computer or software that carries out HTTP communication for other
devices, especially when communicating with resources outside the network, such as when browsing Web sites. The
client devices connect to the outside network through the proxy server, and do not communicate directly to the
resources outside. Setting a proxy not only facilitates management of traffic between in-house and outside networks
but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced security. When you use
Google Cloud Print to print over the Internet, you can enhance security by setting a proxy. When setting a proxy, make
sure that you have the necessary proxy information, including the IP address, port number, and a user name and
password for authentication.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 279)
Starting Remote
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use Proxy] check box and specify the required settings.
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Proxy Settings].
[Use Proxy]
Select the check box to use the specified proxy server when communicating with an HTTP server.
[HTTP Proxy Server Address]
246
Managing the Machine
Enter the address of the proxy server. Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment.
[HTTP Proxy Server Port Number]
Change the port number as necessary.
[Use Proxy within Same Domain]
Select the check box to also use the specified proxy server for communication with devices in the same
domain.
[Use Proxy Authentication]
To enable authentication by the proxy server, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the
user name in the [User Name] text box.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password for the proxy authentication, when it is enabled, select the check box and
enter alphanumeric characters for the new password in the [Password] text box.
6
Click [OK].
LINKS
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 219)
247
Managing the Machine
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS
3S2W-04C
You can encrypt communication between the machine and a Web browser on the computer by using Transport Layer
Security (TLS). TLS is a mechanism for encrypting data sent or received over the network. TLS must be enabled when
the Remote UI is used for specifying settings for IPSec (Pre-Shared Key Method), IEEE 802.1X authentication (TTLS/
PEAP), or SNMPv3. To use TLS encrypted communication for the Remote UI, you need to specify a "key and certificate"
(server certificate) you want to use before enabling TLS. Generate or install the key and certificate for TLS before
enabling TLS ( Management Functions(P. 497) ).
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 279)
Starting Remote
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Key and Certificate].
5
Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certificate you want to use.
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[TLS Settings].
Viewing details of a certificate
● You can check the details of the certificate or verify the certificate by clicking the corresponding text link
under [Key Name], or the certificate icon.
6
Click [Edit].
7
Configure detailed TLS settings.
248
Managing the Machine
[Allowed Versions]
Specify [Maximum Version] and [Minimum Version] of TLS.
[Algorithm Settings]
Select the check box for the encryption algorithm to use for TLS.
8
Click [OK].
9
Select [License/Other]
[Remote UI Settings].
10
Click [Edit].
11
Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [OK].
12
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
249
Managing the Machine
Using the operation panel
● You can also enable or disable TLS encrypted communication from <Menu> in the Home screen.
UI>/<Use Remote UI>(P. 436)
<Remote
Starting the Remote UI with TLS
● If you try to start the Remote UI when TLS is enabled, a security alert may be displayed regarding the
security certificate. In this case, check that the correct URL is entered in the address field, and then proceed
to display the Remote UI screen. Starting Remote UI(P. 279)
Using TLS to encrypt I-Fax reception
● If the POP3 server supports TLS, you can enable TLS for communication with the POP3 server (
Configuring the I-Fax RX Settings(P. 196) ). For more information about the POP3 server, contact your
Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
LINKS
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 251)
Generating a Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)(P. 254)
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 257)
Configuring IPSec Settings(P. 259)
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 266)
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 73)
250
Managing the Machine
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network
Communication
3S2W-04E
A key and certificate can be generated with the machine when it is required for encrypted communication via
Transport Layer Security (TLS). You can use TLS when accessing the machine via the Remote UI. Self-signed certificates
are used with the key and certificate generated in "Network Communication."
● If you want to use a server certificate that has a CA signature, you can generate a CSR together with a key
instead of a certificate. Generating a Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)(P. 254)
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Device Management]
4
Click [Generate Key].
Starting Remote
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Key and Certificate Settings].
Deleting a registered key and certificate
● Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certificate you want to delete
click [OK].
● A key and certificate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or
"[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the other key
and certificate before deleting it.
5
Select [Network Communication] and click [OK].
6
Specify settings for the key and certificate.
251
Managing the Machine
[Key Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in a
list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the dropdown list. In either case, the larger the number for the key length is, the higher the security level
becomes. However, the communication speed becomes slower.
● When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signature Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the
key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].
[Certificate Settings]
[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]
Enter the validity start date of the certificate, in the order of: year, month, day.
[Validity End Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]
Enter the validity end date of the certificate, in the order of: year, month, day. A date earlier than
[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)] cannot be set.
[Country/Region]
Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.
You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"
for the United States.
[State]/[City]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certificate as necessary. "Common Name"
is often abbreviated as "CN."
252
Managing the Machine
7
Click [OK].
● Generating a key and certificate may take some time.
● After the key and certificate is generated, it is automatically registered to the machine.
LINKS
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 257)
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 248)
Configuring IPSec Settings(P. 259)
253
Managing the Machine
Generating a Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
3S2W-04F
Because certificates generated on the machine do not have a CA signature, a communication error may result
depending on devices it communicates with. To have the certificate authority issue the certificate with the CA
signature, you need to obtain data of CSR (Certificate Signing Request), which the administrator can generate from
Remote UI. When the certificate is issued, register it in the key with the CSR generated.
Generating a Key and CSR(P. 254)
Registering a Certificate to a Key(P. 256)
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
Generating a Key and CSR
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Device Management] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Device Management]
4
Click [Generate Key].
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Key and Certificate Settings].
Deleting a registered key and certificate
● Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certificate you want to delete
click [OK].
● A key and certificate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or
"[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and
certificate before deleting it.
5
Select [Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)] and click [OK].
6
Specify settings for the key and CSR.
254
Managing the Machine
[Key Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in a
list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the dropdown list. In any case, the larger the number for the key length, the slower the communication.
However, the security is tighter.
● When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signature Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the
key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].
[Certificate Signing Request (CSR) Settings]
[Country/Region]
Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.
You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"
for the United States.
[State]/[City]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certificate as necessary. "Common Name"
is often abbreviated as "CN."
7
Click [OK].
● Generating a key and CSR may take some time.
255
Managing the Machine
8
Click [Store in File].
● A dialog box for storing the file appears. Choose where to store the file and click [Save].
➠ The CSR file is stored on the computer.
9
Attach the stored file and submit the application to the certification authority.
Registering a Certificate to a Key
The key with the CSR generated cannot be used until the certificate issued from the certificate authority based on the
CSR is registered in the key. Once the certification authority has issued the certificate, register it using the procedure
below.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Device Management]
4
Click [Key Name] or [Certificate] required to register the certificate.
5
Click [Register Certificate].
6
Click [Browse], specify the file for the certificate signing request, and click [Register].
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Key and Certificate Settings].
LINKS
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 248)
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 251)
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 257)
Configuring IPSec Settings(P. 259)
256
Managing the Machine
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network
Communication
3S2W-04H
You can obtain the key and certificate, and the CA certificate from a certification authority (CA) for use with the
machine. Install and register the obtained key and certificate file and CA certificate file in this machine using Remote
UI. Check the key and certificate, and CA certificate conditions that are required for the machine in advance (
Management Functions(P. 497) ).
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Device Management]
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Key and Certificate Settings] or [CA Certificate
Settings].
● Click [Key and Certificate Settings] to install a key and certificate, or [CA Certificate Settings] to install a CA
certificate.
4
Click [Register Key and Certificate] or [Register CA Certificate].
Deleting a registered key and certificate or CA certificate
● Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certificate or CA certificate you want to delete
cannot delete the preinstalled CA certificates.
click [OK]. You
● A key and certificate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or
"[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and
certificate before deleting it.
Disabling or enabling the preinstalled CA certificates
● Click [Disable] on the right of the preinstalled CA certificate you want to disable. To enable the certificate
again, click [Enable] on the right of the certificate.
5
Click [Install].
257
Managing the Machine
Deleting the key and certificate file or CA certificate file
● Click [Delete] on the right of the file you want to delete
6
click [OK].
Click [Browse], specify the file to install, and click [Start Installation].
➠ The key and certificate file or the CA certificate file is installed on the machine from a computer.
7
Register the key and certificate or CA certificate.
Registering a key and certificate
1
Click [Register] on the right of the key and certificate file you want to register.
2
Enter the name of the key and password.
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the key to be registered.
[Password]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the password of the private key set for the file to be registered.
3
Click [OK].
Registering a CA certificate
Click [Register] on the right of the CA certificate file you want to register.
LINKS
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 251)
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 248)
Configuring IPSec Settings(P. 259)
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 266)
258
Managing the Machine
Configuring IPSec Settings
3S2W-04J
Internet Protocol Security (IPSec or IPsec) is a protocol suite for encrypting data transported over a network, including
Internet networks. While TLS only encrypts data used on a specific application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail
application, IPSec encrypts either whole IP packets or the payloads of IP packets, offering a more versatile security
system. The IPSec of the machine works in transport mode, in which the payloads of IP packets are encrypted. With
this feature, the machine can connect directly to a computer that is in the same virtual private network (VPN). Check
the system requirements ( Management Functions(P. 497) ) and set the necessary configuration on the computer
before you configure the machine.
Using IPSec with IP address filter
● IP address filter settings are applied before the IPSec policies.
Settings(P. 239)
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall
Configuring IPSec Settings
Before using IPSec for encrypted communication, you need to register security policies (SP). A security policy consists
of the groups of settings described below. After registering policies, specify the order in which they are applied.
Selector
Selector defines conditions for IP packets to apply IPSec communication. Selectable conditions include IP
addresses and port numbers of the machine and the devices to communicate with.
IKE
IKE configures the IKEv1 that is used for key exchange protocol. Note that instructions vary depending on the
authentication method selected.
[Pre-Shared Key Method]
This authentication method uses a common key word, called Shared Key, for communication between the
machine and other devices. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before specifying this authentication method (
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 248) ).
[Digital Signature Method]
The machine and the other devices authenticate each other by mutually verifying their digital signatures.
Generate or install the key and certificate beforehand ( Registering the Key and Certificate for Network
Communication(P. 257) ).
AH/ESP
Specify the settings for AH/ESP, which is added to packets during IPSec communication. AH and ESP can be used
at the same time. You can also select whether or not to enable PFS for tighter security.
259
Managing the Machine
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use IPSec] check box and click [OK].
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[IPSec Settings].
● If you want the machine to only receive packets that match one of the security policies that you define in the
steps below, clear the [Receive Non-Policy Packets] check box.
6
Click [Register New Policy].
7
Specify the Policy Settings.
1
In the [Policy Name] text box, enter alphanumeric characters for a name that is used for identifying the
policy.
2
Select the [Enable Policy] check box.
8
Specify the Selector Settings.
260
Managing the Machine
[Local Address]
Click the radio button for the type of IP address of the machine to apply the policy.
[All IP Addresses]
Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.
[IPv4 Address]
Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from the IPv4 address of the
machine.
[IPv6 Address]
Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from an IPv6 address of the
machine.
[Remote Address]
Click the radio button for the type of IP address of the other devices to apply the policy.
[All IP Addresses]
Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.
[All IPv4 Addresses]
Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from IPv4 addresses of the
other devices.
[All IPv6 Addresses]
Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from IPv6 addresses of the
other devices.
[IPv4 Manual Settings]
Select to specify a single IPv4 address or a range of IPv4 addresses to apply IPSec.
Enter the IPv4 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[IPv6 Manual Settings]
Select to specify a single IPv6 address or a range of IPv6 addresses to apply IPSec.
Enter the IPv6 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[Addresses to Set Manually]
If [IPv4 Manual Settings] or [IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected for [Remote Address], enter the IP address to
apply the policy. You can also enter a range of addresses by inserting a hyphen between the addresses.
Entering IP addresses
261
Managing the Machine
Description
Entering a single address
IPv4:
Delimit numbers with periods.
Example
192.168.0.10
IPv6:
fe80::10
Delimit alphanumeric characters with colons.
Specifying a range of addresses Insert a hyphen between the addresses.
192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20
[Subnet Settings]
When manually specifying IPv4 address, you can express the range by using the subnet mask. Enter the
subnet mask using periods to delimit numbers (example:"255.255.255.240").
[Prefix Length]
Specifying the range of IPv6 addresses manually also allows you to specify the range using prefixes. Enter a
range between 0 and 128 as the prefix length.
[Local Port]/[Remote Port]
If you want to create separate policies for each protocol, such as HTTP or WSD, click the [Single Port] radio
button and enter the appropriate port number for the protocol to determine whether to use IPSec.
IPSec is not applied to the following packets
● Loopback, multicast, and broadcast packets
● IKE packets (using UDP on port 500)
● ICMPv6 neighbor solicitation and neighbor advertisement packets
9
Specify the IKE Settings.
[IKE Mode]
The mode used for the key exchange protocol is displayed. The machine supports the main mode, not the
aggressive mode.
[Authentication Method]
Select [Pre-Shared Key Method] or [Digital Signature Method] for the method used when authenticating the
machine. You need to enable TLS for the Remote UI before selecting [Pre-Shared Key Method]. You need to
generate or install the key and certificate before selecting [Digital Signature Method].
Configuring the
Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 248)
[Valid for]
Specify how long a session lasts for IKE SA (ISAKMP SA). Enter the time in minutes.
262
Managing the Machine
[Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group]
Select an algorithm from the drop-down list. Each algorithm is used in the key exchange.
[Authentication]
Select the hash algorithm.
[Encryption]
Select the encryption algorithm.
[DH Group]
Select the Diffie-Hellman group, which determines the key strength.
Authenticating a machine using a pre-shared key
1
Click the [Pre-Shared Key Method] radio button for [Authentication Method] and then click [Shared Key
Settings].
2
Enter alphanumeric characters for the pre-shared key and click [OK].
3
Specify the [Valid for] and [Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group] settings.
Authenticating a machine using digital signature method
1
Click the [Digital Signature Method] radio button for [Authentication Method] and then click [Key and
Certificate].
2
Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certificate you want to use.
Viewing details of a certificate
● You can check the details of the certificate or verify the certificate by clicking the corresponding text
link under [Key Name], or the certificate icon.
3
10
Specify the [Valid for] and [Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group] settings.
Specify the IPSec Network Settings.
[Use PFS]
Select the check box to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) for IPSec session keys. Enabling PFS enhances
the security while increasing the load on the communication. Make sure that PFS is also enabled for the other
devices.
[Specify by Time]/[Specify by Size]
Set the conditions for terminating a session for IPSec SA. IPSec SA is used as a communication tunnel. Select
either or both of the check boxes as necessary. If both check boxes are selected, the IPSec SA session is
terminated when either of the conditions has been satisfied.
263
Managing the Machine
[Specify by Time]
Enter a time in minutes to specify how long a session lasts.
[Specify by Size]
Enter a size in megabytes to specify how much data can be transported in a session.
[Select Algorithm]
Select the [ESP], [ESP (AES-GCM)], or [AH (SHA1)] check box(es) depending on the IPSec header and the
algorithm used. AES-GCM is an algorithm for both authentication and encryption. If [ESP] is selected, also
select algorithms for authentication and encryption from the [ESP Authentication] and [ESP Encryption] dropdown lists.
[ESP Authentication]
To enable the ESP authentication, select [SHA1] for the hash algorithm. Select [Do Not
Use] if you want to disable the ESP authentication.
[ESP Encryption]
Select the encryption algorithm for ESP. You can select [NULL] if you do not want to
specify the algorithm, or select [Do Not Use] if you want to disable the ESP encryption.
[Connection Mode]
The connection mode of IPSec is displayed. The machine supports transport mode, in which the payloads of
IP packets are encrypted. Tunnel mode, in which whole IP packets (headers and payloads) are encapsulated
is not available.
11
Click [OK].
● If you need to register an additional security policy, return to step 6.
12
Arrange the order of policies listed under [Registered IPSec Policies].
● Policies are applied from one at the highest position to the lowest. Click [Up] or [Down] to move a policy up or
down the order.
Editing a policy
● Click the corresponding text link under [Policy Name] for the edit screen.
Deleting a policy
● Click [Delete] on the right of the policy name you want to delete
13
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
264
click [OK].
Managing the Machine
Using the operation panel
● You can also enable or disable IPSec communication from <Menu> in the Home screen.
IPSec>(P. 332)
LINKS
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 248)
IPSec Policy List(P. 467)
265
<Use
Managing the Machine
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings
3S2W-04K
The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. A typical 802.1X network consists of a RADIUS server
(authentication server), LAN switch (authenticator), and client devices with authentication software (supplicants). If a
device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in order to prove that
the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server,
which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails,
a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network.
IEEE 802.1X Authentication Method
Select the authentication method from the options below. If necessary, install or register a key and certificate or
a CA certificate before configuring IEEE 802.1X authentication ( Registering the Key and Certificate for
Network Communication(P. 257) ).
TLS
The machine and the authentication server authenticate each other by mutually verifying their certificates. A
key and certificate issued by a certification authority (CA) is required for the client authentication (when
authenticating the machine). For the server authentication, a CA certificate installed via the Remote UI can be
used in addition to a CA certificate preinstalled in the machine.
TTLS
This authentication method uses a user name and password for the client authentication and a CA certificate
for the server authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol. TTLS can be used
with PEAP at the same time. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before configuring this authentication method (
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 248) ).
PEAP
The required settings are almost the same as those of TTLS. MSCHAPv2 is used as the internal protocol.
Enable TLS for the Remote UI before configuring this authentication method ( Configuring the Key and
Certificate for TLS(P. 248) ).
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 279)
266
Starting Remote
Managing the Machine
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use IEEE 802.1X] check box, and enter the login name in the [Login Name]
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[IEEE 802.1X Settings].
text box.
[Use IEEE 802.1X]
Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1X authentication.
[Login Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for a name (EAP identity) that is used for identifying the user.
6
Configure the required settings according to the specified authentication method.
Setting TLS
1
Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [Key and Certificate].
● You cannot use TLS with TTLS or PEAP.
2
Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certificate you want to use for the client
authentication.
Viewing details of a certificate
● You can check the details of the certificate or verify the certificate by clicking the corresponding text
link under [Key Name], or the certificate icon.
267
Managing the Machine
Setting TTLS/PEAP
1
Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box.
Internal protocol for TTLS
● You can select MSCHAPv2 or PAP.
2
Click [Change User Name/Password].
● To specify a user name other than the login name, clear the [Use Login Name as User Name] check
box. Select the check box if you want to use the login name as the user name.
3
Set the user name/password.
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.
[Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the new
password both in the [Password] and [Confirm] text boxes.
4
Click [OK].
7
Click [OK].
8
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
Using the operation panel
● You can also enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication from <Menu> in the Home screen.
802.1X>/<IEEE 802.1X Settings>(P. 337)
268
<Use IEEE
Managing the Machine
LINKS
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 248)
269
Managing the Machine
Restricting the Machine's Functions
3S2W-04L
Some of the functions of the machine may rarely be used or provide opportunities for misuse. For security purposes,
the machine can be set to limit its capabilities by partially or completely disabling these functions.
Restricting Printing from a Computer
You can limit "printing from computer" only to secure documents so that no print jobs can be executed unless
the PIN is entered on the machine side. Restricting Printing from a Computer(P. 272)
Restricting USB Functions
The USB connection allows an easy connection with peripheral devices, but it may cause a security risk such as
an information leakage. You can restrict a USB connection with a computer or saving to a USB memory device.
Restricting USB Functions(P. 273)
Disabling HTTP Communication
When not performing operations via the network, for example, when using the machine via USB connection,
you can disable HTTP communication to prevent a hacking via the HTTP port. Disabling HTTP
Communication(P. 275)
Disabling Remote Management
When not using Remote UI, you can disable functions to prevent an unauthorized remote operation via Remote
UI. Disabling Remote UI(P. 276)
270
Managing the Machine
Restricting Use of the Operation Panel
If your machine is of the black and white LCD model, you can protect the machine settings from inadvertent
changes by restricting use of the keys on the operation panel.
Restricting Use of the Operation
Panel(P. 277)
271
Managing the Machine
Restricting Printing from a Computer
3S2W-04R
You can drastically reduce information leakage risks by limiting the documents printable from a computer to the
Secure Print documents ( Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 177) ).
Touch Panel Model
<Menu>
<Apply>
<Function Settings> <Secure Print>
<OK> Restart the machine
<Restrict Printer Jobs>
<On>
<Restrict Printer Jobs>
<On>
Black and White LCD Model
<Menu>
machine
<Function Settings>
<Secure Print>
272
Restart the
Managing the Machine
Restricting USB Functions
3S2W-04S
USB is a convenient way of connecting peripheral devices and storing or relocating data, but USB can also be a source
of information leakage if it is not properly managed. Be especially careful when handling USB memory devices. This
section describes how to restrict connection via the USB port of the machine and how to prohibit use of USB memory
devices.
Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer(P. 273)
Restricting the USB Print Function(P. 273)
Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer
You can disable the computer connection USB port located on the back side of the machine. If this port is disabled, the
machine cannot communicate with a computer via USB. This setting does not affect the front USB port, which is for
attaching USB memory devices.
Touch Panel Model
<Menu>
Device>
<Preferences> <External Interface> <USB Settings>
<Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Select <Off> in <Use as USB
Black and White LCD Model
<Menu> <Preferences>
Restart the machine
<External Interface>
<USB Settings>
<Use as USB Device>
<Off>
Restricting the USB Print Function
You can disable printing data from a USB memory device. The data in the USB memory device cannot be printed.
Touch Panel Model
<Menu> <Function Settings>
<Use Print Function> <Apply>
<Access Files> <Memory Media Settings>
<OK> Restart the machine
273
Select <Off> in
Managing the Machine
Black and White LCD Model
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Access Files>
Function> <Off> Restart the machine
<Memory Media Settings>
LINKS
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 182)
274
<Use Print
Managing the Machine
Disabling HTTP Communication
3S2W-04U
HTTP is used for communications over the network, such as when you access the machine via the Remote UI. If you
are using a USB connection or are otherwise not using HTTP, you can disable HTTP to block malicious third-party
intrusions via the unused HTTP port.
● Disabling HTTP disables some of the network capabilities, such as the Remote UI, WSD printing, and printing
with Google Cloud Print.
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Network>
<TCP/IP Settings>
LINKS
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 278)
Changing Port Numbers(P. 245)
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 51)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 219)
275
<Use HTTP>
<Off>
<Yes>
Managing the Machine
Disabling Remote UI
3S2W-04W
The Remote UI is useful because the machine settings can be specified by using a Web browser on a computer. To use
the Remote UI, the machine must be connected to a computer over the network. If the machine is connected to a
computer via USB, or if you do not need to use the Remote UI, you might want to disable the Remote UI to reduce the
risk of having your machine controlled remotely over the network by malicious third parties.
Touch Panel Model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other> <Remote UI Settings> <Remote
UI> Select <Off> in <Use Remote UI> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and White LCD Model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware>
Settings> <Use Remote UI> <Off> Restart the machine
LINKS
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 278)
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 275)
276
<Remote UI
Managing the Machine
Restricting Use of the Operation Panel
3S2W-04X
If your machine is of the black and white LCD model, you can protect the machine settings from inadvertent changes
by restricting use of the keys on the operation panel.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Device Management]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Enable Key Lock] check box
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Key Lock Settings].
[OK].
● Even when the keylock function is activated, the following keys can be used.
- Home key
- Back key
- Energy Saver key
- Stop key
277
Managing the Machine
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)
3S2W-04Y
Using a Web browser to operate the machine remotely, you can check the documents waiting to be printed or the
status of the machine. You can also make various settings. You can do this without leaving your desk, making system
management easier. For more information about the system requirements for the Remote UI, see System
Environment(P. 499) .
Functions of the Remote UI
Checking the Status and Logs(P. 282)
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288)
Security Policy(P. 291)
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 296)
Basics of the Remote UI
Starting Remote UI(P. 279)
278
Managing the Machine
Starting Remote UI
3S2W-050
To operate remotely, you need to input the IP address of the machine into a Web browser and start the Remote UI.
Check the IP address set to the machine in advance ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 47) ). If you have any questions,
ask your Network Administrator.
1
Start the Web browser.
2
Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in the address field, and press the
[ENTER] key.
● If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://
[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).
If a security alert is displayed
● A security alert may be displayed when the Remote UI communication is encrypted ( Configuring the
Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 248) ). When certificate settings or TLS settings have no errors, continue
browsing the Web site.
3
Log in to the Remote UI.
When the Department ID Management is disabled
Select [System Manager Mode] or [General User Mode], and enter a value in [Remote UI Access PIN] as
necessary.
[System Manager Mode]
You can perform all the Remote UI operations and settings. Enter the appropriate ID in [System Manager ID]
and PIN in [System Manager PIN]. Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 226)
[General User Mode]
You can check the status of documents or the machine, and you can also change some of the settings. When
you want to check if a specific document of yours is in the print queue or cancel the printing of a document
of yours in the print queue, enter the user name of the document in [User Name]. The user name is
automatically set to print documents based on information such as your computer name or computer login
name.
[Remote UI Access PIN]
279
Managing the Machine
If [Remote UI Access PIN] is set, enter the PIN.
Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 234)
When the Department ID Management is enabled
Enter the appropriate ID in [Department ID] and PIN in [PIN].
Management(P. 228)
4
Setting the Department ID
Click [Log In].
➠ The Portal page (main page) will be displayed.
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
Remote UI Screen
When you log in to the Remote UI, the following Portal page appears. This section describes the items displayed on
the Portal page and the basic operations.
[Device Basic Information]
Displays the current status of the machine and error information. If an error has occurred, the link to the
Error Information page will be displayed.
[Consumables Information]
Displays paper information and the amount remaining in the toner cartridges.
[Support Link]
Displays the support link specified in [Support Link] under [License/Other].
280
Managing the Machine
Refresh Icon
Refreshes the currently displayed page.
[Language]
Selects the display language used for the Remote UI screens.
[Log Out]
Logs off from the Remote UI. The Login page will be displayed.
[Mail to System Manager]
Displays a window for creating an e-mail to the system manager specified in [System Manager Information]
under [User Management].
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
Displays the [Status Monitor/Cancel] page. For any of the waiting documents, you can check the status/
history or cancel the processing.
[Settings/Registration]
Displays [Settings/Registration] page. When you have logged in to System Manager Mode, you can change
the settings items and save/load the registered data. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288)
[Application Library]
Displays the Application Library setting page.
281
Managing the Machine
Checking the Status and Logs
3S2W-051
Checking Current Status of Print Documents(P. 282)
Checking Current Status of Received Documents(P. 283)
Checking History of Documents(P. 283)
Checking Error Information(P. 283)
Checking Consumables(P. 284)
Checking Device Specifications(P. 284)
Checking System Manager Information(P. 285)
Checking Print Total Counter(P. 285)
Checking History of Toner Cartridges(P. 286)
Checking Usage Status of the Machine(P. 286)
● A file name of a document may not be displayed in full. The printed application name may be added to the
file name.
Checking Current Status of Print Documents
The list of the documents currently printing or waiting to be printed is displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI (
in [Print]
Starting Remote UI(P. 279) )
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Job Status]
● You can delete a document job by clicking [Cancel].
● Regardless of the Department ID Management setting, all the print documents currently printing and
waiting to be printed will be listed.
● If you entered your user name when you logged on in General User Mode, your user name will only
be displayed on the documents that you printed.
282
Managing the Machine
● Click [Job Number] on the paused documents and secure documents to display detailed information.
You can check the user name and the page count of the printed document.
Checking Current Status of Received Documents
You can check the logs of received I-Fax documents.
Log in to the Remote UI (
in [RX]
Starting Remote UI(P. 279) )
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Job Status]
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Job Log]
Checking History of Documents
The job logs of print or receiving (RX) are displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Starting Remote UI(P. 279) )
Checking Error Information
When an error occurs, this page will be displayed by clicking the message displayed under [Error Information] on the
Portal page (main page). Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
Log in to the Remote UI (
Information]
Starting Remote UI(P. 279) )
283
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Error
Managing the Machine
Checking Consumables
Paper size and paper type for the paper source, toner cartridge model number, etc. are displayed. You can also click
[Check Consumables Details] in the Portal page (main page) to display this page ( Remote UI Screen(P. 280) ).
Log in to the Remote UI (
[Consumables]
Starting Remote UI(P. 279) )
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
Checking Device Specifications
The maximum print speed and machine features are displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Features]
Starting Remote UI(P. 279) )
284
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Device
Managing the Machine
Checking System Manager Information
Information about the machine and the system manager is displayed. The device name and other system manager
information displayed here correspond to the settings in [System Manager Information] on the [User Management]
page or in [Device Information Settings] on the [Device Management] page.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Information]
Starting Remote UI(P. 279) )
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Device
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Check
Checking Print Total Counter
The total number of pages that have been printed is displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Counter]
Starting Remote UI(P. 279) )
285
Managing the Machine
Checking History of Toner Cartridges
You can check the usage logs of toner cartridges and other logs. The display can be changed for each color of the
toner cartridge.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Log]
Starting Remote UI(P. 279) )
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Cartridge
Checking Usage Status of the Machine
The monthly total volume of printouts and monthly total power consumption are displayed. You can display the Eco
Information screen and change the settings to save paper and power consumption.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Information]
Starting Remote UI(P. 279) )
286
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Eco
Managing the Machine
LINKS
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
287
Managing the Machine
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI
3S2W-052
You can change the various machine settings by using the Remote UI. Most of the settings can be set also on the
machine, but some settings can only be set using the Remote UI. This section describes the basic flow of changing the
settings of the machine using the Remote UI.
● Some settings can only be changed when you have logged in to System Manager Mode.
● Some settings may require operations that differ from the procedure described here.
1
Start the Remote UI.
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Click the setting you want to configure in the menu on the left side of the screen.
4
Click the link to display the desired page as necessary.
Starting Remote UI(P. 279)
288
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
Managing the Machine
5
Click [Edit].
6
Specify the required settings.
7
Click [OK].
289
Managing the Machine
8
Restart the machine as necessary.
Restarting the Machine(P. 104)
● For information about whether you need to restart the machine, view the message on the edit screen.
290
Managing the Machine
Security Policy
3S2W-08J
It is a common practice for organizations to adopt a security policy that defines basic information security objectives
and standards, which requires information devices such as computers and printers to be operated accordingly. If you
have a security policy to be applied in your organization, apply it to this machine as well.
Viewing the Security Policy(P. 291)
Security Policy Items(P. 291)
To Apply the Security Policy to the Machine(P. 295)
Viewing the Security Policy
You can view the security policy set in the machine using the Remote UI.
1
Start the Remote UI.
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Click [Security Settings]
Starting Remote UI(P. 279)
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Confirm Security Policy].
Security Policy Items
The following items are displayed by the Remote UI. The items for functions unavailable on this machine are also
displayed, but do not affect the machine operation.
◼ [Interface]
[Wireless Connection Policy]
Prevent unauthorized access by prohibiting wireless connections.
[Prohibit Use of Direct Connection] <Use Direct Connection> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to
access the machine from mobile devices.
[Prohibit Use of Wireless LAN]
<Direct Connection
Settings>(P. 322)
<Select Wired/Wireless LAN> is set to <Wired LAN>. It is not
<Select Wired/Wireless
possible to establish a wireless connection with the machine via LAN>(P. 320)
a wireless LAN router or access point.
[USB Policy]
Prevent unauthorized access and data breaches by prohibiting USB connection.
291
Managing the Machine
[Prohibit Use as USB Device]
<Use as USB Device> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to
connect to a computer via USB.
<Use as USB Device>(P. 341)
[Prohibit Use as USB Storage Device] <Use USB Storage Device> is set to <Off>. It is not possible
<Use USB Storage
to use USB memory devices.
Device>(P. 341)
◼ [Network]
[Communication Operational Policy]
Increase the security of communications by requiring the verification of signatures and certificates.
[Always Verify Signatures for SMS/
WebDAV Server Functions]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no
change to the security level.
[Always Verify Server Certificate When
Using TLS]
The following settings in [Use TLS for POP] are set to [On].
● [Verify Certificate]
● [Add CN to Verification Items]
The following settings in [Use Google Cloud Print] are set
to [On].
Receiving I-Faxes for
Printing(P. 196)
Registering the Machine
with Google Cloud
Print(P. 219)
● [Verify Server Certificate]
● [Add CN to Verification Items]
[Prohibit Cleartext Authentication for
Server Functions]
<Dedicated Port Auth. Method>/<Dedicated Port
Authentication Method> is set to <Mode 2>. When using
the machine as a server, plain text authentication and
functions that use plain text authentication are not
<Dedicated Port Auth.
Method>/<Dedicated Port
Authentication
Method>(P. 336)
available.
[Prohibit Use of SNMPv1]
In <SNMP Settings>, <SNMPv1 Settings> is set to <Off>. It
is not possible to use SNMPv1 when obtaining device
information from the computer.
<SNMP Settings>(P. 333)
● This setting does not apply to communication with IEEE 802.1X networks, even if [Always Verify Server
Certificate When Using TLS] is set to [On].
● If [Prohibit Cleartext Authentication for Server Functions] is set to [On] and your device management
software or driver version is old, it may not be possible to connect to the machine. Ensure that you are using
the latest versions.
[Port Usage Policy]
Prevent external breaches by closing unused ports.
[Restrict LPD Port (Port Number: 515)]
In <LPD Settings>, <Use LPD Printing>/<LPD Print Settings> is
<LPD Settings>(P. 331)
set to <Off>. It is not possible to perform LPD printing.
[Restrict RAW Port (Port Number: 9100)] In <RAW Settings>, <Use RAW Printing>/<RAW Print Settings>
<RAW
is set to <Off>. It is not possible to perform RAW printing.
Settings>(P. 331)
[Restrict FTP Port (Port Number: 21)]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no
change to the security level.
[Restrict WSD Port (Port Number: 3702, The following settings in <WSD Settings> are set to <Off>. It is
<WSD
60000)]
not possible to use WSD functions.
Settings>(P. 331)
● <Use WSD Printing>
292
Managing the Machine
● <Use WSD Browsing>
● <Use Multicast Discovery>
[Restrict BMLinkS Port (Port Number:
This function is not available on this machine, giving no
1900)]
change to the security level.
[Restrict IPP Port (Port Number: 631)]
Part of the settings to enable printing from mobile devices
using applications will be turned <Off>, disabling part of
printing from mobile devices using applications.
[Restrict SMB Port (Port Number: 137,
138, 139, 445)]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no
change to the security level.
[Restrict SMTP Port (Port Number: 25)]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no
change to the security level.
[Restrict Dedicated Port (Port Number:
9002, 9006, 9007, 9011-9015,
9017-9019, 9022, 9023, 9025, 20317,
47545-47547)]
<Use Dedicated Port>/<Dedicated Port Settings> is set to
<Off>. It is not possible to use dedicated ports.
[Restrict Remote Operator's Software
Port (Port Number: 5900)]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no
change to the security level.
Linking with Mobile
Devices(P. 200)
<Use Dedicated Port>/
<Dedicated Port
Settings>(P. 335)
[Restrict SIP (IP Fax) Port (Port Number: This function is not available on this machine, giving no
5004, 5005, 5060, 5061, 49152)]
change to the security level.
[Restrict mDNS Port (Port Number:
5353)]
The following settings will be turned <Off>, and part of the
settings to enable printing from mobile devices using
applications will also be turned <Off>. It will be disabled to
search the network or perform automatic settings using
<IPv4 Settings>/<IPv6
Settings>/<DNS
Settings> (Touch panel
model)(P. 324)
<IPv4 Settings>/<IPv6
mDNS. In addition, part of printing from mobile devices using
Settings> (Black and
applications will be disabled as well.
white LCD model)
<IPv4>
<Use mDNS>
● <mDNS Settings>
(P. 328)
● <mDNS Settings>
<IPv6>
<Use mDNS>
Registering the
● [Use Google Cloud Print]
[Local Print]
Machine with Google
Cloud Print(P. 219)
Linking with Mobile
Devices(P. 200)
[Restrict SLP Port (Port Number: 427)]
In [Multicast Discovery Settings], [Discovery Response] is set
to [Off]. It is not possible to search the network or perform
Configuring SLP
Communication with
automatic settings using SLP.
Device Management
Software(P. 79)
[Restrict SNMP Port (Port Number:
In <SNMP Settings>, the <SNMPv1 Settings> and <SNMPv3
161)]
Settings> are set to <Off>. It is not possible to obtain device
information from the computer or configure settings using
SNMP.
<SNMP
Settings>(P. 333)
◼ [Authentication]
[Authentication Operational Policy]
[Prohibit Guest Users to Use Device] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.
[Force Setting of Auto Logout]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.
293
Managing the Machine
[Password Operational Policy]
[Prohibit Caching of Password for External Servers]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the
security level.
[Display Warning When Default Password Is in Use]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the
security level.
[Prohibit Use of Default Password for Remote Access] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the
security level.
[Password Settings Policy]
[Minimum Number of Characters for Password]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to
the security level.
[Password Validity Period]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to
the security level.
[Prohibit Use of 3 or More Identical Consecutive
Characters]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to
the security level.
[Force Use of at Least 1 Uppercase Character]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to
the security level.
[Force Use of at Least 1 Lowercase Character]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to
the security level.
[Force Use of at Least 1 Digit]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to
the security level.
[Force Use of at Least 1 Symbol]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to
the security level.
[Lockout Policy]
Block users from logging in for a specified period of time after a certain number of consecutive invalid login attempts.
[Enable Lockout]
In <Lockout>/<Lockout Settings>, <Enable Lockout> is set to
<On>. Specify the values for <Lockout Threshold> and <Lockout
Period>.
<Lockout>/<Lockout
Settings>(P. 440)
◼ [Key/Certificate]
Protect important data by preventing the use of weak encryption, or by saving encrypted user passwords and keys in a
designated hardware component.
[Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption]
<Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.>/<Prohibit Use of Weak
<Encryption
Encryption> is set to <On>. It is not possible to use weak
encryption.
Settings>(P. 441)
[Prohibit Use of Key/Certificate with Weak
In <Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.>/<Prohibit Use of Weak
Encryption]
Encryption>, <Prohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.>/<Prohibit
Key/Cert. with Weak Encryption> is set to <On>. It is not
possible to use a key or certificate with weak encryption.
<Encryption
Settings>(P. 441)
[Use TPM to Store Password and Key]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no
change to the security level.
294
Managing the Machine
◼ [Log]
[Force Recording of Audit Log] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.
[Force SNTP Settings]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.
◼ [Job]
[Printing Policy]
[Prohibit Immediate Printing of Received Jobs] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the
security level.
[Sending/Receiving Policy]
[Allow Sending Only to Registered Addresses] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the
security level.
[Force Confirmation of Fax Number]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the
security level.
[Prohibit Auto Forwarding]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the
security level.
◼ [Storage]
[Force Complete Deletion of Data] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.
To Apply the Security Policy to the Machine
You can import the security policy edited on the imageRUNNER ADVANCE Series or using Device Management
Software to apply it to this machine. In addition, you can export the security policy as applied to this machine to apply
it to other machines*. Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 296)
*Only
Canon devices that are compatible with security policy settings
● The security policy settings can only be imported if the security policy setting password on the exporting
machine matches that of the importing machine, or if no password has been set for the importing machine.
If no password has been set for the importing machine, the password configured for the exporting machine
is set to the importing machine.
● You cannot set or change the security policy on this machine.
295
Managing the Machine
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data
3S2W-054
Machine settings data can be saved on your computer (export). Data that is saved on your computer can also be
registered in the machine (import). Data exported from this machine can be imported to another machine of the
same model. So you can easily copy a variety of settings data to multiple machines. To use these features, it is
required that you have logged in to System Manager Mode.
Exporting the Setting Data(P. 296)
Importing the Setting Data(P. 297)
Do not turn OFF the machine until the import or export process is complete
● It may take a few minutes to complete the process. If the machine is turned OFF during the process, it may
result in damage to data or the machine.
Do not operate the machine during the import or export process
● Before importing/exporting, check that no operation such as printing documents is currently proceeding.
● For the settings that cannot be imported/exported, see
Setting Menu List(P. 305) .
● You can also import/export settings data via a USB memory device by using the operation panel of the
machine. <Import/Export>(P. 438)
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 288) .
Exporting the Setting Data
You can export machine settings data, and save them on a computer. It is recommended that you regularly back up
important settings.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Data Management]
4
Select the settings to export, and specify the encryption password.
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Export].
296
Managing the Machine
[Settings/Registration]
Select the check box to export machine settings data.
[Application Library Settings Information]
Select the check box to export the Application Library settings data.
[Encryption Password]
Enter a password to encrypt the export data using alphanumeric characters. Enter the same password in
[Confirm]. To export the data, you must set an encryption password.
● The black and white LCD model does not display [Settings/Registration]/[Application Library Settings
Information]. The various machine settings are exported.
● The password is required when exported data is imported.
5
6
Importing the Setting Data(P. 297)
Click [Start Exporting].
Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the location where to save the exported
data.
➠ The setting data will be saved.
Importing the Setting Data
Load (import) data that was exported from the machine. You can also import machine settings data from another
machine to your machine if the models are the same.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 279)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Data Management]
4
Specify the file, enter the password, and select the settings to import.
Remote UI Screen(P. 280)
[Import].
297
Managing the Machine
[File Path]
Click [Browse] and select the file. You can only import a device configuration information file (*.dcm).
[Decryption Password]
Enter the password set when the settings were exported.
[Settings/Registration]
Select the check box to import machine settings data.
[Application Library Settings Information]
Select the check box to import the Application Library settings data.
● The black and white LCD model does not display [Settings/Registration]/[Application Library Settings
Information]. The various machine settings are imported.
5
Click [Start Importing].
6
Click [OK].
➠ The selected settings data is loaded into the machine.
7
Click [OK].
➠ If the [Settings/Registration] check box is selected in step 4, the machine automatically restarts.
298
Managing the Machine
Updating the Firmware
3S2W-055
For the firmware, select the method of update depending on the installation condition of the machine. There are two
methods of update: the one is to access the latest firmware version on the Internet from the machine and perform the
update if the version currently installed in the machine is not the latest, and the other is to access the latest firmware
version on the Internet from a computer and perform the update from the computer if the version currently installed
in the machine is not the latest. In an environment where connection to the Internet cannot be established via a
wireless LAN, establish connection via a wired LAN or USB and perform the update from the computer.
Installation Condition of the Machine
How to Install the Update
Wireless LAN connection
Updating via the Internet(P. 299)
Wired LAN connection
Updating via the Internet(P. 299)
Updating from a Computer(P. 300)
USB connection
Updating from a Computer(P. 300)
● If you are in an IPv6 environment, you cannot perform firmware update. Use USB to re-establish connection,
and perform the update from the computer.
Checking the firmware version
● You can check the firmware version from the operation panel of the machine. After completion of the
firmware update operation, make sure that the update was performed correctly. Checking the Firmware
Version(P. 301)
Updating via the Internet
You can access the Canon server from the machine to update the firmware to the latest version.
◼ Touch Panel Model
1
Select <Update Firmware> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 108)
➠ A check for existence of the latest firmware is performed.
● If the <This is the latest firmware version.> message is displayed, there is no need to update the
firmware.
2
When a license screen appears, select <Accept>.
299
Managing the Machine
3
Select <OK>.
➠ When the firmware update is complete, the machine restarts automatically.
● Do not turn OFF the machine while the restart is in progress.
◼ Black and White LCD Model
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Management Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 108)
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
3
Select <Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware>
4
Select <Via Internet>.
<Update Firmware>.
➠ A check for existence of the latest firmware is performed.
● If the <This is the latest firmware version.> message is displayed, there is no need to update the firmware.
5
Check the message and select <Yes>.
6
When a license screen appears, press
7
Select <OK>.
.
➠ When the firmware update is complete, the machine restarts automatically.
● Do not turn OFF the machine while the restart is in progress.
Updating from a Computer
When you have downloaded the latest firmware version from the Canon website, use "User Support Tool" utility
software to update the firmware from a computer. For how to perform firmware update from a computer, see the
"User Support Tool Operation Guide" included with the firmware.
300
Managing the Machine
To Put the Machine into a Firmware Update Waiting State
<Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update
Firmware> <Update Firmware> <Via PC> <Yes>
Checking the Firmware Version
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Management Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 108)
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
4
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
Select <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware>
Firmware>.
Select <Version Information>.
➠ The current firmware version is displayed.
301
<Update
Managing the Machine
Initializing Settings
3S2W-056
You can restore the following settings:
Initializing Menu(P. 302)
Initializing Key and Certificate(P. 302)
Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 303)
Initializing Menu
You can restore the settings of the machine ( Setting Menu List(P. 305) ). Depending on the settings selected, you
may need to restart the machine after initialization.
<Menu>
<Management Settings>
you want to initialize
<Yes>
<Data Management>
<Initialize Menu>
Select the item
(Restart the machine if necessary)
● You can restore the settings only for <Network> in <Preferences>.
Touch Panel Model
<Menu>
machine
<Preferences>
<Network>
<Initialize Network Settings>
<Yes>
<OK>
Restart the
<Initialize Network Settings>
<Yes>
Restart the machine
Black and White LCD Model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Network>
Initializing Key and Certificate
You can restore the settings of the key and certificate and the CA certificate. Note that all the keys and certificates and
CA certificates that you registered in the machine (except the preinstalled keys and CA certificates) will be deleted after
initializing.
● After initializing, functions that require a key and certificate such as TLS encrypted communication and IKE
of IPSec communication are not available. To use these functions, configure the settings for the key and
certificate and activate the functions again.
302
Managing the Machine
<Menu>
<Management Settings>
Certificate>
<Data Management>
<Initialize Key and
<Yes>
Initializing All Data/Settings
This enables restoration of all data and machine settings, including logs, to the factory default values. This prevents
sensitive data from being leaked when replacing or disposing of the machine. When the initialization process finishes,
the machine automatically restarts.
● Before initializing, make sure that there are no documents being processed or waiting to be processed.
These documents will be deleted when initialization is performed.
● To use the machine after initializing it, you need to configure all settings from the beginning.
<Menu>
<Management Settings>
<Initialize All Data/Settings>
LINKS
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 248)
303
<Yes> (
)
<Yes>
Setting Menu List
Setting Menu List
Setting Menu List ........................................................................................................................................... 305
<Preferences> .................................................................................................................................................... 306
<Display Settings> ........................................................................................................................................ 307
<English Keyboard Layout> .......................................................................................................................... 312
<Timer/Energy Settings> .............................................................................................................................. 313
<Network> .................................................................................................................................................... 320
<External Interface> ..................................................................................................................................... 341
<Accessibility> .............................................................................................................................................. 342
<Volume Settings> ........................................................................................................................................ 345
<Adjustment/Maintenance> ............................................................................................................................. 347
<Adjust Image Quality> ................................................................................................................................ 348
<Maintenance> ............................................................................................................................................. 362
<Function Settings> .......................................................................................................................................... 364
<Common> ................................................................................................................................................... 365
<Printer> ...................................................................................................................................................... 369
<Receive> ..................................................................................................................................................... 416
<Access Files> ............................................................................................................................................... 418
<Secure Print> .............................................................................................................................................. 428
<Management Settings> ................................................................................................................................... 429
<User Management> .................................................................................................................................... 430
<Device Management> ................................................................................................................................. 432
<License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> ........................................................................... 436
<Data Management> .................................................................................................................................... 438
<Security Settings> ....................................................................................................................................... 440
304
Setting Menu List
Setting Menu List
3S2W-057
You can customize the machine based on your environment and needs by configuring settings described in this
chapter. To start configuration, select <Menu> on the Home screen ( Home Screen(P. 108) ). This section describes
what each item in the setting menu can configure.
<Preferences>(P. 306)
This section describes the display and network settings.
<Adjustment/Maintenance>(P. 347) This section describes how to adjust print image quality and the cleaning functions of the
machine.
<Function Settings>(P. 364)
This section describes the settings for the individual functions.
<Management Settings>(P. 429)
This section describes the user and hardware information management, security
settings, etc.
● You can print the setting menu in list form to check the current settings:
Settings(P. 467)
305
Printing Lists of
Setting Menu List
<Preferences>
3S2W-058
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
Item
<Display Settings>(P. 307)
Description
This section describes the settings related to viewing of the display.
<English Keyboard Layout>(P. 312) This section describes the USB keyboard settings.
<Timer/Energy Settings>(P. 313)
This section describes the timer settings and energy settings.
<Network>(P. 320)
This section describes the network settings.
<External Interface>(P. 341)
This section describes the USB settings and other relevant settings.
<Accessibility>(P. 342)
This section describes settings for improving accessibility, such as inverting the screen
colors and setting the message display time.
<Volume Settings>(P. 345) *
This section describes the sound volume settings.
306
Setting Menu List
<Display Settings>
3S2W-059
All the settings related to viewing of the display are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger
( ).
<Default Screen After Startup/Restoration>(P. 307)
<Home Screen Button Display Settings>/<Button Display Order on Home Screen>(P. 307)
<Language>(P. 307)
<Remote UI Language>(P. 308)
<Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch>(P. 309)
<Display Timing for Cart. Prep.>/<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>(P. 309)
<Show Warnings>(P. 310)
<Action When Warning>(P. 311)
<Display IP Address>(P. 311)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with "*1" cannot be imported or exported.
● Settings marked with "*2" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country
or region.
<Default Screen After Startup/Restoration>
By default, the Home screen is displayed immediately after the machine is turned ON or when the Auto Reset function
is performed. Specify the setting to change the default screen and display the main screen of a different function.
<Home>
<Secure Print>
<Status Monitor>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
Restoration>
<Display Settings>
<Default Screen After Startup/
Select a function to display the desired screen
<Home Screen Button Display Settings>/<Button Display Order on Home
Screen> *1
Configure the settings for the buttons displayed in the Home screen.
<Language> *2
Select the display language used for the display, reports, and lists.
307
Customizing the Home Screen(P. 159)
Setting Menu List
<Català>
<Čeština>
<Dansk>
<Deutsch>
<Eesti>
<English>
<Español>
<Euskara>
<Français>
<Hrvatski>
<Italiano>
<Latviešu>
<Lietuvių>
<Magyar>
<Nederlands>
<Norsk>
<Polski>
<Português>
<Română>
<Slovenčina>
<Slovenščina>
<Suomi>
<Svenska>
<Türkçe>
<Ελληνικά>
<Български>
<Русский>
<‫>العربية‬
<日本語>
<中文(繁體)>
<中文(简体)>
<한국어>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
<Remote UI Language> *2
Select the display language used for the Remote UI screens.
<English>
<Japanese>
<French>
<Spanish>
<German>
<Italian>
<Dutch>
<Finnish>
<Portuguese>
<Norwegian>
<Swedish>
308
<Language>
Select a language
<Yes>
Setting Menu List
<Danish>
<Czech>
<Hungarian>
<Russian>
<Turkish>
<Polish>
<Chinese (Simplified)>
<Chinese (Traditional)>
<Korean>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
<Remote UI Language>
Select a
language
<Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch>
Select the unit of measurement.
<Millimeter>
<Inch>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
<Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch>
Select
<Millimeter> or <Inch>
<Display Timing for Cart. Prep.>/<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>
Set the display timing for the message notifying you that the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is low.
Touch panel model
<Auto>
<Off>
<Custom>
<On>
Black and white LCD model
<Auto>
<Custom>
Touch panel model
309
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Auto>
<Display Settings>
Enter toner level in <Custom>
<Display Timing for Cart. Prep.>
Select <Off> in
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Custom>
<Display Settings>
<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>
Enter toner level
<Show Warnings>
Specify whether to display a message telling that the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is low.
Touch panel model
<Off>
<On>
Black and white LCD model
<Low Cartridge Level>
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<On>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
<Show Warnings>
Select <Off> or
<Display Settings>
<Show Warnings>
<Low Cartridge
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
Level>
<Preferences>
Select <Off> or <On>
● When <Action When Warning> is set to <Stop Printing>, you cannot set this item to <Off>.
● When <Continue Print. When Cart. Low>/<Continue Print. When Amount in Cart. Low> is set to <Off>, the
message will appear even if you set this item to <Off>.
<Continue Print. When Cart. Low>/<Continue
Print. When Amount in Cart. Low>(P. 416)
310
Setting Menu List
<Action When Warning>
Specify whether to continue printing when the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is low.
<Low Cartridge Level>
<Continue Printing>
<Stop Printing>
Touch panel model
<Menu>
Level>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
<Action When Warning>
Select <Continue Printing> or <Stop Printing>
<Apply>
<Low Cartridge
<Yes>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
Level>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
<Action When Warning>
<Low Cartridge
Select <Continue Printing> or <Stop Printing>
● If you change the setting of this item from <Continue Printing> to <Stop Printing>, <Show Warnings> is set
to <On>.
<Display IP Address>
Specify whether to display the machine's IPv4 address on the <Status Monitor> screen.
Screen(P. 111)
<Status Monitor>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
<On>
311
<Display IP Address>
Select <Off> or
Setting Menu List
<English Keyboard Layout>
3S2W-05A
Specify the layout of an USB keyboard if connected to the machine. The default setting is marked with a dagger ( ).
<USA Layout>
<UK Layout>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<English Keyboard Layout>
312
Select <USA Layout> or <UK Layout>
Setting Menu List
<Timer/Energy Settings>
3S2W-05C
All the settings related to the timer and energy are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger
( ).
<Current Date/Time Settings>(P. 313)
<Date/Time Settings>(P. 314)
<Date Format>(P. 314)
<Time Format>(P. 315)
<Auto Reset Time>(P. 315)
<Function After Auto Reset>(P. 316)
<Auto Shutdown Time>(P. 316)
<Auto Sleep Time>(P. 317)
<Auto Sleep Daily Timer>(P. 317)
<Time Set. for Auto Adjust Grad.>/<Time Settings for Auto Adjust Gradation>(P. 318)
<Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings>(P. 318)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with "*1" cannot be imported or exported.
● Settings marked with "*2" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country
or region.
● Settings marked with "*3" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items.
<Current Date/Time Settings> *1
Set the current date and time.
Setting the Date/Time(P. 21)
● Set <Time Zone> before setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed, the current
date and time are also changed accordingly.
● The current date and time cannot be changed for 1 hour after daylight saving time is in effect.
313
Setting Menu List
<Date/Time Settings>
Specify the date and time standard of the region in which the machine is to be installed.
<Time Zone>
Select the time zone. If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also
changed accordingly. Setting the Date/Time(P. 21)
<(UTC-12:00) International Date Line West> to <(UTC) Coordinated Universal Time>
to <(UTC+14:00)
Kiritimati Island>
UTC
● Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks
and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required for Internet communications.
<Daylight Saving Time Settings> *2
Enable or disable daylight saving time. If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to
which daylight saving time is in effect.
<Off>
<On>
Start: Month, Week, Day
End: Month, Week, Day
<Menu>
<Preferences>
Time Settings>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
Select <On>, and specify the dates
<Date/Time Settings>
<Daylight Saving
<Apply>
<Date Format> *2
Select the date format (order of year, month, and day).
<YYYY MM/DD>
<MM/DD/YYYY>
<DD/MM YYYY>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
314
<Date Format>
Select the date format
Setting Menu List
<Time Format>
Select the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.
<12 Hour (AM/PM)>
<24 Hour>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Time Format>
Select the display
setting
<Auto Reset Time>
If a key is not pressed for a specified period of time, the screen and the settings are initialized to display the
default screen (Auto Reset). Specify the interval at which the Auto Reset is performed. The Auto Reset is not
performed in the following cases:
● The setting menu is displayed.
● The machine is processing data, such as when printing documents.
● An error message is displayed and the Error indicator is blinking (However, Auto Reset is performed when the
error does not prevent the user from continuing to use a function.)
Touch panel model
<Set This Function>
<Off>
<On>
<Set Time>
1 to 2
to 9 (min.)
Black and white LCD model
0 (Auto Reset is disabled.)
1 to 2 to 9 (min.)
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
This Function>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
Enter the time in <Set Time>
Black and white LCD model
315
<Auto Reset Time>
<Apply>
Select <On> in <Set
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Auto Reset Time>
Specify the Auto
Reset time
● The screen displayed after the Auto Reset is performed can be selected in <Function After Auto Reset>.
<Function After Auto Reset>
Select whether to return the display to the default screen after the Auto Reset is performed. If <Default Function> is
selected, the main screen of the function selected in <Default Screen After Startup/Restoration> is displayed (
<Default Screen After Startup/Restoration>(P. 307) ). If <Selected Function> is selected, the display returns to the
main screen of the function that was selected.
<Default Function>
<Selected Function>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Function After Auto Reset>
Select
<Default Function> or <Selected Function>
<Auto Shutdown Time>
Set a timer to automatically shut down the machine after a specified period of idle time has elapsed since the
machine entered the sleep mode.
Touch panel model
<Set This Function>
<Off>
<On>
<Set Time>
1 to 4
to 8 (hr.)
Black and white LCD model
0 (Auto Shutdown is disabled.)
1 to 4 to 8 (hr.)
Touch panel model
316
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Preferences>
set the Auto Shutdown time
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Auto Shutdown Time>
Select <On>, and
<Auto Shutdown Time>
Set the Auto
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
Shutdown time
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Apply>
Before setting <Auto Shutdown Time>
● When the <Auto Shutdown Time> setting is enabled, the machine may automatically shut down even if you
are operating the machine from the Remote UI. A malfunction may occur, particularly if the machine shuts
down while data is being imported. When you import data using the Remote UI, set <Auto Shutdown Time>
to <Off> or <0> in advance.
● If any settings of the [Timer Settings] are changed from the Remote UI while the machine is in the sleep
mode, the timer for the <Auto Shutdown Time> setting is reset to the beginning. The machine automatically
shuts down after a specified period of idle time has elapsed since the timer was reset.
<Auto Sleep Time>
If the machine has not been operated or has had no data to process for a specified period of time, the machine enters
sleep mode to save energy consumption (Auto Sleep). Specify the period of time after which auto sleep is performed.
Auto Sleep is not performed when the setting menu is displayed. We recommend using the factory default settings to
save the most power. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 163)
1
to 60 (min.)
<Auto Sleep Daily Timer>
You can specify the time when the machine is automatically set to the sleep mode.
Touch panel model
<Set This Function>
<Off>
<On>
(0:00 to 12:59 AM/PM)
Black and white LCD model
<Off>
317
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 163)
Setting Menu List
<On>
(0:00 to 23:59)
<Time Set. for Auto Adjust Grad.>/<Time Settings for Auto Adjust Gradation>
The automatic gradation adjustment (quick adjustment) can be performed at a specified time every day. Set the time
to automatically perform quick adjustment in this option.
Touch panel model
<Set This Function>
<Off>
<On>
(0:00 to 12:59 AM/PM)
Black and white LCD model
<Off>
<On>
(0:00 to 23:59)
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<On> in <Set This Function>, and enter the time
<Time Set. for Auto Adjust Grad.>
Select
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<On>
<Preferences>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Time Settings for Auto Adjust Gradation>
Enter the time
<Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings>
Specify the time when the machine is recovered from the sleep mode.
Touch panel model
<Set This Function>
<Off>
<On>
(0:00 to 12:59 AM/PM)
Black and white LCD model
<Off>
<On>
318
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 163)
Setting Menu List
(0:00 to 23:59)
319
Setting Menu List
<Network>
3S2W-05E
All the settings related to the network are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<Select Wired/Wireless LAN>(P. 320)
<Wireless LAN Settings>(P. 320)
<Direct Connection Settings>(P. 322)
<Easy Connection via PC>(P. 324)
<TCP/IP Settings>(P. 324)
<SNMP Settings>(P. 333)
<Use Dedicated Port>/<Dedicated Port Settings>(P. 335)
<Dedicated Port Auth. Method>/<Dedicated Port Authentication Method>(P. 336)
<Wait Time for Conn. at Startup>/<Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>(P. 336)
<Ethernet Driver Settings>(P. 336)
<Use IEEE 802.1X>/<IEEE 802.1X Settings>(P. 337)
<Firewall Settings>(P. 337)
<Google Cloud Print Settings>(P. 339)
<Device Settings Management>/<Device Settings Management On/Off>(P. 339)
<Monitoring Service>(P. 339)
<RMT-SW>(P. 339)
<Initialize Network Settings>(P. 340)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with "*1" cannot be imported or exported.
● Settings marked with "*2" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items.
<Select Wired/Wireless LAN>
When switching the machine from Wireless LAN to Wired LAN, you need to specify the setting. Conversely, when
switching the machine from Wired LAN to Wireless LAN, you do not need to specify this setting (You can switch using
the following <Wireless LAN Settings>). Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 25)
<Wired LAN>
<Wireless LAN>
<Wireless LAN Settings>
Specify settings for connecting the machine to a wireless LAN. You can also view the current settings or specify the
setting for saving power consumption.
<SSID Settings>
Select to configure a wireless connection by specifying information including an SSID or a network key by
inputting manually from the operation panel.
320
Setting Menu List
<Select Access Point>
Wireless LAN routers that can access the machine are automatically located, so you can select from the list.
You must manually enter a network key, such as a WEP key or a PSK. Setting Up Connection by Selecting
a Wireless Router(P. 33)
<Enter Manually>
Select to configure a wireless connection by manually entering an SSID. By using this method, you can specify
authentication and encryption settings in detail. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed
Settings(P. 36)
<Security Settings>
<None>
<WEP>
<Open System>
WEP Key 1 to 4
<Shared Key>
WEP Key 1 to 4
<WPA/WPA2-PSK>
<Auto>
<AES-CCMP>
<WPS Push Button Mode>
Select to automatically configure a wireless connection by using the button on a WPS wireless router.
Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 29)
Setting
<WPS PIN Code Mode>
Select to configure a wireless connection by entering a PIN code for a WPS wireless router.
Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 31)
Setting Up
<Power Save Mode>
Select whether or not the machine enters Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
message
<Preferences>
<OK>
<Network>
<Power Save Mode>
<Wireless LAN Settings>
Read the displayed
Select <Off> or <On>
<Connection Information>/<Wireless LAN Information> *1
Select to view the current wireless LAN settings.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 47)
<MAC Address>
<Wireless LAN Status>
<Latest Error Information>
<Channel>
<SSID Settings>
<Security Settings>
<Power Save Mode>
321
Setting Menu List
<Direct Connection Settings>
Set whether to connect directly. By enabling this function, connecting directly with the machine is possible even in an
environment without an access point or wireless LAN router. Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 204)
<Use Direct Connection>
<Off>
<On>
<Direct Connection Termination>/<Time Until Direct Connection Termination>
Specify the time to automatically disconnect after Direct Connection is established.
Touch panel model
<Automatically Terminate Session>
<Off>
<On>
<Time Until Session Terminates>
1
to 60 (min.)
Black and white LCD model
0 (Do not terminate session automatically)
1 to 60 (min.)
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> <Direct Connection
Termination> Select <On> in <Automatically Terminate Session> and enter the time <Apply>
<Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
Connection Termination>
<Network>
<Direct Connection Settings>
<Time Until Direct
Enter the time
<Access Point Mode Settings>
Configure the SSID/network key arbitrarily. If you want to connect multiple mobile devices to the machine at the
same time, you need to configure both SSID and network key arbitrarily.
<Use Custom SSID>
<Off>
<On>
<SSID>
<Use Custom Network Key>
322
Setting Menu List
<Off>
<On>
<Network Key>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings>
Settings> Select <On> for each item and select <SSID>/<Network Key>
key <Apply> <Apply> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
<Access Point Mode
Enter the SSID/network
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> <Access Point Mode
Settings> <Use Custom SSID>/<Use Custom Network Key> <On> Enter the SSID/network
key
<Apply>
<Keep Enabled If SSID/Ntwk Key Spcfd> *2
Specify whether to keep the machine waiting for Direct Connection.
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network>
Ntwk Key Spcfd> Select <Off> or <On>
<Direct Connection Settings> <Keep Enabled If SSID/
<Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network>
Ntwk Key Spcfd> Select <Off> or <On>
<Direct Connection Settings>
Restart the machine
<Keep Enabled If SSID/
● When setting this item to <On>, configure in advance a custom SSID or network key using <Access
Point Mode Settings>.
<Config. IP Address For Direct Conn.>
Manually enter the machine's IP address at the time of Direct Connection.
192.168.22.1
323
Setting Menu List
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> <Config. IP Address For
Direct Conn.> Enter an arbitrary IP address <Apply> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
Direct Conn.>
<Network>
<Direct Connection Settings>
<Config. IP Address For
Enter an arbitrary IP address
<Easy Connection via PC>
Start the procedure for Easy Connection via PC (cableless setup mode). You can use Canon Laser NW Device Setup
Utility to configure network settings via a computer.
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Network>
<Easy Connection via PC>
<Yes> (
)
The
connection process starts
● Download Canon Laser NW Device Setup Utility from the Canon website (https://global.canon).
<TCP/IP Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in a TCP/IP network, such as IP address settings.
<IPv4 Settings>/<IPv6 Settings>/<DNS Settings> (Touch panel model)
<IPv4 Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network.
<IP Address Settings>
Configure the IP address, which is used for identifying devices, such as computers and printers, on a
TCP/IP network. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
<Auto Acquire>
<Auto Acquire>
<Off>
<On>
<Select Protocol>
<Off>
<DHCP>
<Auto IP>
324
Setting Menu List
<Off>
<On>
<Manually Acquire> *2
<IP Address>: 0.0.0.0
<Subnet Mask>: 0.0.0.0
<Gateway Address>: 0.0.0.0
<Check Settings>
<DHCP Option Settings>
If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquire the
DNS server address or the domain name. Configuring DNS(P. 65)
<Acquire Host Name>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire DNS Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire Domain Name>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire WINS Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire POP Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<PING Command>
Select to check that the machine is connected to a computer over a network.
Connection(P. 43)
Testing the Network
<IPv6 Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv6 network.
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 44)
<Use IPv6>
<Off>
<On>
<Check IPv6 Settings>
You can check the link-local address that is automatically acquired.
<Stateless Address Settings>
Enable or disable stateless addresses.
325
Setting Menu List
<Stateless Address Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<Check Settings>
<Stateless Address>
<Prefix Length>
<DHCPv6 Settings>
Enable or disable the stateful address that is acquired via DHCPv6.
<Use DHCPv6>
<Off>
<On>
<Check Settings>
<Stateful Address>
<Prefix Length>
<DHCP Option Settings>
If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquire the
DNS server address or the domain name. Configuring DNS(P. 65)
<Acquire DNS Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire Domain Name>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Settings>
Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.
Configuring DNS(P. 65)
<IPv4 DNS Server Address Settings>
Specify the IP address of the DNS server in the IPv4 environment.
<Primary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0
<Secondary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0
<DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings>
Specify the host name of the machine to be registered in the DNS server as well as the name of the
domain to which the machine belongs.
<IPv4>
<Host Name>
<Domain Name>
<IPv6>
<Use IPv4 Host/Domain>
<Off>
<Host Name>
<Domain Name>
326
Setting Menu List
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update Settings>
Select whether to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is changed.
<IPv4>
<DNS Dynamic Update>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update Interval>
0 to 24
to 48 (hr.)
<IPv6>
<DNS Dynamic Update>
<Off>
<On>
<Register Manual Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Register Stateful Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Register Stateless Address>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update Interval>
0 to 24
to 48 (hr.)
<mDNS Settings>
Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers.
<IPv4>
<Use mDNS>
<Off>
<On>
<mDNS Name>
<IPv6>
<Use mDNS>
<Off>
<On>
<Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4>
<Off>
<mDNS Name>
<On>
327
Setting Menu List
<IPv4 Settings>/<IPv6 Settings> (Black and white LCD model)
<IPv4 Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network.
<IP Address Settings>
Configure the IP address, which is used for identifying devices, such as computers and printers, on a
TCP/IP network. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
<Auto Acquire>
<Select Protocol>
<Off>
<DHCP>
<Auto IP>
<Off>
<On>
<Manually Acquire> *2
<IP Address>: 0.0.0.0
<Subnet Mask>: 0.0.0.0
<Gateway Address>: 0.0.0.0
<Check Settings>
<Auto Acquire>*2
<Select Protocol>*2
<Auto IP>*2
<IP Address>
<Subnet Mask>
<Gateway Address>
<PING Command>
Select to check that the machine is connected to a computer over a network.
Connection(P. 43)
Testing the Network
<DNS Settings>
Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.
Configuring DNS(P. 65)
<DNS Server Settings>
<Primary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0
<Secondary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0
<DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings>
<Host Name>
<Domain Name>
<DNS Dynamic Update Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dyn. Updt. Intrvl.>
0 to 24
to 48 (hr.)
<mDNS Settings>
Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers.
328
Configuring DNS(P. 65)
Setting Menu List
<Off>
<On>
<mDNS Name>
<DHCP Option Settings>
If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquire the
DNS server address or the domain name. Configuring DNS(P. 65)
<Acquire Host Name>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire DNS Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire Domain Name>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire WINS Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire POP Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<IPv6 Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv6 network.
<Use IPv6>
Enable or disable IPv6 in the machine. You can also view the current settings.
Addresses(P. 44)
<Off>
<On>
<Check Settings>
<Link-Local Address>
<Prefix Length>
<Stateless Address Settings>
Enable or disable stateless addresses.
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 44)
<Off>
<On>
329
Setting IPv6
Setting Menu List
<Check Settings>
<Stateless Address>
<Prefix Length>
<Use DHCPv6>
Enable or disable the stateful address that is acquired via DHCPv6.
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 44)
<Off>
<On>
<Check Settings>
<Stateful Address>
<Prefix Length>
<DNS Settings>
Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.
Configuring DNS(P. 65)
<DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings>
<Use IPv4 Host/Domain>
<Off>
<Host Name>
<Domain Name>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<Regist. Manual Addr.>
<Off>
<On>
<Regist. Stateful Addr.>
<Off>
<On>
<Regist Stateless Addr.>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update Interval>
0 to 24
to 48 (hr.)
<mDNS Settings>
Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers.
<Off>
<On>
<Use IPv4 Name for mDNS>
<Off>
<mDNS Name>
<On>
330
Configuring DNS(P. 65)
Setting Menu List
<DHCP Option Settings>
If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquire the
DNS server address or the domain name. Configuring DNS(P. 65)
<Acquire DNS Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire Domain Name>
<Off>
<On>
<WINS Settings>
Specify settings for Windows Internet Name Service (WINS), which provides a NetBIOS name for IP address
resolutions in a mixed network environment of NetBIOS and TCP/IP. Configuring WINS(P. 71)
<WINS Resolution>
<Off>
<On>
<WINS Server Address>: 0.0.0.0
<LPD Settings>
Enable or disable LPD, a printing protocol that can be used on any hardware platform or operating system. You
can also set the reception timeout period after which printing is canceled if print data reception is interrupted.
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 51)
<Use LPD Printing>/<LPD Print Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<RX Timeout>
1 to 5 to 60 (min.)
<RAW Settings>
Enable or disable RAW, a Windows specific printing protocol. You can also set the reception timeout period after
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD
which printing is canceled if print data reception is interrupted.
Functions(P. 51)
<Use RAW Printing>/<RAW Print Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<RX Timeout>
1 to 5 to 60 (min.)
<WSD Settings>
Enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the printer by using the WSD protocol.
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 51)
Touch panel model
<Use WSD Printing>
331
Setting Menu List
<Off>
<On>
<Use WSD Browsing>
<Off>
<On>
<Use Multicast Discovery>
<Off>
<On>
Black and white LCD model
<WSD Print Settings>
<Use WSD Print>
<Off>
<On>
<Use WSD Browsing>
<Off>
<On>
<Use Multicast Discovery>
<Off>
<On>
<Use HTTP>
Enable or disable HTTP, which is required for communications with a computer, such as when using the Remote
UI, WSD printing, or printing with Google Cloud Print. Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 275)
<Off>
<On>
<Use IPSec> *1
Select whether to perform encrypted communication by establishing a virtual private network (VPN) via IPSec.
Configuring IPSec Settings(P. 259)
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network>
<On> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
332
<TCP/IP Settings>
<Use IPSec>
Select <Off> or
Setting Menu List
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network>
<On> Restart the machine
<TCP/IP Settings>
<Use IPSec>
Select <Off> or
<Port Number Settings>
Change port numbers for protocols according to the network environment.
<LPD>
1 to 515
Changing Port Numbers(P. 245)
to 65535
<RAW>
1 to 9100
to 65535
<WSD Multicast Discovery>
1 to 3702 to 65535
<HTTP>
1 to 80
to 65535
<Multicast Discovery>
1 to 427 to 65535
<POP3>
1 to 110
to 65535
<SNMP>
1 to 161
to 65535
<MTU Size>
Select the maximum size of packets the machine sends or receives.
Unit(P. 63)
Changing the Maximum Transmission
<1300>
<1400>
<1500>
<SNMP Settings>
Specify the settings for monitoring and controlling the machine from a computer running SNMP-compatible software.
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 73)
<SNMPv1 Settings>
Enable or disable SNMPv1. When enabling SNMPv1, specify a community name and access privileges to
Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
333
Setting Menu List
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings>
Settings> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Select <Off> or <On> in <SNMPv1
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
or <On>
<Preferences> <Network>
Restart the machine
<SNMP Settings>
<SNMPv1 Settings>
Select <Off>
<SNMPv3 Settings>
Enable or disable SNMPv3. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed settings that are applied when SNMPv3 is
enabled.
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings>
Settings> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Select <Off> or <On> in <SNMPv3
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
or <On>
<Preferences> <Network>
Restart the machine
<SNMP Settings>
<SNMPv3 Settings>
Select <Off>
<Acquire Printer Mngt. Info. from Host>
Enable or disable the monitoring of printer management information from a networked computer running
SNMP-compatible software.
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings> Select <Off> or <On> in <Acquire
Printer Mngt. Info. from Host> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
334
Setting Menu List
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings>
Host> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
<Acquire Printer Mngt. Info. from
<Format Host Rsrcs. MIB to RFC2790>
Specify whether to conform to the advanced specifications (RFC2790) of the protocol when monitoring the
machine status from the SNMP-compatible software.
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network>
Host Rsrcs. MIB to RFC2790> <Apply>
<SNMP Settings> Select <Off> or <On> in <Format
<OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings>
RFC2790> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
<Format Host Resources MIB to
<Use Dedicated Port>/<Dedicated Port Settings>
Enable or disable the dedicated port. The dedicated port is used when printing from the computer and when browsing
or specifying the machine settings over the network.
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network>
<OK> Restart the machine
<Use Dedicated Port>
Select <Off> or <On>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Preferences>
Restart the machine
<Network>
335
<Dedicated Port Settings>
Select <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
<Dedicated Port Auth. Method>/<Dedicated Port Authentication Method>
Specify whether to limit the authentication method specifically to the secure one when using the dedicated port. If
<Mode 2> is selected, the authentication method is limited specifically to the secure one.
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
Authentication Method>
<Network>
<Dedicated Port Auth. Method>/<Dedicated Port
Select <Mode 1> or <Mode 2>
● If <Mode 2> is selected, you cannot establish a connection from the device management software or driver
in some cases.
<Wait Time for Conn. at Startup>/<Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>
Specify a wait time for connecting to a network. Select the setting depending on the network environment.
Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 64)
0
Setting a
to 300 (sec.)
<Ethernet Driver Settings>
Select the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T) and the communication mode of Ethernet (half-duplex/
full-duplex). You can also view the MAC address for wired LAN.
<Auto Detect>
Select whether to automatically detect or manually select the communication mode and the Ethernet type.
Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 61)
<Off>
<Communication Mode>
<Half Duplex>
<Full Duplex>
<Ethernet Type>
<10BASE-T>
<100BASE-TX>
<1000BASE-T>
<On>
336
Setting Menu List
● When <Communication Mode> is set to <Half Duplex>, you cannot select <1000BASE-T>.
<MAC Address>
Check the MAC address of the machine, which is a number unique to each communication device.
the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 47)
Viewing
<Use IEEE 802.1X>/<IEEE 802.1X Settings> *1*2
Enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication.
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 266)
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<OK>
<Preferences> <Network>
Restart the machine
<Use IEEE 802.1X>
Select <Off> or <On>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Preferences>
the machine
<Network>
<IEEE 802.1X Settings>
Select <Off> or <On>
Restart
<Firewall Settings>
Without proper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are
connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet filter, a feature that
restricts communication to devices with specified IP addresses or MAC addresses.
<IPv4 Address Filter>
Enable or disable settings for filtering packets sent to or received from devices with specified IPv4 addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 239)
<Outbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
<Inbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
337
Setting Menu List
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings> <IPv4 Address Filter> Select
<Off> or <On> in <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings>
<Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>
<IPv4 Address Filter>
Restart the machine
Select
<IPv6 Address Filter>
Enable or disable settings for filtering packets sent to or received from devices with specified IPv6 addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 239)
<Outbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
<Inbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings> <IPv6 Address Filter> Select
<Off> or <On> in <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings>
<Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>
<IPv6 Address Filter>
Restart the machine
Select
<MAC Address Filter>
Enable or disable settings for filtering packets sent to or received from devices with specified MAC addresses.
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 242)
<Outbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
<Inbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
338
Setting Menu List
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings> <MAC Address Filter> Select
<Off> or <On> in <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings>
<Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>
<MAC Address Filter>
Restart the machine
Select
<Google Cloud Print Settings>
Enable or disable Google Cloud Print.
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 219)
<Use Google Cloud Print>/<Enable Google Cloud Print>
<Off>
<On>
<Google Cloud Print Regist. Status>/<Google Cloud Print Registration Status> *1
<Device Settings Management>/<Device Settings Management On/Off>
Specify whether to use iW Management Console plug-ins to manage machine data such as settings. For detailed
information on iW Management Console, contact your nearest Canon dealer. Configuring Settings for
Communication between the Machine and Plug-ins(P. 80)
<Off>
<On>
<Monitoring Service> *1*2
Enable communication with a remote monitoring server. Execution of this item enables information about the
machine to be periodically sent to the remote monitoring server connected to the machine.
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Network>
<Monitoring Service>
<Yes>
<RMT-SW>
Leave this switch set to <Off>. When the service representative remotely performs device maintenance, you may be
asked to set the switch to <On>.
<Off>
339
Setting Menu List
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu>
machine
<Preferences>
<Network>
<RMT-SW>
Select <Off> or <On>
<OK>
Restart the
<Network>
<RMT-SW>
Select <Off> or <On>
Restart the
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
machine
<Preferences>
<Initialize Network Settings>
Select to return the Network Settings to the factory defaults.
340
<Initialize Menu>(P. 439)
Setting Menu List
<External Interface>
3S2W-05F
All the settings related to the USB are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<USB Settings>
Specify whether to enable or disable use of the USB port or a USB memory device.
<Use as USB Device>
Enable or disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer.
Connection with a Computer(P. 273)
Restricting the USB
<Off>
<On>
<Use USB Storage Device>
Specify whether to use a USB memory device.
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <External Interface> <USB Settings>
USB Storage Device> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Select <Off> or <On> in <Use
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
Device>
<Preferences> <External Interface> <USB Settings>
Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
341
<Use USB Storage
Setting Menu List
<Accessibility>
3S2W-05H
All the settings related to accessibility, such as inverting the screen colors and message display time, are listed with
descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<Invert Screen Colors>(P. 342)
<Brightness>(P. 342)
<Contrast>(P. 343)
<Message Display Time>(P. 343)
<Scrolling Speed>(P. 343)
<Cursor Movement Type>(P. 343)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
<Invert Screen Colors>
Select <On> to invert the display colors. Select <On> if the display is hard to view even after the brightness was
adjusted in <Brightness>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Accessibility>
<Invert Screen Colors>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Brightness>
Adjust the brightness of the display to suit the installation location of the machine.
Five Levels
<Menu>
(
<Preferences>
<Accessibility>
)
342
<Brightness>
Adjust the brightness
<Apply>
Setting Menu List
<Contrast> *
Adjust the contrast (the difference between the light and dark parts) of the display to suit the installation location of
the machine.
Seven Levels
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Accessibility>
<Contrast>
Adjust the contrast
<Message Display Time>
Specify the interval in seconds at which two different messages are alternately displayed.
1 to 2
to 5 (sec.)
<Menu>
interval
<Preferences>
<Apply> (
<Accessibility>
<Message Display Time>
Enter a number for the
)
<Scrolling Speed> *
Adjust the scrolling speed of the screen by selecting from three levels.
<Slow>
<Standard>
<Fast>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Accessibility>
<Scrolling Speed>
Select the speed
<Cursor Movement Type> *
Configure how the cursor moves after a character is entered on the screen. If <Auto> is selected, the cursor
automatically moves to the next entry field after text has been entered. If <Manual> is selected, use
to move the
cursor.
<Auto>
<Manual>
343
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Accessibility>
<Manual>
344
<Cursor Movement Type>
Select <Auto> or
Setting Menu List
<Volume Settings>
3S2W-05J
All the settings used to generate the confirmation sound of a key being pressed, the sound indicating completion of
the printing process, and other sounds, are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<Entry Tone>(P. 345)
<Invalid Entry Tone>(P. 345)
<Restock Supplies Tone>(P. 345)
<Warning Tone>(P. 345)
<Job Done Tone>(P. 346)
<Energy Saver Alert>(P. 346)
● For information about the setting procedures, see
Setting Sounds(P. 162) .
<Entry Tone>
Select whether an entry tone is generated when a key on the operation panel has been pressed.
<Off>
<On>
<Invalid Entry Tone>
Select whether a tone is generated when an invalid key operation has been performed, for example, when an invalid
numeric value has been entered.
<Off>
<On>
<Restock Supplies Tone>
Select whether a tone is generated that indicates the end of toner cartridge lifetime is approaching.
<Off>
<On>
<Warning Tone>
Select whether to generate a tone telling that a trouble has occurred on the machine, such as a paper jam, incorrect
operation, or press of an inoperable key.
<Off>
<On>
345
Setting Menu List
<Job Done Tone>
Select whether a tone is generated when printing has been completed.
<Off>
<On>
<Energy Saver Alert>
Select whether to generate the notification tone when the machine enters or exits sleep mode.
<Off>
<On>
346
Setting Menu List
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
3S2W-05K
Item
Description
<Adjust Image Quality>(P. 348) This section describes how to adjust image quality for printing.
<Maintenance>(P. 362)
This section describes how to use the cleaning functions.
347
Setting Menu List
<Adjust Image Quality>
3S2W-05L
All the settings related to image quality adjustment are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a
dagger ( ).
<Auto Adjust Gradation>(P. 348)
<Auto Correction Settings>(P. 348)
<Correct Print Color Mismatch>(P. 349)
<Adjust Print Position>(P. 349)
<Special Processing>(P. 350)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
<Auto Adjust Gradation>
Adjust the gradation, density, and color in printouts.
Adjusting Gradation(P. 461)
<Quick Adjust>
<Auto Correction Settings>
Configure the settings to automatically perform a quick gradation adjustment or color mismatch correction.
<Auto Adjust Image Regularly>
Select when to make an automatic quick gradation adjustment. If <Off> is selected, quick adjustment is not
made automatically. You can also perform this adjustment manually ( Quick Adjust(P. 461) ).
<Off>
<When Turning Main Power ON>
<After Printing First Job>
<Menu>
Settings>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Auto Adjust Image Regularly>
<Auto Correction
Select <Off> or the adjustment timing
<Correct Print Color Mismatch>/<Timing for Correct Print Color Mismatch>
Select the timing at which the Correct Print Color Mismatch function is to be performed automatically after the
machine is turned ON. You can also perform this adjustment manually ( Correcting "Print Color
Mismatch"(P. 462) ).
<After Printing First Job>
<When Turning Main Power ON>
348
Setting Menu List
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Auto Correction
Settings> <Correct Print Color Mismatch>/<Timing for Correct Print Color Mismatch>
Select
<After Printing First Job> or <When Turning Main Power ON>
<Correct Print Color Mismatch>
Use this function if color shift has blurred the image.
Correcting "Print Color Mismatch"(P. 462)
<Adjust Print Position>
Adjust the print position for each paper source. The print position can be adjusted in the range from -5.0 mm to +5.0
mm in increments of 0.1 mm. Adjusting Print Position(P. 463)
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Vertically (Back Side)>*
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>*
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Drawer 1>
<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Vertically (Back Side)>*
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>*
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Drawer 2> *
<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Vertically (Back Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
349
Setting Menu List
<Special Processing>
If the print results on special types of paper are not satisfactory, the following settings may improve the quality of the
printouts.
<Special Paper Processing>
When printing on the back side of printed paper, rough paper, or envelopes, the print results may be improved
by adjusting the following settings.
<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>
If printouts on the back side of printed paper are too light, select <On>. You can specify this setting
separately for each paper source.
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 1>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 2> *
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>
<On> in the paper source to be set
<Apply>
Select
<Yes>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>
paper source
Select the
<On>
● If you set to <On>, image quality may be affected or a paper jam may occur when a certain length of time
elapses after printing on the front side or depending on the ambient humidity.
<Rough Surface Paper Mode>
When printing on rough paper, especially when color images are printed too light, select <On>. You can
specify the settings separately for each paper source.
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Off>
<On>
350
Setting Menu List
<Drawer 1>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 2> *
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Rough Surface Paper Mode> Select <On> in the
paper source to be set
<Apply>
<Yes>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Rough Surface Paper Mode> Select the paper
source
<On>
● If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower or image quality may be affected.
<Env. Flap Closing Prevention>/<Envelope Flap Closing Prevention>
If envelope flaps cling to the envelope bodies when printing, select <On>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Env. Flap Closing Prevention>/<Envelope Flap Closing
Prevention>
<On>
<Yes> (
)
● If you set to <On>, toner may not be fixed sufficiently, resulting in faded printouts.
<Paper Wrinkle Correction>
Printouts may wrinkle depending on the paper to use. In this case, setting this item may solve the problem.
The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than with <Mode 1>.
<Off>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
351
Setting Menu List
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Paper Wrinkle Correction> Select the
mode
<Yes> (
)
For LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
● This setting is effective for plain paper and thin paper.
● Setting a greater improvement effect may result in faded printouts or slower printing speed.
For LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw
● <Mode 1> is effective for envelopes, and <Mode 2>, for envelopes and thin paper.
● When <Mode 1> or <Mode 2> is specified, printed images may be blurry.
<Paper Curl Correction>
If the printed paper curls, set this item. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than with <Mode
1>. First try with <Mode 1>.
<Off>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Paper Curl Correction> Select the mode
(
<Yes>
)
● Setting a greater improvement effect may result in faded printouts or slower printing speed.
<Reduce Ppr. Sticking at Output>/<Reduce Paper Sticking at Output> *
When performing 2-sided printing in color, paper may stick together at the output. Setting to <On> will slow
down the printing speed of prints that may easily stick together, to reduce sticking.
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
<Off>
<On>
LBP623Cdw
<Off>
<On>
352
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Special Processing>
<Reduce Ppr. Sticking at Output>/<Reduce Paper Sticking at Output>
<On>
<Yes> (
)
<High Humidity Mode>
Print density may be uneven when the machine is used in an environment with high humidity. In this case,
setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Humidity Mode>
<On>
<Yes> (
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Special Processing>
<High
)
● If you set to <On> and use the machine in an environment with low humidity, printed images and text
may be blurry.
<Low Humidity Mode>
When using the machine in an environment with low humidity, printed images and text may be blurry. In this
case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Humidity Mode>
<On>
<Yes> (
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Special Processing>
<Low
)
● If you set to <On>, print density may be lower or uneven when the machine is used in an environment
with high humidity.
<Reduce Ghosting 1> *
If the printout reveals a ghost of an image in the same page, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
353
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Processing>
<Reduce Ghosting 1>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<On>
<Yes> (
<Special
)
● If you set to <On>, toner may not be fixed sufficiently, resulting in faded printouts.
<Reduce Ghosting 2>
If continuous printing involves generation of ghost images, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Processing>
<Reduce Ghosting 2>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<On>
<Yes> (
<Special
)
● If you set to <On>, print density may be uneven.
<Regularly Clean Fix. Assembly>/<Regularly Clean Fixing Assembly> *
If the fixing assembly is dirty, edges of the paper may get smudged. In this case, changing the setting of this
item may solve the problem. The higher level you specify, the higher frequency of regular cleaning is
performed.
<Auto>
<Level 1>
<Level 2>
<Level 3>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Processing> <Regularly Clean Fix. Assembly>/<Regularly Clean Fixing Assembly>
level
<Yes> (
)
● If a higher level is specified, the printing speed will be slower.
354
Select the
Setting Menu List
<Auto Clean Fixing Assembly> *
If the fixing assembly is dirty, edges or the back side of the paper may get smudged. You can configure to
perform automatic cleaning of the fixing assembly to prevent smudges. When <On> is specified, a sheet of
paper is output each time cleaning is performed. Configure so that paper feed is performed from the paper
source in which paper usable for cleaning is loaded.
<Off>
<On>
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 1>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 2>*
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Clean Fixing Assembly>
<On>
<On>
<Yes> (
<Adjust Image Quality>
)
<Special Processing>
<Auto
Set available paper sources to
<Apply>
● You can use the following paper for cleaning.
- Paper sizes: A4/Letter
- Paper types: Plain 1 to 3/Recycled 1 or 2
<Rdc. Condens. (1-Sd->2-Sd Prt)>/<Reduce Condensation (1-Sd->2-Sd Print)> *
When performing 2-sided printing after 1-sided printing, the printed images may be faint due to moisture
condensation. In this case, setting to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Special Processing>
Condens. (1-Sd->2-Sd Prt)>/<Reduce Condensation (1-Sd->2-Sd Print)>
● If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower.
355
<On>
<Yes> (
<Rdc.
)
Setting Menu List
<Rdc Condens. (Consec 2-Sd Prt)>/<Reduce Condensation (Consec. 2-Sd Print)> *
If the printed images are faint due to moisture condensation when performing 2-sided printing, setting to other
than <Off> may solve the problem.
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
<Off>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
LBP623Cdw
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Rdc
Condens. (Consec 2-Sd Prt)>/<Reduce Condensation (Consec. 2-Sd Print)> Select the item <Yes>
(
)
● For LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw, the improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than <Mode 1>.
● If you set to other than <Off>, the print may be faded or the printing speed may be slower.
<Correct Uneven Gloss> *
When gloss unevenness occurs in the leading edge of paper, setting to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Processing>
<Correct Uneven Gloss>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<On>
<Yes> (
<Special
)
● If you set to <On>, toner may not be fixed sufficiently, resulting in faded printouts.
<Corr. Void on Paper Back Side>/<Correct Void on Paper Back Side> *
When performing 2-sided printing on thin paper, void may occur on the back side of paper in the leading edge.
In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
356
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Adjust Image Quality>
Void on Paper Back Side>/<Correct Void on Paper Back Side>
<Special Processing>
<On>
<Yes> (
<Corr.
)
● If you set to <On>, print quality may be affected.
<Correct Void> *
If printing on thin paper produces void in the leading edge of the paper, setting this item to <On> may solve the
problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Processing>
<Correct Void>
<On>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Yes> (
<Special
)
● If you set to <On>, printouts may be faded.
<Reduce Waterdrop Pattern>/<Reduce Formation of Waterdrop Pattern>
If print density is uneven in a way that the print looks like a water drops pattern, setting this item to <On> may
solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Processing> <Reduce Waterdrop Pattern>/<Reduce Formation of Waterdrop Pattern>
<Yes> (
<On>
)
● If you set to <On>, print quality may be affected.
<Corr. Img. Corrup. by Ppr. Dust>/<Correct Image Corrupted by Paper Dust> *
Using paper containing much paper dust may result in a faded or streaky printout. In this case, setting this item
to <On> may solve the problem.
357
Setting Menu List
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Special Processing>
Img. Corrup. by Ppr. Dust>/<Correct Image Corrupted by Paper Dust>
<On>
<Yes> (
<Corr.
)
● If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower.
<Prevent Fogging>
If white areas are lightly colored, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Processing>
<Prevent Fogging>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<On>
<Yes> (
<Special
)
● If you set to <On>, print density may be lighter.
<Correct Color Mismatch>/<Correct Print Color Mismatch> *
If color mismatch occurs, setting to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Processing>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Special
<Correct Color Mismatch>/<Correct Print Color Mismatch>
● If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower.
358
<On>
<Yes> (
)
Setting Menu List
<Reduce Drum Streak>
If streaks appear on printouts, setting to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Processing>
<Reduce Drum Streak>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Special
<On>
<Reduce Toner Flaking>
Toner may peel off the printed page depending on the paper type or the environmental conditions. In this case,
setting this item may solve the problem.
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
<Off>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Processing>
<Reduce Toner Flaking>
<Adjust Image Quality>
Select the item
<Yes> (
<Special
)
For LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
● The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than with <Mode 1>. First try the adjustment with
<Mode 1>.
● Setting a greater improvement effect may result in curled printouts or slower printing speed.
For LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw
● If you set to <On>, ghost images may appear in blank areas.
<Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 1>/<Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 1> *
When toner stain (spotted stain) appears on the printed paper, the problem may not be solved even if you
cleaning the fixing assembly. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
359
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Processing>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Special
<Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 1>/<Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 1>
<On>
<Yes> (
● If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower.
<Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 2> *
When the machine is used in an environment with high humidity, faded or curled printouts may be output. In
this case, changing the setting of this item may solve the problem.
<Auto>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Processing>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 2>
Select the item
<Special
<Yes> (
)
<Auto>
Automatically adjusts toner fixing.
<Mode 1>
If printouts are curled, set to this option.
<Mode 2>
If printouts are faded, set to this option.
● If you set to <Mode 1>, printouts may be faded.
● If you set to <Mode 2>, printouts may be curled.
<Auto Detect B&W/Color Orig.>/<Auto Detect B&W/Color Original>
When black and white print data is mixed with color data, specify whether to prioritize the print speed or to
reduce the toner usage of the cyan, magenta, and yellow toner cartridges when printing data.
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
360
)
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Adjust Image Quality>
Detect B&W/Color Orig.>/<Auto Detect B&W/Color Original>
<Special Processing>
Select the mode
<Yes> (
<Auto
)
<Mode 1>
Prioritizes the print speed when printing.
<Mode 2>
Reduces the toner usage of toner cartridges when printing.
<Rdc. Faint Print After Rplc. Cart.>/<Reduce Faint Print After Replacing Cart.>
Printouts may be faded immediately after replacement of toner cartridges with new ones. In this case, setting
this item to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Special Processing>
Faint Print After Rplc. Cart.>/<Reduce Faint Print After Replacing Cart.>
<On>
<Yes> (
<Rdc.
)
● If you set to <On>, the setting will become effective with next replacement of toner cartridges.
● Immediately after cartridge replacement, a certain amount of time is required for toner to be evenly
distributed inside the cartridge.
361
Setting Menu List
<Maintenance>
3S2W-05R
The cleaning functions are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>(P. 362)
<Clean Fixing Assembly>(P. 362)
<Clean ITB>(P. 362)
<Control Condensation>(P. 362)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
<Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)> *
Clean the fixing assembly when the edge or back side of the printout is smudged.
Assembly(P. 447)
Cleaning the Fixing
<Clean Fixing Assembly>
Clean the fixing assembly after a toner cartridge is replaced or if black streaks appear on printouts.
Fixing Assembly(P. 447)
Cleaning the
<Clean ITB>
Clean the transfer belt inside the machine to prevent the print quality from deteriorating.
Belt (ITB)(P. 450)
Cleaning the Transfer
<Control Condensation>
When the temperature changes rapidly in the environment where the machine is installed, condensation occurs, which
may cause fading or bleeding in images and text. Select <On> to remove dew condensation in the machine. When
selecting <On>, specify whether to restrict jobs.
<Off>
<On>
<Allow Job Printing During Process>
<Do Not Allow Job Printing During Process>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Check the message
<OK> (
)
<Maintenance>
Select the item
362
(
<Control Condensation>
)
<Yes>
<On>
Setting Menu List
● While condensation removal is being performed, printing may not be performed properly and blank paper
may be output.
● If you set to <On>, you need to keep the machine turned ON to maintain the effect of condensation removal.
● The setting for <Auto Shutdown Time> is unavailable when <Control Condensation> is set to <On>.
363
Setting Menu List
<Function Settings>
3S2W-05S
Item
Description
<Common>(P. 365)
This section describes settings common to each function.
<Printer>(P. 369)
This section describes how to specify printer settings.
<Receive>(P. 416)
This section describes how to specify settings for receiving I-Faxes.
<Access Files>(P. 418)
This section describes the settings for printing stored files.
<Secure Print>(P. 428)
This section describes the settings for the Secure Print.
364
Setting Menu List
<Common>
3S2W-05U
All the items related to settings common to each function are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with
a dagger ( ).
<Paper Feed Settings>(P. 365)
<Print Settings>(P. 367)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
<Paper Feed Settings>
Configure paper feed settings.
<Paper Source Auto Selection>/<Drawer Auto Selection On/Off>
Enable or disable the automatic drawer selection feature for the paper sources. If automatic drawer selection is
set to <On> when printing documents, the machine automatically selects a paper source that is loaded with the
appropriate paper size. Also, when the paper runs out, this setting enables continuous printing by switching
from one paper source to another that is loaded with the same paper size. Automatically Selecting an
Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function(P. 156)
<Printer>
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 1>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 2>*
<Off>
<On>
<Receive>
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 1>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 2>*
<Off>
<On>
<Other>
365
Setting Menu List
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 1>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 2>*
<Off>
<On>
<Switch Paper Feed Method> *
Specify this setting when you print a document on paper with logos. In general use, to print on paper with
logos, you need to change how the paper loaded in the paper source is facing depending on whether you are
performing 1- or 2-sided printing. However, if you change the setting to <Print Side Priority>, you can just load
the paper with the logo side facing down for 1-sided printing in the same way as for 2-sided printing. For more
information, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 142) .
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Speed Priority>
<Print Side Priority>
<Drawer 1>
<Speed Priority>
<Print Side Priority>
<Drawer 2> *
<Speed Priority>
<Print Side Priority>
<Menu>
Method>
<Function Settings>
<Common>
Select the paper source
<Paper Feed Settings>
<Switch Paper Feed
Select <Speed Priority> or <Print Side Priority>
Paper Sources
Select the paper source that you want to change the setting for.
<Speed Priority>
When using paper that has been preprinted with a logo, you need to change how it is facing when you
perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing.
366
Setting Menu List
● We recommend selecting <Speed Priority> if you do not need to consider which side to print on.
<Print Side Priority>
To print on a specific side of paper, you do not need to flip over paper in the paper source whether 1- or 2sided printing is selected.
● If <Print Side Priority> is set for a paper source that is loaded with paper you cannot use for 2-sided printing
( Available Paper(P. 489) ), <Speed Priority> is applied to the paper source instead. In this case, you need
to load the paper in the same way as when <Speed Priority> is selected ( Loading Preprinted
Paper(P. 142) ).
● 1-sided printing speed may be slower when <Print Side Priority> is selected.
<Print Settings>
Configure printing operation settings.
<Auto Delete Suspended Jobs>
You can configure so that if the machine stops printing a job due to an error, the job will be automatically
deleted after a specified period of time.
Touch panel model
<Set This Function>
<Off>
<On>
<Set Time>
0 to 5
to 240 (min.)
Black and white LCD model
<Off>
<On>
0 to 5
to 240 (min.)
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Common> <Print Settings> <Auto Delete Suspended
Jobs> Select <On> in <Set This Function> Enter the time in <Set
Time> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
367
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
Jobs>
<Function Settings>
<On>
<Common>
Enter the time until deletion
368
<Print Settings>
<Auto Delete Suspended
Restart the machine
Setting Menu List
<Printer>
3S2W-05W
All the settings related to the printer are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<Printer Settings>(P. 369)
<PDL Selection (Plug and Play)>(P. 414)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with "*1" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items.
● Settings marked with "*2" cannot be imported or exported.
Priority of settings
● If a print setting is specified both from the printer driver and the operation panel of the machine, the
specification from the printer driver overrides that from the operation panel. The specification from the
operation panel becomes effective in some specific cases, such as when performing PS/PCL printing and
printing from UNIX or other operating system that does not support printer drivers.
<Printer Settings>
Configure settings about printing and printer operations.
<Action When Free Paper Size Mismatch>
When the paper size of each paper source is set to <Free Size> in <Paper Settings>, you can specify the
operation that is to be performed when the size of the loaded paper is significantly different from the setting in
the printer driver.
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Force Output>
<Display Error>
<Drawer 1>
<Force Output>
<Display Error>
<Drawer 2> *1
<Force Output>
<Display Error>
369
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
Mismatch>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
Select a paper source
<Printer Settings>
<Action When Free Paper Size
Select <Force Output> or <Display Error>
<Force Output>
Continues printing even if the size setting in the printer driver is significantly different from the size of the
loaded paper.
<Display Error>
Displays an error message and stops printing when the setting in the printer driver is significantly different
from the size of the loaded paper.
● If the printer driver's settings do not match the size and type of loaded paper with <On> selected, a
paper jam or printing error may occur.
<Copies>
Set the number of copies to print.
1
to 999
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
copies to print
<Apply> (
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Copies>
Set the number of
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<2-Sided Printing>
)
<2-Sided Printing> *1
Select whether to make 2-sided printouts.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Off> or <On>
370
Select
Setting Menu List
<Default Paper>
Set the default paper size and type. Printing will be performed with paper of the size and type set here when
you want to print from an OS not supporting printer drivers or from a mobile device or other device not
Available Paper(P. 489)
supporting paper size and type settings.
<Menu>
paper size
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Default Paper>
Select the
Select the paper type
<Paper Size Override>
Select whether to switch between printing on A4 and Letter size paper if one of these paper sizes is loaded but
the other is not. When you select <On>, if you specify A4 size paper to print from the computer but A4 size
paper is not loaded in the machine, it will print your document on Letter size paper.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Paper Size Override>
Select
<Off> or <On>
● You can specify print settings, such as the number of copies or 1-sided/2-sided printing, from an
application or the printer driver. However, the <Paper Size Override> setting can only be specified on
the machine.
<Print Quality>
You can change settings related to print quality.
<Density> *1
Adjust the toner density.
Touch panel model
Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black
17 Levels
<Fine Adjust>
<Yellow>/<Magenta>/<Cyan>/<Black>
<High>/<Medium>/<Low>
17 Levels
Black and white LCD model
<Density>
<Yellow>/<Magenta>/<Cyan>/<Black>
17 Levels
371
Setting Menu List
<Density (Fine Adjust)>
<Yellow>/<Magenta>/<Cyan>/<Black>
<High>/<Medium>/<Low>
17 Levels
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Quality>
<Density>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
Adjust the density of each color
<Print
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
Quality>
density
<Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print
<Density> <Density> Select the target color Adjust the
<Apply>
<Apply>
● You can use <Fine Adjust> or <Density (Fine Adjust)> to adjust the toner density of each color to three
density levels: high density, medium density, and low density.
● When <Toner Save> is set to <On>, you cannot set this item.
<Toner Save>
You can save toner consumption. Select <On> when you want to check the layout or other appearance
characteristics before proceeding to final printing of a large job.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
Save>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Print Quality>
<Toner
Select <Off> or <On>
<Gradation>
Specify the processing method used to reproduce gradation. <High 2> gives finer gradation than <High 1>.
<High 1>
<High 2>
372
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Quality>
<Gradation>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Print
Select <High 1> or <High 2>
● This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.
<Density Fine Adjustment>
When fine lines or small text are faded, increase the density to give less faded print.
Five Levels
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Adjustment>
<Printer>
Adjust the adjustment value
<Printer Settings>
<Print Quality>
<Density Fine
<Apply>
● A change in the density affects objects other than text or lines and the color balance.
● This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <1200 dpi>.
<Resolution>
Specify the resolution to be used for print data processing.
<1200 dpi>
<600 dpi>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Quality>
<Resolution>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Print
Select <1200 dpi> or <600 dpi>
<Special Smoothing Mode>
Specify the mode to print data with a smooth finish. If the quality of the printout is not acceptable in <Mode
1> (default), try another mode.
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Mode 3>
<Mode 4>
<Mode 5>
<Mode 6>
373
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Smoothing Mode>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Print Quality>
<Special
Select the mode
<Mode 1>
Prints an outline of dark text or a figure with a smooth finish. This is the optimal mode for various types of
printing.
<Mode 2>
Prints figure outline and internal halftones with a smooth finish.
<Mode 3>
Prints dark text or lines on an area with a colored background with a smooth finish.
<Mode 4>
Prints an image such as a photo or an outline of a figure or text with a smooth finish.
<Mode 5>
Prints an image and halftones with an even balance.
<Mode 6>
Prints the entire image with a smooth finish.
● When <Error Diffusion> is set to <On> in <Halftones>, printing in modes other than <Mode 5> all produces
the same results.
● When <Resolution> is set to <1200 dpi>, all settings other than <Mode 6> produce the same result.
<Toner Volume Correction>
When the toner volume for text or lines exceeds the limit value of the machine, make a correction so that the
toner volume does not exceed the limit value.
<Standard>
<Gradation Priority>
<Text Priority>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Volume Correction>
<Printer>
Select the item
374
<Printer Settings>
<Print Quality>
<Toner
Setting Menu List
<Standard>
Adjusts the toner supply amount so that proper resolution is ensured for text and lines, and that proper color
tone is ensured for other types of print data.
<Gradation Priority>
Adjusts the toner supply amount so that proper color tone is ensured for all types of print data.
<Text Priority>
Adjusts the toner supply amount so that proper resolution is ensured for all types of print data.
● The display position is different on the black and white LCD model.
<Line Control>
Specify the processing method used to reproduce lines.
<Resolution Priority>
<Gradation Priority>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
Control>
Select <Resolution Priority> or <Gradation Priority>
<Print Quality>
<Line
<Print Quality>
<Width
<Resolution Priority>
Draws lines with the same resolution as for text.
<Gradation Priority>
Draws lines while maintaining color and gradation.
<Width Adjustment>
Configure a setting to print text or fine lines in bold.
<Off>
<On>
<Text>
<Line>
<Text and Line>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Adjustment>
<On>
<Printer>
Select the target
375
<Printer Settings>
Setting Menu List
● If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower or image quality may be affected.
● Even if you set to <On>, bold printing may not be possible depending on the printing application.
<Advanced Smoothing>
Configure the smoothing setting to print the outline of graphics (e.g., illustrations created using applications)
or text with a smooth finish.
<Advanced Smoothing>
Select whether to perform smoothing processing. <Level 2> prints an outline with a smoother finish than
<Level 1>. First try with <Level 1>.
<Off>
<Level 1>
<Level 2>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Smoothing>
<Printer>
<Advanced Smoothing>
<Printer Settings>
<Print Quality>
<Advanced
Select the item
<Apply to Graphics> *1
Specify whether to apply smoothing processing to graphics when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to <Level
1> or <Level 2>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Smoothing>
<Printer>
<Apply to Graphics>
<Printer Settings>
<Print Quality>
<Advanced
Select <Off> or <On>
<Apply to Text> *1
Specify whether to apply smoothing processing to the text when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to <Level
1> or <Level 2>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Smoothing>
<Apply to Text>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Print Quality>
<Advanced
Select <Off> or <On>
● The settings of <Apply to Graphics> and <Apply to Text> are only effective when [Advanced Smoothing] is
set to [Printer Default] in the printer driver.
376
Setting Menu List
<Gradation Smoothing>
Configure the smoothing setting to print the gradation (color density) of graphics (e.g., illustrations created
using applications) or bit map images with a smooth finish.
<Gradation Smoothing>
Select whether to perform smoothing processing. <Level 2> prints an outline with a smoother finish than
<Level 1>. First try with <Level 1>.
<Off>
<Level 1>
<Level 2>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Smoothing>
<Printer>
<Gradation Smoothing>
<Printer Settings>
<Print Quality>
<Gradation
Select the item
<Apply to Graphics> *1
Specify whether to apply smoothing processing to graphics when <Gradation Smoothing> is set to <Level
1> or <Level 2>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Smoothing>
<Printer>
<Apply to Graphics>
<Printer Settings>
<Print Quality>
<Gradation
Select <Off> or <On>
<Apply to Images> *1
Specify whether to apply smoothing processing to images when <Gradation Smoothing> is set to <Level
1> or <Level 2>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Smoothing>
<Apply to Images>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Print Quality>
<Gradation
Select <Off> or <On>
● [Gradation Smoothing] in the printer driver applies only to graphics data. The setting configured here
applies to smoothing processing for image data.
<Enhance Text for B&W Printing>
When printing a color document in black and white, using this item adjusts the density of text to make it
more legible. This is useful and effective for printing in black and white a color document containing lightcolored text.
377
Setting Menu List
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Text for B&W Printing>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Print Quality>
<Enhance
Select <Off> or <On>
● This item does not apply to text drawn as graphics or images.
● This item has no effect on PDF or PS print data.
● If you set this item to <Off> when printing documents that contain light-colored text, the text is printed
thinner than when <On> is selected, so it may be more or less illegible.
● Even when this item is set to <Off>, the print result may be such that text looks emphasized. If so, also set
<Advanced Smoothing> to <Off>. <Advanced Smoothing>(P. 376)
<Layout>
Specify the page layout settings such as binding position and margin values.
<Binding Location>
If you are binding the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler, use this item to specify whether to bind
on the long or short edge. Specify the setting of this item in combination with <Gutter>, which specifies the
binding margin to apply to the binding position.
<Long Edge>
<Short Edge>
<Menu>
Location>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
Select <Long Edge> or <Short Edge>
<Long Edge>
Specify this to bind on the long edge of paper.
<Short Edge>
Specify this to bind on the short edge of paper.
378
<Layout>
<Binding
Setting Menu List
<Gutter>
Shift the print position to adjust the binding margin to apply to the binding edge specified by <Binding
Location>. The value "00.0" exerts no effect on the binding margin.
-50.0 to 00.0
<Menu>
to +50.0 (mm)
<Function Settings>
the binding margin
<Apply> (
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Layout>
<Gutter>
Specify
)
Entering the setting value
Specify the print position shift direction and shift width. Whether the setting value is a "+" or "-" value
determines the binding edge along which to adjust the binding margin. The margin width can be adjusted in
0.5 mm increments. Basic Operation(P. 116)
Setting Value
A value with a "+" sign
A value with a "-" sign
Long Edge
Short Edge
Left edge of paper
Top edge of paper
Right edge of paper Bottom edge of paper
<Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge>
Irrespective of the paper source, you can shift the print position in units of "0.5 mm" for all print jobs.
-50.0 to 00.0
to +50.0 (mm)
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Layout> Select the
combination of adjustment direction and printing side Specify the offset value <Apply>
(
)
379
Setting Menu List
<Offset Short Edge (Front)>/<Offset Long Edge (Front)>
Shifts the print position on the side of paper facing up.
<Offset Short Edge (Back)>/<Offset Long Edge (Back)>
Shifts the print position on the side of paper facing down.
Entering the setting value
For <Offset Short Edge (Front)>/<Offset Short Edge (Back)>, specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print
position in the left-to-right direction. For <Offset Long Edge (Front)>/<Offset Long Edge (Back)>, specify a
value with a "+" sign to shift the print position in the up-to-down direction. To shift in the reverse direction,
specify a value with a "-" sign. Basic Operation(P. 116)
<Offset Short Edge (Front)>
<Offset Short Edge (Back)>
<Offset Long Edge (Front)>
<Offset Long Edge (Back)>
<Auto Skip Error>/<Auto Error Skip>
Printing stops if a certain error occurs in the process. However, if you set this item to <On>, the certain error will
be skipped and printing can continue. Normally, set this item to <Off>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
Skip>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Auto Skip Error>/<Auto Error
Select <Off> or <On>
<Timeout>
Set the time period after which the current print job is automatically canceled in the case of a print data
reception interruption.
5 to 15
to 300 (sec.)
380
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
period
<Function Settings>
<Apply> (
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Timeout>
Set the time
)
<Personality>
Specify the mode in which the machine should operate when the format of document data is unknown.
<Auto>
<PS>*1
<PCL>*1
<PDF>
<XPS>
<Imaging>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Personality>
Select the
<Printer Settings>
<Color Mode>
Select <Auto
Personality mode
<Color Mode>
Select whether to print data in color or black and white.
<Auto (Color/B&W)>
<Black & White>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
(Color/B&W)> or <Black & White>
<Compressed Image Output>
Specify the operation that is to be performed when the image quality has degraded due to insufficient memory
during printing.
<Output>
<Display Error>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
Select <Output> or <Display Error>
381
<Printer Settings>
<Compressed Image Output>
Setting Menu List
<Output>
Continues printing regardless of how much the image quality has degraded.
<Display Error>
If the image quality has degraded significantly, an error message is displayed, and printing is stopped.
<Escape Tray Mode>
Specify whether to feed paper from the multi-purpose tray when the appropriate paper is not loaded in the
paper drawer while Auto Select Paper is enabled.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Escape Tray Mode>
Select
<Off> or <On>
<Speed/Prt. Side Priority for 2-Sd>/<Speed/Print Side Priority for 2-Sided> *1
Specify whether to process the last page using 1-sided printing when processing a document containing an odd
number of pages using 2-sided printing.
<Speed Priority>
<Print Side Priority>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
Sd>/<Speed/Print Side Priority for 2-Sided>
<Speed Priority>
Processes the last page using 1-sided printing.
<Print Side Priority>
Also processes the last page using 2-sided printing.
382
<Printer Settings>
<Speed/Prt. Side Priority for 2-
Select <Speed Priority> or <Print Side Priority>
Setting Menu List
When a document containing an even number of pages is ended with 1-sided
printing
● When <Speed Priority> is selected, the last page that is blank or unprintable is processed using 1sided printing even if the document consists of the even number of pages.
When you use paper that has been preprinted with a logo
● If <Speed Priority> is selected and the last page is processed using 1-sided printing, the page
orientation or print side may differ from that of other pages. In such a case, select <Print Side
Priority>.
<Prioritize MP Tray>/<Prioritize Multi-Purpose Tray>
Specify whether to feed paper from the multi-purpose tray when Auto Select Paper is enabled. If <On> is
selected, paper is fed from the multi-purpose tray when paper of the same size and same type is loaded in both
the multi-purpose tray and paper drawer.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Prioritize MP Tray>/<Prioritize
Select <Off> or <On>
● This setting is only available when <Escape Tray Mode> is set to <Off>.
<Check Paper Size in Tray>
Specify whether to cancel the printing when the paper size in the loaded paper is different from the one in the
printer driver.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
Tray>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Check Paper Size in
Select <Off> or <On>
<Recovery Printing>
If printing is interrupted due to an error such as a paper jam, printing ordinarily restarts from the page on
which the error occurred after the error has been resolved. When <Off> is selected, the page on which an error
occurred is skipped, and printing restarts from the next page.
<Off>
<On>
383
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Recovery Printing>
Select
<Off> or <On>
When <Off> is selected
● The page may not be printed depending on the timing at which an error occurred.
● If an error occurs during 2-sided printing, both of the corresponding pages may not be printed.
<UFR II>
You can change the settings that become effective when printing from the UFR II printer driver.
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Error Diffusion>
This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Error Diffusion>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<UFR II>
<Halftones>
Select <Off> or <On>
● This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.
● The stability of the texture and fixed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.
<Resolution/Gradation> *1
Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be
specified for each image type in any one document.
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Graphics>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Image>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
384
Setting Menu List
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <UFR
II> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image
Select <Resolution> or
<Gradation>
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and figures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting value
<Resolution>
Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<Matching Method>
Specify the processing method used to correct the color.
<General>
<Perceptual>
<Colorimetric>
<Vivid Photo>
<Menu>
Method>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<UFR II>
<Matching
Select the item
<General>
Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing general papers such as photos or documents.
<Perceptual>
385
Setting Menu List
Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing bitmap images. When this item is selected, an
image is printed in the colors closest to those displayed on the monitor.
<Colorimetric>
Minimizes a color variance that occurs when RGB data is converted to CMYK data.
<Vivid Photo>
Performs processing so that the color tone is deeper and more vivid than <General>.
<Gray Compensation>
Configures a setting so that black or gray data of which color information is "R = G = B" is printed using only
the K (black) toner. If <Off> is selected, data is printed using the toner of four colors: CMYK. This option can
be specified for each image type in any one document.
<Text>
<Off>
<On>
<Graphics>
<Off>
<On>
<Image>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Compensation>
<Printer>
Select the type of image
<Printer Settings>
<UFR II>
<Gray
<UFR II>
<Paper
Select <Off> or <On>
<Paper Save>
Specify whether to disable a blank page in print data from being output.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
Save>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
Select <Off> or <On>
<PCL> *1
Specify the PCL printing settings such as page layout and print quality.
<Paper Save>
Specify whether to disable a blank page in print data from being output.
<Off>
<On>
386
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Paper Save>
Select
<Off> or <On>
<Orientation>
Select <Portrait> (vertical orientation) or <Landscape> (horizontal orientation) for the page orientation.
<Portrait>
<Landscape>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Orientation>
Select
<Portrait> or <Landscape>
<Font Number>
Specify the font to use by selecting a corresponding font ID number. You can print the PCL font list with font
samples from the operation panel. PCL Font List(P. 469)
LBP664Cx
0
to 104
LBP663Cdw / LBP623Cdw
0
to 54
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Number>
<Printer>
Select the font number
<Printer Settings>
<Apply> (
<PCL>
<Font
)
<Point Size> *1
Set the font size in points, adjustable in 0.25 increments. You can specify this setting only when a
proportionally-spaced scalable font is selected in <Font Number>.
4.00 to 12.00
<Menu>
to 999.75 (point)
<Function Settings>
the point size
<Apply> (
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Point Size>
Specify
)
<Pitch> *1
Set the font pitch, or cpi (characters per inch), adjustable in 0.01 increments. You can specify this setting only
when a fixed-pitch scalable font or a bitmap font is selected in <Font Number>.
387
Setting Menu List
0.44 to 10.00
to 99.99 (cpi)
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
pitch value
<Apply> (
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Pitch>
Specify the
)
<Form Lines>
Set the number of lines printed on one page from 5 to 128. This setting is automatically changed according
to the settings specified in <Default Paper Size> and <Orientation>.
5 to 64
to 128 (lines)
<Menu>
Lines>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
Specify the number of lines
<Printer Settings>
<Apply> (
<PCL>
<Form
)
<Character Code>
Select the character code that is most suited for the computer you send print data from. The specified setting
is ignored when the character code is controlled by the font specified in <Font Number>.
LBP664Cx
<ARABIC8>
<DESKTOP>
<GREEK8>
<HEBREW7>
<HEBREW8>
<ISO4>
<ISO6>
<ISO11>
<ISO15>
<ISO17>
<ISO21>
<ISO60>
<ISO69>
<ISOCYR>
<ISOGRK>
<ISOHEB>
<ISOL1>
<ISOL2>
<ISOL5>
<ISOL6>
<ISOL9>
<LEGAL>
<MATH8>
<MCTEXT>
<MSPUBL>
<PC775>
<PC8>
<PC850>
<PC851>
<PC852>
<PC858>
<PC862>
<PC864>
<PC866>
<PC8DN>
<PC8GRK>
<PC8TK>
<PC1004>
<PIFONT>
<PSMATH>
<PSTEXT>
<ROMAN8>
<ROMAN9>
<VNINTL>
<VNMATH>
<VNUS>
<WIN30>
<WINARB>
<WINBALT>
<WINCYR>
<WINGRK>
<WINL1>
<WINL2>
388
Setting Menu List
<WINL5>
LBP663Cdw / LBP623Cdw
<DESKTOP>
<ISO4>
<ISO6>
<ISO11>
<ISO15>
<ISO17>
<ISO21>
<ISO60>
<ISO69>
<ISOL1>
<ISOL2>
<ISOL5>
<ISOL6>
<ISOL9>
<LEGAL>
<MATH8>
<PC8>
<PC850>
<PC852>
<PC858>
<PC8DN>
<PC8TK>
<PC1004>
<PIFONT>
<PSMATH>
<PSTEXT>
<ROMAN8>
<ROMAN9>
<VNINTL>
<VNMATH>
<VNUS>
<WIN30>
<WINBALT>
<WINL1>
<WINL2>
<WINL5>
<MCTEXT>
<MSPUBL>
<PC775>
<Menu>
Code>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Character
Select the character code
<Custom Paper>
Select whether to set a custom paper size. Select <On> to set the dimensions of the paper in <X dimension>
and <Y dimension>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Paper>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Unit of Measure> *1
Select the unit of measurement to use to set a custom paper size.
<Millimeter>
<Inch>
389
<PCL>
<Custom
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Measure>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Unit of
<PCL>
<X
<PCL>
<Y
Select <Millimeter> or <Inch>
<X dimension> *1
Specify the horizontal dimension (short edge) of the custom paper.
77 to 216
(mm)
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
dimension>
<Printer>
Specify the dimension
<Printer Settings>
<Apply> (
)
<Y dimension> *1
Specify the vertical dimension (long edge) of the custom paper.
127 to 355
(mm)
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
dimension>
<Printer>
Specify the dimension
<Printer Settings>
<Apply> (
)
<Append CR to LF>
Select whether to append a carriage return (CR) when the machine receives a line feed code (LF). If <Yes> is
selected, the print position moves to the beginning of the next line when the machine receives an LF code. If
<No> is selected, the print position moves to the next line, just under the received LF code.
<Yes>
<No>
390
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
LF>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Append CR to
Select <Yes> or <No>
<Enlarge A4 Print Width>
Select whether to expand the width of the printable area of A4 size paper in portrait orientation to that of
Letter size.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Width>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Enlarge A4 Print
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Error Diffusion>
This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
Diffusion>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Halftones>
<Error
Select <Off> or <On>
● This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.
● The stability of the texture and fixed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.
<Resolution/Gradation> *1
Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be
specified for each image type in any one document.
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Graphics>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Image>
391
Setting Menu List
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Resolution/Gradation>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
Select the type of image
<PCL>
<Halftones>
Select <Resolution> or <Gradation>
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and figures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting value
<Resolution>
Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<Matching Method>
Specify the processing method used to correct the color.
<General>
<Perceptual>
<Colorimetric>
<Vivid Photo>
<Menu>
Method>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
Select the item
<General>
392
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Matching
Setting Menu List
Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing general papers such as photos or documents.
<Perceptual>
Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing bitmap images. When this item is selected, an
image is printed in the colors closest to those displayed on the monitor.
<Colorimetric>
Minimizes a color variance that occurs when RGB data is converted to CMYK data.
<Vivid Photo>
Performs processing so that the color tone is deeper and more vivid than <General>.
<Gray Compensation>
Configures a setting so that black or gray data of which color information is "R = G = B" is printed using only
the K (black) toner. If <Off> is selected, data is printed using the toner of four colors: CMYK. This option can
be specified for each image type in any one document.
<Text>
<Off>
<On>
<Graphics>
<Off>
<On>
<Image>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Compensation>
<Printer>
Select the type of image
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Gray
Select <Off> or <On>
<BarDIMM> *1
This setting enables you to print bar codes supported by the Barcode Printing Kit. If <Enable> is selected, the
machine will generate bar codes when it receives bar code commands from the host computer. If <Disable>
is selected, bar codes will not be generated, even if bar code commands are sent from the host computer.
<Disable>
<Enable>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<BarDIMM>
Select
<Disable> or <Enable>
● To enable the BarDIMM menu, it is necessary to activate the Barcode Printing Kit. When you are not
printing bar codes, make sure to disable the BarDIMM menu. Otherwise, the processing speed of regular
print jobs may be reduced.
393
Setting Menu List
● The default setting is <Disable>. If you activate the Barcode Printing Kit, it changes to <Enable>.
<FreeScape> *1
Specify the AEC (Alternate Escape Code) to be used for bar code commands when the host computer does
not support the standard Escape Code.
<Off>
<~>
<">
<#>
<$>
</>
<\>
<?>
<{>
<}>
<|>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<FreeScape>
Select
an escape code
● This setting is available only when <BarDIMM> is enabled.
<PS> *1
Specify the PS printing settings such as page layout and print quality.
<Job Timeout>
This setting enables you to specify the amount of time before a job times out. If a job has not finished within
the set time limit, the job automatically cancels.
0
to 3600 (sec.)
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
Specify the seconds for job timeout
<Printer Settings>
<Apply> (
<PS>
<Job Timeout>
)
<Print PS Errors>
This setting determines whether an error page is printed when an error is encountered.
<Off>
<On>
394
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PS>
<Print PS Errors>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Pure Black Text>
Configures a setting so that black text of which color information is "R = G = B = 0%," "C = M = Y = 100%," or "C
= M = Y = 0%/K = 100%" is printed using only the K (black) toner. When <Off> is selected, text is printed based
on the <Output Profile> setting.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PS>
<Pure Black Text>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Black Overprint> *1
Specify the printing method used when black text overlaps a colored background or figure. This option is not
displayed when <Pure Black Text> is set to <Off>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PS>
<Black Overprint>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Off>
Outlines black text from a colored background or figure first, then prints black text in the outlined part.
Printouts may be faded much more than <On>, or text may be outlined.
<On>
Prints all the colored backgrounds and figures, and overlaps black text on these backgrounds and figures using
only the black (K) toner, then prints.
395
Setting Menu List
<RGB Source Profile> *2
Select the profile for RGB data according to the monitor you are using.
<sRGB>
<Gamma 1.5>
<Gamma 1.8>
<Gamma 2.4>
<None>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PS>
<RGB Source Profile>
Select the profile
<sRGB>
Sets the image quality to the industry standard for general Windows computer monitors. If the monitor
supports sRGB, data can be printed in the color tones closest to the displayed colors.
<Gamma 1.5> to <Gamma 2.4>
Adjusts the brightness of the print result to prevent the image quality of the brightest and darkest parts from
being degraded. The greater the gamma value is, the darker the printed text or image becomes.
<None>
Carries out color separation from RGB data to CMYK data without applying an RGB source profile.
<CMYK Simulation Profile> *2
Select a simulation target to print the CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent
CMYK color model based on the simulation.
<JapanColor(Canon)>
<U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>
<Euro Standard v1.00(Canon)>
<None>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Profile>
Select the profile
<Printer>
396
<Printer Settings>
<PS>
<CMYK Simulation
Setting Menu List
<JapanColor(Canon)>
Set a JapanColor profile. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the Japanese printing standard.
<U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>
Set a U.S. Web Coated profile. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the U.S. printing standard.
<Euro Standard v1.00(Canon)>
Set a Euro Standard profile. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the European printing
standard.
<None>
Prints CMYK data by using a device-dependent CMYK color model without applying the CMYK simulation profile.
● When <None> is selected, the dark color gradation may become uneven depending on data.
<Use Grayscale Profile> *2
Specify whether to convert gray data to CMYK data using the grayscale profile of the machine.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PS>
<Use Grayscale Profile>
Select <Off> or <On>
● Even if <On> is selected, data is printed using only the K (black) toner depending on the setting of <Output
Profile> or <Pure Black Text>.
<Output Profile> *2
Select the appropriate profile for the print data. This option can be specified for each image type in any one
document.
<Text>
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Graphics>
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Image>
397
Setting Menu List
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Select the type of image
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PS>
<Output Profile>
Select the profile
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and figures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting value
<Normal>
Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor.
<Photo>
Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones.
<TR Normal>
Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor and using only the K
(black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.
<TR Photo>
Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and
gray elements.
The setting of this item is unavailable when one of the following settings is selected.
● <RGB Source Profile> is set to <None>
● <CMYK Simulation Profile> is set to <None>
● <Use Grayscale Profile> is set to <Off>
<Matching Method>
Select the element to be prioritized when carrying out color matching in <RGB Source Profile>.
<Perceptual>
<Saturation>
<Colorimetric>
398
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PS>
<Matching Method>
Select the item
<Perceptual>
Provides the color tone that is suitable for printing photos or bit map images.
<Saturation>
Provides the color tone that is suitable for printing artworks, graphs, and other images used for presentation
materials.
<Colorimetric>
Set this option when you want to reproduce the RGB color value in the color reproduction range of the machine
as accurately as possible.
● The setting of this item is unavailable when <RGB Source Profile> is set to <None>.
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Error Diffusion>
This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
Diffusion>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PS>
<Halftones>
<Error
Select <Off> or <On>
● This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.
● The stability of the texture and fixed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.
<Resolution/Gradation> *1
Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be
specified for each image type in any one document.
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
399
Setting Menu List
<Graphics>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Image>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer
Settings> <PS> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation>
Select the type of image
Select
<Resolution> or <Gradation>
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and figures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting value
<Resolution>
Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<Brightness> *1
Adjust the brightness of the entire image in increments of 5%. The lower the setting value is, the brighter the
image or text becomes. The greater the setting value is, the darker the image or text becomes.
85 to 100
to 115 (%)
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PS>
<Brightness>
the brightness
<Composite Overprint>
Specify whether to overprint CMYK data, with overprint specified, as composite output.
<Off>
400
Adjust
Setting Menu List
<On>
<Menu>
Overprint>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PS>
<Composite
<PS>
<Grayscale Conversion>
Select <Off> or <On>
● Overprinting using special colors is not permitted.
<Grayscale Conversion> *1
Specify the way of printing color data in black and white.
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
Select the type of grayscale conversion
<sRGB>
Prints in black and white with emphasis on color differences so that a smooth gradation is achieved.
<NTSC>
Prints in black and white so that the resulting image looks like a black and white television picture (of the NTSC
system).
<Uniform RGB>
Prints in black and white so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level by using only
brightness as the reference.
<PS Password Settings>
You can specify the password that restricts the use of the control command prepared by the PS printer.
<SystemParamsPassword>
<StartJobPassword>
Touch panel model
401
Setting Menu List
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <PS Password
Settings> Select <SystemParamsPassword> or <StartJobPassword> Enter the password
<Apply>
Enter the password (Confirm)
<Apply>
<OK>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <PS Password
Settings> Select <SystemParamsPassword> or <StartJobPassword> Enter the
password
<Apply>
Enter the password (Confirm)
<Apply>
● <SystemParamsPassword> is a password that allows changes to the system parameter, and
<StartJobPassword> is a password that allows startjob, exitserver operator to perform. For more
information, check PostScript language specifications.
● If <StartJobPassword> is set but <SystemParamsPassword> is not set, password check will not be
performed while performing startjob, exitserver operator.
<Imaging Settings>
You can change the print settings that will apply when printing image files (JPEG/TIFF).
<Halftones>
You can change the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the
lighter and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Gradation>
<Error Diffusion>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Halftones>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Imaging Settings>
Select <Gradation> or <Error Diffusion>
<Gradation>
Prints images with fine gradation, such as digital camera images, with a smooth finish.
<Error Diffusion>
This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.
● The stability of the texture and fixed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.
402
Setting Menu List
<PDF>
You can change settings for PDF files.
<Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size>
Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the original according to the print range of paper. Note that size
enlargement/reduction will not affect the aspect ratio of the original.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Paper Size>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PDF>
<Enlarge/Reduce to Fit
<PDF>
<Enlarge Print Area>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Enlarge Print Area>
Specify whether to extend the print range to the paper size.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
Select <Off> or <On>
● If you specify <On>, it may occur that edge-adjacent portions of page are not printed or that printouts
come out partially smudged depending on the original.
<N on 1>
Specify whether to shrink multiple pages and print them on one page in such arrangement that the first
page is positioned at top left. For example, to print 4 pages onto a single sheet, select <4 on 1>.
<Off>
<2 on 1>
<4 on 1>
<6 on 1>
<8 on 1>
<9 on 1>
<16 on 1>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
number of pages to be combined
403
<Printer Settings>
<PDF>
<N on 1>
Select the
Setting Menu List
<Print Comments>
Specify whether to print comments. If you specify <Auto>, comments in PDF files will be printed.
<Off>
<Auto>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PDF>
<Print Comments>
Select <Off> or <Auto>
<Pure Black Text>
Configures a setting so that black text of which color information is "R = G = B = 0%," "C = M = Y = 100%," or "C
= M = Y = 0%/K = 100%" is printed using only the K (black) toner. When <Off> is selected, text is printed based
on the <Output Profile> setting.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PDF>
<Pure Black Text>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Black Overprint> *1
Specify the printing method used when black text overlaps a colored background or figure. This option is not
displayed when <Pure Black Text> is set to <Off>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PDF>
<Black Overprint>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Off>
Outlines black text from a colored background or figure first, then prints black text in the outlined part.
Printouts may be faded much more than <On>, or text may be outlined.
404
Setting Menu List
<On>
Prints all the colored backgrounds and figures, and overlaps black text on these backgrounds and figures using
only the black (K) toner, then prints.
<RGB Source Profile> *2
Select the profile for RGB data according to the monitor you are using.
<sRGB>
<Gamma 1.5>
<Gamma 1.8>
<Gamma 2.4>
<None>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PDF>
<RGB Source Profile>
Select the profile
<sRGB>
Sets the image quality to the industry standard for general Windows computer monitors. If the monitor
supports sRGB, data can be printed in the color tones closest to the displayed colors.
<Gamma 1.5> to <Gamma 2.4>
Adjusts the brightness of the print result to prevent the image quality of the brightest and darkest parts from
being degraded. The greater the gamma value is, the darker the printed text or image becomes.
<None>
Carries out color separation from RGB data to CMYK data without applying an RGB source profile.
<CMYK Simulation Profile> *2
Select a simulation target to print the CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent
CMYK color model based on the simulation.
<JapanColor(Canon)>
<U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>
<Euro Standard v1.00(Canon)>
<None>
405
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Profile>
Select the profile
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PDF>
<CMYK Simulation
<JapanColor(Canon)>
Set a JapanColor profile. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the Japanese printing standard.
<U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>
Set a U.S. Web Coated profile. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the U.S. printing standard.
<Euro Standard v1.00(Canon)>
Set a Euro Standard profile. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the European printing
standard.
<None>
Prints CMYK data by using a device-dependent CMYK color model without applying the CMYK simulation profile.
● When <None> is selected, the dark color gradation may become uneven depending on data.
<Use Grayscale Profile> *2
Specify whether to convert gray data to CMYK data using the grayscale profile of the machine.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Profile>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PDF>
<Use Grayscale
● Even if <On> is selected, data is printed using only the K (black) toner depending on the setting of <Output
Profile> or <Pure Black Text>.
<Output Profile> *2
Select the appropriate profile for the print data. This option can be specified for each image type in any one
document.
<Text>
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Graphics>
406
Setting Menu List
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Image>
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Select the type of image
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PDF>
<Output Profile>
Select the profile
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and figures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Profile
<Normal>
Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor.
<Photo>
Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones.
<TR Normal>
Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor and using only the K
(black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.
<TR Photo>
Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and
gray elements.
The setting of this item is unavailable when one of the following settings is selected.
● <RGB Source Profile> is set to <None>
● <CMYK Simulation Profile> is set to <None>
● <Use Grayscale Profile> is set to <Off>
<Matching Method>
Select the element to be prioritized when carrying out color matching in <RGB Source Profile>.
407
Setting Menu List
<Perceptual>
<Saturation>
<Colorimetric>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PDF>
<Matching Method>
Select the item
<Perceptual>
Provides the color tone that is suitable for printing photos or bit map images.
<Saturation>
Provides the color tone that is suitable for printing artworks, graphs, and other images used for presentation
materials.
<Colorimetric>
Set this option when you want to reproduce the RGB color value in the color reproduction range of the machine
as accurately as possible.
● The setting of this item is unavailable when <RGB Source Profile> is set to <None>.
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Error Diffusion>
This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
Diffusion>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PDF>
<Halftones>
<Error
Select <Off> or <On>
● This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.
● The stability of the texture and fixed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.
<Resolution/Gradation> *1
Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be
specified for each image type in any one document.
<Text>
408
Setting Menu List
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Graphics>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Image>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer
Settings> <PDF> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation>
Select the type of image
Select
<Resolution> or <Gradation>
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and figures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting value
<Resolution>
Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<Brightness> *1
Adjust the brightness of the entire image in increments of 5%. The lower the setting value is, the brighter the
image or text becomes. The greater the setting value is, the darker the image or text becomes.
85 to 100
to 115 (%)
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
the brightness
409
<Printer Settings>
<PDF>
<Brightness>
Adjust
Setting Menu List
<Composite Overprint>
Specify whether to overprint CMYK data, with overprint specified, as composite output.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PDF>
<Composite
<PDF>
<Grayscale
Select <Off> or <On>
Overprint>
● Overprinting using special colors is not permitted.
<Grayscale Conversion> *1
Specify the way of printing color data in black and white.
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Conversion>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
Select the type of grayscale conversion
<sRGB>
Prints in black and white with emphasis on color differences so that a smooth gradation is achieved.
<NTSC>
Prints in black and white so that the resulting image looks like a black and white television picture (of the NTSC
system).
<Uniform RGB>
Prints in black and white so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level by using only
brightness as the reference.
<XPS>
You can change settings for XPS files.
<Matching Method>
Specify the processing method used to correct the color.
<General>
<Perceptual>
410
Setting Menu List
<Colorimetric>
<Vivid Photo>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<XPS>
<Matching Method>
Select the item
<General>
Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing general papers such as photos or documents.
<Perceptual>
Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing bitmap images. When this item is selected, an
image is printed in the colors closest to those displayed on the monitor.
<Colorimetric>
Minimizes a color variance that occurs when RGB data is converted to CMYK data.
<Vivid Photo>
Performs processing so that the color tone is deeper and more vivid than <General>.
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Error Diffusion>
This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
Diffusion>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<XPS>
<Halftones>
<Error
Select <Off> or <On>
● This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.
● The stability of the texture and fixed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.
<Resolution/Gradation> *1
Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be
specified for each image type in any one document.
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
411
Setting Menu List
<Graphics>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Image>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer
Settings> <XPS> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation>
Select the type of image
Select
<Resolution> or <Gradation>
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and figures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting value
<Resolution>
Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<Gray Compensation>
Configures a setting so that black or gray data of which color information is "R = G = B" is printed using only
the K (black) toner. If <Off> is selected, data is printed using the toner of four colors: CMYK. This option can
be specified for each image type in any one document.
<Text>
<Off>
<On>
<Graphics>
<Off>
<On>
<Image>
<Off>
412
Setting Menu List
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Compensation>
<Printer>
Select the type of image
<Printer Settings>
<XPS>
<Gray
<XPS>
<Grayscale
Select <Off> or <On>
<Grayscale Conversion> *1
Specify the way of printing color data in black and white.
<Text>
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
<Graphics>
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
<Image>
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Conversion>
<Printer>
Select the type of image
<Printer Settings>
Select the type of grayscale conversion
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and figures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Type of grayscale conversion
<sRGB>
Prints in black and white with emphasis on color differences so that a smooth gradation is achieved.
<NTSC>
413
Setting Menu List
Prints in black and white so that the resulting image looks like a black and white television picture (of the
NTSC system).
<Uniform RGB>
Prints in black and white so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level by using only
brightness as the reference.
<Paper Save>
Specify whether to disable a blank page in print data from being output.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<XPS>
<Paper Save>
Select
<Off> or <On>
<PDL Selection (Plug and Play)>
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language
when it is connected to a computer by using Plug and Play.
<Network> *2
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that
language when it is detected over the network.
<UFR II>
<UFR II (V4)>
<PCL6>*1
<PCL6 (V4)>*1
<PS>*1
<USB>
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that
language when it is connected to a computer via USB.
<UFR II>
<UFR II (V4)>
<PCL6>*1
<PCL6 (V4)>*1
<PS>*1
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <PDL Selection (Plug and Play)> Select <Network>
or <USB> Select a page description language <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
414
Setting Menu List
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <PDL Selection (Plug and Play)>
or <USB> Select a page description language Restart the machine
Select <Network>
<UFR II>
Detects and connects the machine as a UFR II printer.
<UFR II (V4)>
Detects and connects the machine as a UFR II printer that is compatible with XML Paper Specification (XPS).
<PCL6> *1
Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.
<PCL6 (V4)> *1
Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.
<PS> *1
Detects and connects the machine as a PS printer.
415
Setting Menu List
<Receive>
3S2W-05X
All the settings related to receiving I-Faxes are listed with descriptions. Default Settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<Common Settings>(P. 416)
<I-Fax Settings>(P. 416)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
<Common Settings>
Specify operations that are to be performed when the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is running low.
<Continue Print. When Cart. Low>/<Continue Print. When Amount in Cart. Low>
When I-Faxes are received while the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is running low, they will not be
printed. However, if this function is enabled, you can still continue printing even if the amount remaining in the
toner cartridges is running low.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Receive>
<Common Settings>
Low>/<Continue Print. When Amount in Cart. Low>
<Continue Print. When Cart.
<On>
● When this function is enabled, the print of I-Faxes may be faded or blurry. Received documents will
not be stored, so you need to ask the sender to resend the document if it is illegible.
<I-Fax Settings>
Configure settings to print received I-Fax documents.
<Print on Both Sides> *
Prints received document on both sides of paper.
<Off>
<On>
416
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Receive>
<I-Fax Settings>
<Print on Both Sides>
<Receive>
<I-Fax Settings>
<RX Print Size>
<On>
<RX Print Size>
Specify the paper size to be used for printing.
<A4>
<LTR>
<LGL>
<FOOLSCAP/FOLIO>
<OFICIO>
<LETTER (Government)>/<Government-LTR>
<LEGAL (Government)>/<Government-LGL>
<LEGAL (India)>/<India-LGL>
<FOOLSCAP (Australia)>/<AUS-FOOLSCAP>
<OFICIO (Brazil)>/<Brazil-OFICIO>
<OFICIO (Mexico)>/<Mexico-OFICIO>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
paper size
417
Select the
Setting Menu List
<Access Files>
3S2W-05Y
All the settings related to printing stored files are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger
( ).
<Common Settings>(P. 418)
<Memory Media Settings>(P. 427)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
<Common Settings>
Configure the default settings for memory media print.
<Access Stored Files Settings>
You can change the settings to print files in a USB memory device and the method for displaying them.
<Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
You can change the default settings associated with memory media print. The settings configured here are
used as the default settings of the memory media print function. Changing the Default Settings for
Functions(P. 161)
Touch panel model
<Paper>
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Drawer 1>
<Drawer 2>*
<Number of Copies>
1 to 999
<2-Sided Printing>
<Off>
<Book Type>
<Calendar Type>
<Set JPEG/TIFF Details>
<Brightness>
Five Levels
<N on 1>
<Off>
<2 on 1>
<4 on 1>
<Original Type>
418
Setting Menu List
<Photo Priority>
<Text Priority>
<Halftones>
<Gradation>
<Error Diffusion>
< Set PDF Details>
<Brightness>
Seven Levels
<N on 1>
<Off>
<2 on 1>
<4 on 1>
<6 on 1>
<8 on 1>
<9 on 1>
<16 on 1>
<Print Range>
<All Pages>
<Specified Pages>
<Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size>
<Off>
<On>
<Enlarge Print Area>
<Off>
<On>
<Print Comments>
<Off>
<Auto>
<Other Settings>
<Halftones>
<Error Diffusion>
<Off>
<On>
<Resolution/Gradation>*
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Graphics>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Image>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Pure Black Text>
<Off>
<On>
<Black Overprint>*
419
Setting Menu List
<Off>
<On>
<RGB Source Profile>
<sRGB>
<Gamma 1.5>
<Gamma 1.8>
<Gamma 2.4>
<None>
<CMYK Simulation Profile>
<JapanColor(Canon)>
<U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>
<Euro Standard v1.00(Canon)>
<None>
<Use Grayscale Profile>
<Off>
<On>
<Output Profile>
<Text>
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Graphics>
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Image>
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Matching Method>
<Perceptual>
<Saturation>
<Colorimetric>
<Composite Overprint>
<Off>
<On>
<Grayscale Conversion>
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
<Print Quality>
<Density>*
Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black
17 levels
<Fine Adjust>
420
Setting Menu List
<Yellow>/<Magenta>/<Cyan>/<Black>
<High>/<Medium>/<Low>
17 Levels
<Toner Save>
<Off>
<On>
<Gradation>
<High 1>
<High 2>
<Density Fine Adjustment>
Five Levels
<Resolution>
<1200 dpi>
<600 dpi>
<Special Smoothing Mode>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Mode 3>
<Mode 4>
<Mode 5>
<Mode 6>
<Toner Volume Correction>
<Standard>
<Gradation Priority>
<Text Priority>
<Line Control>
<Resolution Priority>
<Gradation Priority>
<Width Adjustment>
<Off>
<On>
<Text>
<Line>
<Text and Line>
<Advanced Smoothing>
<Advanced Smoothing>
<Off>
<Level 1>
<Level 2>
<Apply to Graphics>*
<Off>
<On>
<Apply to Text>*
<Off>
<On>
<Gradation Smoothing>
<Gradation Smoothing>
<Off>
421
Setting Menu List
<Level 1>
<Level 2>
<Apply to Graphics>*
<Off>
<On>
<Apply to Images>*
<Off>
<On>
Black and white LCD model
<Number of Copies>
1 to 999
<Color Mode>
<Color>
<Black & White>
<Paper>
<MP Tray>
<Drawer 1>
<Drawer 2>*
<2-Sided Printing> *
<Off>
<Book Type>
<Calendar Type>
<Set JPEG/TIFF Details>
<N on 1>
<Off>
<2 on 1>
<4 on 1>
<Original Type>
<Photo Priority>
<Text Priority>
<Brightness>
5 Levels
<Halftones>
<Gradation>
<Error Diffusion>
<Set PDF Details>
<Brightness>
7 Levels
<N on 1>
<Off>
<2 on 1>
<4 on 1>
<6 on 1>
<8 on 1>
422
Setting Menu List
<9 on 1>
<16 on 1>
<Print Range>
<All Pages>
<Specified Pages>
<Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size>
<Off>
<On>
<Enlarge Print Area>
<Off>
<On>
<Print Comments>
<Off>
<Auto>
<Other>
<Halftones>
<Error Diffusion>
<Off>
<On>
<Resolution/Gradation>*
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Graphics>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Image>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Pure Black Text>
<Off>
<On>
<Black Overprint>*
<Off>
<On>
<RGB Source Profile>
<sRGB>
<Gamma 1.5>
<Gamma 1.8>
<Gamma 2.4>
<None>
<CMYK Simulation Profile>
<JapanColor (Canon)>
<U.S. Web Coated v1.00 (Canon)>
<Euro Standard v1.00>
<None>
<Use Grayscale Profile>
<Off>
423
Setting Menu List
<On>
<Output Profile>
<Text>
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Graphics>
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Image>
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Matching Method>
<Perceptual>
<Saturation>
<Colorimetric>
<Composite Overprint>
<Off>
<On>
<Grayscale Conversion>*
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
<Print Quality>
<Density>*
<Density>
<Yellow>/<Magenta>/<Cyan>/<Black>
17 Levels
<Density (Fine Adjust)>
<Yellow>/<Magenta>/<Cyan>/<Black>
<High>/<Medium>/<Low>
17 Levels
<Toner Volume Correction>
<Standard>
<Gradation Priority>
<Text Priority>
<Toner Save>
<Off>
<On>
<Gradation>
<High 1>
<High 2>
<Density Fine Adjustment>
Five Levels
<Resolution>
424
Setting Menu List
<1200 dpi>
<600 dpi>
<Special Smoothing Mode>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Mode 3>
<Mode 4>
<Mode 5>
<Mode 6>
<Line Control>
<Resolution Priority>
<Gradation Priority>
<Width Adjustment>
<Off>
<On>
<Text>
<Line>
<Text and Line>
<Advanced Smoothing>
<Advanced Smoothing>
<Off>
<Level 1>
<Level 2>
<Apply to Graphics>*
<Off>
<On>
<Apply to Text>*
<Off>
<On>
<Gradation Smoothing>
<Gradation Smoothing>
<Off>
<Level 1>
<Level 2>
<Apply to Graphics>*
<Off>
<On>
<Apply to Images>*
<Off>
<On>
<Default Display Settings> *
Select Preview/Thumbnail/Details as the method for displaying files in a USB memory device.
<Preview>
<Thumbnail>
<Details>
425
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Settings>
<Access Files>
<Default Display Settings>
<Common Settings>
<Access Stored Files
Select the method for displaying
<Preview>
Displays a preview image.
<Thumbnail>
Displays thumbnail images.
<Details>
Displays file names and dates in list form.
<File Sort Default Settings>
Select whether to display files in a USB memory device in ascending or descending order of file name or date.
<Name (Ascending)>
<Name (Descending)>
<Date/Time (Ascending)>
<Date/Time (Descending)>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Settings>
<Access Files>
<File Sort Default Settings>
<Common Settings>
<Access Stored Files
Select the order of files that are displayed
<File Name Display Format>
Select whether to display short or long text for file names that are stored in a USB memory device.
<Short File Name>
<Long File Name>
<Menu>
Settings>
<Function Settings>
<Access Files>
<File Name Display Format>
426
<Common Settings>
<Access Stored Files
Select <Short File Name> or <Long File Name>
Setting Menu List
<Short File Name>
Shortens a file name to as few as eight characters. To distinguish files that have similar names, numbers such as
"~1" or "~2" are added at the end of the file names.
<Long File Name>
For Touch panel model, displays a file name up to first 40 characters. For Black and white LCD model, displays a
file name up to first 20 characters.
● The number of characters described above does not include the characters in file extensions, such as ".jpg."
<Memory Media Settings>
Specify whether to enable or disable the functions of a USB memory device.
<Use Print Function>
Select whether to permit printing data from a USB memory device when it is attached to the machine.
Restricting the USB Print Function(P. 273)
LBP664Cx
<Off>
<On>
LBP663Cdw / LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw
<Off>
<On>
427
Setting Menu List
<Secure Print>
3S2W-060
Specify whether to enable or disable Secure Print (
with a dagger ( ).
Printing via Secure Print(P. 178) ). Default settings are marked
<Use Secure Print>
<Off>
<On>
<Restrict Printer Jobs>
<Off>
<On>
<Secure Print Deletion Time>
10 to 30
to 240 (min.)
428
Setting Menu List
<Management Settings>
3S2W-061
Item
Description
<User Management>(P. 430)
You can configure the settings for managing users of the machine.
<Device Management>(P. 432)
You can manage information about the hardware and operations, as well as
various data required when using the machine functions.
<License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update You can configure the settings related to the Remote UI and software
Firmware>(P. 436)
available for the machine.
<Data Management>(P. 438)
You can configure settings to utilize data such as machine settings data or
perform data initialization.
<Security Settings>(P. 440)
You can configure the settings related to the user authentication function,
password, and encryption.
<Initialize All Data/Settings>
Restores all data including logs and setting values to their default settings.
Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 303)
429
Setting Menu List
<User Management>
3S2W-062
All the settings related to user management of the machine are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked
with a dagger ( ).
<System Manager Information Settings>(P. 430)
<Department ID Management>(P. 430)
<System Manager Information Settings>
Specify the ID or PIN exclusively for Administrators who have access privileges to <Network> and <Management
Settings>. ID is <System Manager ID> and PIN is <System Manager PIN>. You can also register the name of an
Administrator. Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 226)
<System Manager ID and PIN>
Enter a number for the System Manager ID and PIN.
<System Manager ID>
<System Manager PIN>
<System Manager Name>
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of an Administrator.
<Department ID Management>
Set the Department ID Management function to control access to the machine by using multiple IDs.
Department ID Management(P. 228)
Setting the
Touch panel model
<Department ID Management>
<Off>
<On>
<Allow Print Jobs (Unknown IDs)>
<Off>
<On>
Black and white LCD model
<Off>
<On>
For the touch panel model
● You can select <Register/Edit> to register department IDs and edit the settings of the registered IDs.
● You can select <Count Mngt.> to check the total number of pages for jobs that have been executed to date
on a department ID basis.
430
Setting Menu List
For the black and white LCD model
● Specify whether to enable the Department ID Management. Use the Remote UI to perform department ID
registration or check the machine usage status by department ID.
431
Setting Menu List
<Device Management>
3S2W-063
All the settings related to management of information for the hardware and operations, as well as about management
of data required when using the machine functions are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a
dagger ( ).
<Device Information Settings>(P. 432)
<Select Country/Region>(P. 432)
<Display Job Log>(P. 433)
<Use NFC>(P. 433)
<Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)>/<Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)>(P. 434)
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 434)
<Canon Genuine Mode>(P. 435)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with "*1" cannot be imported or exported.
● Settings marked with "*2" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country
or region.
● Settings marked with "*3" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items
<Device Information Settings>
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name and the installation location to identify the machine.
<Device Name>
<Location>
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Device Information
Settings> Select <Device Name> or <Location> Enter the device name or location (
Text(P. 121) )
Entering
<Apply>
<Select Country/Region> *1 *2
Specify the country or region where the machine is used. The default setting may vary depending on the setting
selected at initial power-on.
<Austria (AT)>
<Belarus (BY)>
<Belgium (BE)>
<Czech Republic (CZ)>
<Denmark (DK)>
<Egypt (EG)>
<Netherlands (NL)>
<Norway (NO)>
<Poland (PL)>
<Portugal (PT)>
<Russia (RU)>
<Saudi Arabia (SA)>
432
Setting Menu List
<Finland (FI)>
<France (FR)>
<Germany (DE)>
<Greece (GR)>
<Hungary (HU)>
<Ireland (IE)>
<Italy (IT)>
<Jordan (JO)>
<Luxembourg (LU)>
<Menu>
<Slovenia (SI)>
<South Africa (ZA)>
<Spain (ES)>
<Sweden (SE)>
<Switzerland (CH)>
<Ukraine (UA)>
<Great Britain (GB)>
<Other>
<Management Settings>
<Device Management>
<Select Country/Region>
Select
a country or region
<Display Job Log>
Select whether to display printing logs on the machine display.
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu>
or <On>
<Management Settings> <Device Management>
<OK> Restart the machine
<Display Job Log>
Select <Off>
<Display Job Log>
Select <Off>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
or <On>
<Management Settings>
Restart the machine
<Device Management>
<Use NFC> *3
Select whether to allow printing by touching an NFC-capable mobile device to the NFC mark on the machine's
operation panel.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Management Settings>
<Device Management>
433
<Use NFC>
Select <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
<Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)>/<Displ. Consmbls.
Info (RUI/Toner Status)>
Set whether to display a button in the Remote UI or Toner Status for accessing the Web site for purchasing toner
cartridges. Also set whether to use Toner Status.
<Displ. Cnsmbls. Purch. Btn.(RUI)>/<Displ. Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)>
<Off>
<On>
<Toner Status Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<Displ. Consmbls. Purchase Btn.>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Display Consumables
Information (RUI/Toner Status)>/<Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)> Specify the settings
<Displ. Cnsmbls. Purch. Btn.(RUI)>/<Displ. Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)>
Select <Off> to prevent a button that accesses sites for purchasing toner cartridges from being displayed in the
Remote UI.
<Toner Status Settings>
If you do not want to use Toner Status, select <Off>. To prevent a button that accesses sites for purchasing
toner cartridges from being displayed in Toner Status, select <On> and then <Off>.
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>
Specify whether to display a message prompting you to check paper settings when loading the paper drawer into the
machine.
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
434
Setting Menu List
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management>
Select <Off> or <On> <OK> Restart the machine
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management>
Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>
<Canon Genuine Mode>
The mode for when Canon genuine toner cartridges are used.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Management Settings>
<Device Management>
<Canon Genuine Mode>
Select
<Off> or <On>
● When necessary, the service representative may change the setting. If this item is not displayed, contact the
administrator of the machine.
435
Setting Menu List
<License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update
Firmware>
3S2W-064
All the settings related to the software and system options available for the machine as well as about Register License
are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<Register License>(P. 436)
<Remote UI Settings>(P. 436)
<Update Firmware>(P. 437)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with "*1" cannot be imported or exported.
● Settings marked with "*2" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items.
<Register License> *1 *2
Enter the license key for a system option that can be used on the machine.
License Registration(P. 503)
<Remote UI Settings> *1
Configure settings for using the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to configure machine settings from a Web
browser.
<Remote UI>/<Use Remote UI>
Select whether to use the Remote UI ( Disabling Remote UI(P. 276) ). When using Remote UI, you can also
specify whether to use the TLS encrypted communication ( Configuring the Key and Certificate for
TLS(P. 248) ).
Touch panel model
<Use Remote UI>
<Off>
<On>
<Use TLS>
<Off>
<On>
Black and white LCD model
<Off>
<On>
<Use TLS>
<Off>
436
Setting Menu List
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other> <Remote UI Settings>
Select <On> in <Use Remote UI> Select <Off> or <On> in <Use
TLS> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
<Remote UI>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Remote UI
Settings> <Use Remote UI> <On> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
<Restrict Access>/<Remote UI Access Security Settings>
Specify so that entry of a PIN is required for access to the Remote UI. Set a PIN of up to 7 digits. All users use a
common PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 234)
<Off>
<On>
<Remote UI Access PIN>
<Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware>
<Remote UI Settings> <Restrict Access>/<Remote UI Access Security Settings> <On> Enter
a PIN
<Apply>
Enter the PIN (Confirm)
<Apply>
<Update Firmware> *1
Select how to install the firmware update according to the environment of the machine.
Firmware(P. 299)
<Via PC>
<Via Internet>
<Version Information>
437
Updating the
Setting Menu List
<Data Management>
3S2W-065
The settings for utilizing the machine settings and for initializing data are listed with descriptions. Default settings are
marked with a dagger ( ).
<Import/Export>(P. 438)
<Enable Prod. Ext'd Survey Prog.>/<Enable Product Extended Survey Program>(P. 439)
<Initialize Key and Certificate>(P. 439)
<Initialize Menu>(P. 439)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be imported or exported.
<Import/Export> *
You can import and export various settings of the machine by using a USB memory device. For more information
about the available USB memory devices and how to insert/remove the USB memory device, see Using a USB
Memory Device(P. 165) .
<Import>
<Export>
Import
<Menu>
<Yes>
<Management Settings> <Data Management>
Enter the password <Apply>
<Import/Export>
<Import>
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Import/Export>
Enter the password <Apply> Enter the password (Confirm) <Apply>
<Export>
Export
When import is executed
● The machine automatically restarts after the import process has finished.
438
Setting Menu List
<Enable Prod. Ext'd Survey Prog.>/<Enable Product Extended Survey
Program>
Enable or disable the Product Extended Survey Program (a program for the machine usage survey).
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Enable Prod. Ext'd Survey
Prog.> Select <Off> or <On> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management>
Program> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
<Enable Product Extended Survey
<Initialize Key and Certificate> *
Select to restore [Key and Certificate Settings] and [CA Certificate Settings] to the factory defaults.
and Certificate(P. 302)
Initializing Key
<Initialize Menu> *
Select to restore the settings listed below to the factory defaults. You can restore all the settings listed below at once,
or you can restore individual settings separately. Initializing Menu(P. 302)
<Preferences>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Function Settings>
<Management Settings>
<Initialize All>
439
Setting Menu List
<Security Settings>
3S2W-066
All the settings related to the authentication function and encryption are listed with descriptions. Default Settings are
marked with a dagger ( ).
<Authentication/Password Settings>(P. 440)
<Encryption Settings>(P. 441)
<Verify System at Startup>(P. 441)
<Authentication/Password Settings>
You can reinforce the security of the authentication function.
<Authentication Function Settings>
Configure the security functions for user authentication.
<Lockout>/<Lockout Settings>
When a user has failed user authentication, specify whether to disable the user from temporarily logging in
to the machine (lockout). When <On> is selected, specify how many consecutive times failures are permitted
before lockout is activated and also the time required before a user can log in again after lockout.
<Enable Lockout>
<Off>
<On>
<Lockout Threshold>
1
to 10 (time(s))
<Lockout Period>
1
to 60 (min.)
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Authentication/Password Settings>
<Authentication Function Settings> <Lockout> Select <On> in <Enable Lockout> Specify
each setting item <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Authentication/Password Settings>
<Authentication Function Settings> <Lockout Settings> <Enable Lockout> <On> Specify
each setting item Restart the machine
● This option is not applied to login using the department ID.
440
Setting Menu List
<Encryption Settings>
Configure a setting for disabling a weak encryption or the key and certification using a weak encryption.
<Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.>/<Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption>
<Off>
<On>
<Prohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.>/<Prohibit Key/Cert. with Weak Encryption>
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Encryption Settings> Select <On>
in <Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.> Select <Off> or <On> in <Prohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.>
<Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Encryption Settings> <Prohibit Use
of Weak Encryption> <On> <Prohibit Key/Cert. with Weak Encryption> Select <Off> or
<On> Restart the machine
<Verify System at Startup>
When the machine starts or when an application (in Application Library) is executed, verification is performed to
determine that the system or application has not been tampered. If tampering is detected, the machine enters a state
to wait for firmware update. In this case, perform a firmware update operation from a computer. Updating the
Firmware(P. 299)
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Management Settings>
Startup>
<On>
<Yes> (
)
<Security Settings>
<Verify System at
Restart the machine automatically
● If nothing is displayed even after a while, system recovery may be impossible. In this case, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
● If an application installed after shipping of the machine from the factory has been tampered, it needs to be
reinstalled on the machine.
441
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................................... 443
Regular Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................... 445
Cleaning the Exterior .................................................................................................................................... 446
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly ....................................................................................................................... 447
Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB) .................................................................................................................... 450
Replacing the Toner Cartridge ......................................................................................................................... 451
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables ......................................................................................... 457
Relocating the Machine .................................................................................................................................... 458
Adjusting Image Quality ................................................................................................................................... 460
Adjusting Gradation ..................................................................................................................................... 461
Correcting "Print Color Mismatch" ................................................................................................................ 462
Adjusting Print Position ................................................................................................................................ 463
Viewing the Counter Value ............................................................................................................................... 465
Printing Reports and Lists ................................................................................................................................ 466
Consumables ..................................................................................................................................................... 470
442
Maintenance
Maintenance
3S2W-067
This chapter describes upkeep of the machine, including how to clean the machine and adjustment of print quality.
◼ Basic Cleaning
Regular Cleaning(P. 445)
◼ Replacing Consumables
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 451)
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 457)
Consumables(P. 470)
◼ Adjusting and Managing the Machine
443
Maintenance
Relocating the Machine(P. 458)
Adjusting Image Quality(P. 460)
Viewing the Counter Value(P. 465)
Printing Reports and Lists(P. 466)
444
Maintenance
Regular Cleaning
3S2W-068
Regularly clean the machine to prevent deterioration in printing quality and to ensure that you use it safely and easily.
Where to Clean
Exterior of the machine and ventilation slots
Cleaning the Exterior(P. 446)
Internal fixing assembly and transfer belt
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 447)
Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB)(P. 450)
445
Maintenance
Cleaning the Exterior
3S2W-069
Regularly wipe the exterior of the machine, especially around the ventilation slots, to keep the machine in good
condition.
1
Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
● When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted.
2
Clean the exterior of the machine and the ventilation slots.
● Use a soft, well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water.
● To locate the ventilation slots, see
Front Side(P. 88) .
3
Wait for the exterior of machine to dry completely.
4
Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.
446
Maintenance
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly
3S2W-06A
If the fixing assembly is dirty, the printout may get smudged. To clean the fixing assembly, perform the following
procedure. Note that you cannot clean the fixing assembly when the machine has documents waiting to be printed. To
clean the fixing assembly, you need plain A4 or Letter size paper. Set the paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose
tray before performing the following procedure. Loading Paper(P. 126)
For LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw(P. 447)
For LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw(P. 448)
● Prior to performing cleaning, make sure that there remains a sufficient amount remaining in the toner
cartridges.
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 457)
For LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
There are two ways of cleaning, from which you should choose one depending on how the paper is smudged. To clean
the fixing assembly, first perform <Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>/<Clean Fix. Assbl. (Rdc. Back
Side Stain)>. If this results in no effect, then try <Clean Fixing Assembly>.
◼ Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)
● Cleaning will be more effective if it is performed about one hour after completion of the previous printing
session.
● You can also configure so that cleaning is automatically performed in effective timing.
Assembly>(P. 355)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 108)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Maintenance>.
3
4
5
<Auto Clean Fixing
Select <Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>/<Clean Fix. Assbl.
(Rdc. Back Side Stain)>.
Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine.
Select <OK>
<Start>.
● On the black and white LCD model, press
.
447
Maintenance
➠ Cleaning starts. When a message appears notifying that cleaning is complete, press
to return to the
Home screen.
● When <Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>/<Clean Fix. Assbl. (Rdc. Back Side Stain)>
is complete, a sheet of blank paper is ejected. If the symptom does not improve, then also perform
<Clean Fixing Assembly>.
◼ Clean Fixing Assembly
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 108)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Maintenance>.
3
Select <Clean Fixing Assembly>.
4
5
Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine.
Select <OK>
<Start>.
● On the black and white LCD model, press
.
➠ Cleaning starts. When a message appears notifying that cleaning is complete, press
to return to the
Home screen.
● When <Clean Fixing Assembly> is complete, a sheet of paper with a printed pattern is ejected.
For LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw
◼ Clean Fixing Assembly
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 108)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Maintenance>.
3
Select <Clean Fixing Assembly>.
4
5
Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine.
Select <OK>
<Start>.
448
Maintenance
● On the black and white LCD model, press
.
➠ Cleaning starts. When a message appears notifying that cleaning is complete, press
to return to the
Home screen.
● When <Clean Fixing Assembly> is complete, a sheet of paper with a printed pattern is ejected.
449
Maintenance
Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB)
3S2W-06C
Dirt may adhere to the transfer belt inside the machine and cause the print quality to deteriorate. To clean the transfer
belt, perform the following procedure. Note that you cannot clean the transfer belt when the machine has documents
waiting to be printed.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 108)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Maintenance>.
3
Select <Clean ITB>.
4
Select <Start>.
➠ Cleaning starts. When a message appears stating that cleaning is complete, press
Home screen.
450
to return to the
Maintenance
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
3S2W-06E
A warning message appears in the display when the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low or when printing
is no longer possible because of toner depletion. Note that the print quality may suffer if you continue printing without
resolving this issue. You can check the amount remaining in the toner cartridges on the display ( Checking the
Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 457) ).
When a Message Appear(P. 451)
When Printouts are Poor in Quality(P. 453)
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 453)
When a Message Appear
The message that is displayed depends on the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. Depending on which
message is displayed, prepare a new toner cartridge ( Consumables(P. 470) ) or replace the current toner cartridge
with a new one ( Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 453) ).
● Where "XXXX" appears in the descriptions below, the toner cartridge color black, yellow, magenta, or cyan
appears in the actual messages.
<Prepare cartridge.>/<Prepare the XXXX cartridge.>
This message notifies you that a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Make sure that you have a
replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print
a large job.
When a message is displayed
● When printing, you can continue printing the original.
● If a message is displayed for the black toner cartridge while an I-Fax document is being received, the
machine does not perform printing so that unclear print is avoided. To continue printing even if the
amount remaining in toner cartridge is running low, set <Continue Print. When Cart. Low>/<Continue
Print. When Amount in Cart. Low> to <On>. <Continue Print. When Cart. Low>/<Continue Print.
When Amount in Cart. Low>(P. 416)
Specify when a message is displayed
● You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers
a message. <Display Timing for Cart. Prep.>/<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>(P. 309)
451
Maintenance
<Low Cartridge Level>
This message notifies you that a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Make sure that you have a
replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print
a large job. This appears when <Action When Warning> is set to <Stop Printing> ( <Action When
Warning>(P. 311) ).
<Display Cartridge Replacement Steps>/<Display Recovery Steps>
Displays the procedure for replacing a toner cartridge. Follow the on-screen instructions to replace the toner
cartridge.
<Continue Printing>
You can end a printing stoppage state and continue printing.
● If a message is displayed for the black toner cartridge while an I-Fax document is being received, the
machine does not perform printing so that unclear print is avoided. Instead, the received data is stored in
memory. To continue printing even if the amount remaining in toner cartridge is running low, set
<Continue Print. When Cart. Low>/<Continue Print. When Amount in Cart. Low> to <On>. <Continue
Print. When Cart. Low>/<Continue Print. When Amount in Cart. Low>(P. 416)
Specify when a message is displayed
● You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers
a message. <Display Timing for Cart. Prep.>/<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>(P. 309)
<End of cartridge lifetime.>/<End of Cart. Lifetime>
This message, which appears with the toner cartridge color(s), notifies you that a toner cartridge has reached
the end of its lifetime. It is recommended that you replace the cartridge with a new one. You can continue
printing, but the print quality cannot be guaranteed.
<Display Cartridge Replacement Steps>/<Display Recovery Steps>
Displays the procedure for replacing a toner cartridge. Follow the on-screen instructions to replace the toner
cartridge.
<Continue Printing (Quality Not Guaranteed)>/<Continue Printing (Qlty. Not Guaranteed)>
You can continue printing, but the machine may malfunction.
452
Maintenance
<Cannot print. A non-Canon or counterfeit cartridge may be inserted.>/<Cannot print. A
non-Canon or counterfeit cartridge may be in use.>
This message notifies you that the machine may not print in optimum quality. It is recommended that you
replace this cartridge with a new one.
● When this message is displayed, you cannot continue printing.
<Canon Genuine Mode>(P. 435)
When Printouts are Poor in Quality
If your printouts begin to show any of the following features, one of your toner cartridges is consumed. Replace the
nearly empty toner cartridge even if no message is displayed. Procedure for Replacing the Toner
Cartridge(P. 453)
Streaks Appear/Printing is
Uneven
Toner smudges and splatters appear
Partially faded
Uneven density
Blank space of originals becomes grayish in printouts
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Follow the procedure below to replace the toner cartridge.
1
White Spots Appear
Open the front cover.
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw
453
Maintenance
2
Pull out the cartridge tray.
3
Pull the target toner cartridge straight up and out of the machine.
4
Remove the replacement toner cartridge from the packing material.
1
Pull the tab of the packing material on a flat place.
2
Pull out the toner cartridge.
454
Maintenance
5
Shake the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times as shown below to evenly distribute the toner
inside the cartridge.
● Do not touch the surface of the drum on the bottom of the toner cartridge.
6
Install the toner cartridge.
● Each toner cartridge color has its own slot in the toner cartridge tray, and this tray is indicated with a
corresponding color label (
). Place the toner cartridge into the slot that corresponds to its color.
● The bottom surface of the toner cartridge is exposed; therefore, be careful not to bump the toner
cartridge against the slot frame when inserting it into the slot.
7
Push the toner cartridge tray back in, and close the front cover.
455
Maintenance
● Immediately after the front cover is closed, the quick adjustment (
LINKS
Consumables(P. 470)
456
Quick Adjust(P. 461) ) starts.
Maintenance
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables
3S2W-06F
Use the procedure below to check the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. It is particularly important to check
whether you need to have a new toner cartridge ready before starting a large print job.
<Status Monitor> (
<Cartridge Level>
)
<Device Information>/<Device Status>
<Cartridge Information>/
Checking the amount remaining in the toner cartridges
● The displayed amount remaining in a toner cartridge can be used only as a guide and may differ from the
actual amount.
LINKS
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 451)
Consumables(P. 470)
457
Maintenance
Relocating the Machine
3S2W-06H
The machine is heavy. Make sure to follow the procedure below when moving the machine to avoid injury, and also
make sure to read the safety precautions before you begin. Important Safety Instructions(P. 2)
1
Turn OFF the machine and computer.
● When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted.
2
Disconnect the cables and cord from the machine in numerical order as in the
illustration below.
● Whether the cables with "*" are connected depends on your environment.
Power plug
Power cord
USB keyboard*
USB cable*
LAN cable*
3
When transporting the machine across a long distance, remove the toner cartridges.
4
Pull out the paper drawer until it stops, and remove it while lifting the front side.
5
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 453)
Close all the open covers and multi-purpose tray, and move the machine to a new
location.
● The machine is heavy ( Main Unit(P. 485) ). If you are using LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw, make sure to move
the machine with two or more people.
● Hold the lift handles, and lift up the machine. If you have attached the optional cassette feeding module,
leave the cassette feeding module on the floor and move it after moving the main unit of the machine.
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
458
Maintenance
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw
6
Carefully place the machine at the new installation site.
● For information about how to install the machine after relocating it, see "Getting Started."
Their Contents(P. 505)
459
Manuals and
Maintenance
Adjusting Image Quality
3S2W-06J
If the printing results are not satisfactory such as low image quality, poor reproducibility, or print color mismatch, try
the adjustments below.
◼ Auto Adjust Gradation
If the density or brightness of colors in printouts and originals are different, perform <Auto Adjust Gradation> to
improve color reproducibility. Adjusting Gradation(P. 461)
◼ Correct Print Color Mismatch
If the colors in printouts become blurry, perform <Correct Print Color Mismatch>. This problem may be caused by a
color mismatch. Correcting "Print Color Mismatch"(P. 462)
◼ Adjust Print Position
You can adjust the print position when the printed image is skewed or part of the image is outside the print range.
Adjusting Print Position(P. 463)
460
Maintenance
Adjusting Gradation
3S2W-06K
Gradation refers to the dark to light continuum of shades of a color. The more shades in the gradations of colors that
are printed, the more natural printouts seem. If color reproducibility becomes poor and the density and brightness of
printouts differs markedly from the originals, perform the appropriate auto adjustment.
● Adjustments may not be performed effectively if there is not sufficient toner cartridge remaining. Check the
amount remaining in the toner cartridges. If the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low, it is
recommended that you replace the toner cartridge. Checking the Remaining Amount of
Consumables(P. 457)
Quick Adjust
You can easily adjust the gradation. This adjustment may be automatically performed after you replace a toner
cartridge.
● Quick adjustment is not available while printing is performed.
● You can also configure so that a quick adjustment is automatically performed immediately after the machine
<Auto Correction Settings>(P. 348)
is turned ON or when a first print job is performed.
● You can set the machine to perform this adjustment automatically at a specified time every day.
Set. for Auto Adjust Grad.>/<Time Settings for Auto Adjust Gradation>(P. 318)
1
2
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 108)
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>
Gradation>.
<Adjust Image Quality>
3
Select <Quick Adjust>.
4
Select <Start>.
➠ The adjustment starts.
461
<Time
<Auto Adjust
Maintenance
Correcting "Print Color Mismatch"
3S2W-06L
Print color mismatch refers to a shift in the positions of colors that may occur when printing one image with multiple
toner cartridges. Print color mismatch can cause printouts to appear blurry. If print color mismatch occurs, perform
the following procedure. This adjustment is sometimes performed automatically, such as when toner cartridges are
replaced.
● You can set the machine to perform this adjustment automatically after the power is turned ON.
Correction Settings>(P. 348)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 108)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Adjust Image Quality>.
3
Select <Correct Print Color Mismatch>.
4
Select <Start>.
➠ The adjustment starts.
462
<Auto
Maintenance
Adjusting Print Position
3S2W-06R
If a document is printed off-center or out of the printable range, adjust the print position. You can adjust the print
position for each paper source. You can adjust the print position in the range -5.0 mm to +5.0 mm in increments of 0.1
mm.
Checking the Direction and Distance to Adjust
When you adjust the print position, specify the direction using "+" and "-" and the distance using "mm." For
<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>/<Adjust Vertically (Back Side)>, specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print
position in the up-to-down direction. For <Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>/<Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>,
specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print position in the left-to-right direction. To shift in the reverse
direction, specify a value with a "-" sign.
<Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>/<Adjust
Horizontally (Back Side)>
<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>/<Adjust Vertically
(Back Side)>
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 108)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Adjust Image Quality>.
3
Select <Adjust Print Position>.
4
Select the paper source.
● When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.
5
Select the combination of adjustment direction and printing side.
463
Maintenance
6
Set an adjustment value.
7
Press <Apply> (
).
Adjusting the Print Position for All Print Jobs
● You can use <Function Settings> in the setting menu of the operation panel to adjust the print position for
all print jobs, irrespective of the paper source. The print position can be adjusted in 0.5 mm increments
between -50.0 mm and +50.0 mm. <Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge>(P. 379)
464
Maintenance
Viewing the Counter Value
3S2W-06S
You can check separate totals for the number of pages used for color printouts and black and white printouts. The
number of printouts includes printouts of the memory media print and the list as well as printouts of data from
computers.
Touch Panel Model
<Check Counter>
Check the number of pages printed
<113: Total (Black & White/Small)>
Displays the total number of pages printed in black and white.
<123: Total (Full Color + Single Color/Small)>
Displays the total number of pages printed in color.
● <Monitoring Service> enables communication with a remote monitoring server. Execution of this item
enables information about the machine to be periodically sent to the remote monitoring server
connected to the machine.
● <Check Dev. Config.> enables you to check the optional units installed on the machine.
Black and White LCD Model
<Device Status>
<Check Counter>
Select the item you want to check
number of pages printed
<113: Total (Black & White/Small)>
Displays the total number of pages printed in black and white.
<123: Total (Full Color + Single Color/Small)>
Displays the total number of pages printed in color.
465
Check the
Maintenance
Printing Reports and Lists
3S2W-06U
You can print reports and lists to check information such as the total volume of printouts for each <Department ID>
and machine settings.
Configuring the Print Settings for Reports and Lists(P. 466)
Printing a Report on the Total Volume of Printouts by Department ID(P. 466)
Printing Lists of Settings(P. 467)
Printing Reports and Lists on the Usage Status of the Machine(P. 468)
Configuring the Print Settings for Reports and Lists
You can perform 2-sided printing of reports and lists.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Output Report>
Output>
<On>
<Report Settings>
<Default Settings for Report
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Output Reports>
Sided Printing>
<Report Settings>
<Default Settings for Report Output>
<2-
<On>
Printing a Report on the Total Volume of Printouts by Department ID
Department ID Management Report
When Department ID Management is enabled, you can check the total volume of printouts for each
<Department ID> by printing a Department ID Management Report. By checking the printout totals, you can
better manage your paper and toner cartridge supplies.
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Department ID Management Report> Check that
the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select
<Start>
Black and white LCD model
466
Maintenance
<Menu>
<Output Reports>
<Print List>
<Department ID Management Report>
the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine
Check that
<Yes>
Printing Lists of Settings
You can print information and settings registered in the machine as a list.
User Data List/System Manager Data List
You can check the list of the settings ( Setting Menu List(P. 305) ) as well as the content that has been
registered in the machine by printing a User Data List or a System Manager Data List. Both lists include the
firmware version and the paper size and type registered in the machine.
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> Select <User Data List> or <System Manager Data
List> Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and
select <Start>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Output Reports> <Print List> Select <User Data List> or <System Manager Data
List> Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine
<Yes>
● The User Data List does not include certain settings such as Network Settings and Management
Settings. To check all the settings items, print the System Manager Data List.
IPSec Policy List
You can check the list of policy names and the IPSec settings registered in the machine by printing an IPSec
Policy List.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Output Report>
<Print List>
<IPSec Policy List>
Check that the size and type of
paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
Black and white LCD model
467
Maintenance
<Menu>
<Output Reports>
<Print List>
<IPSec Policy List>
paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine
Check that the size and type of
<Yes>
Printing Reports and Lists on the Usage Status of the Machine
You can print the machine status report, the usage log of toner cartridges, and the list of fonts available in PCL or PS
mode.
Eco Report
You can check the monthly total volume of printouts and the power consumption with a report. This report
includes tips that are useful for saving paper and power consumption based on the usage status.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Output Report>
<Print List>
<Eco Report>
Check that the size and type of paper
displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Output Reports>
<Print List>
<Eco Report>
paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine
Check that the size and type of
<Yes>
● The amount of power consumption may vary depending on the environment and conditions where
the machine is used.
Consumables Status Report
You can check the consumables status installed in the machine with a report.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Output Report>
<Print List>
<Consumables Status Report>
Check that the size
and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Output Reports>
<Print List>
<Consumables Status Report>
and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine
468
Check that the size
<Yes>
Maintenance
PCL Font List
You can check the list of fonts available in PCL mode with a report.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Output Report>
<Print List>
<PCL Font List>
Check that the size and type of
paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Output Reports>
<Print List>
<PCL Font List>
Check that the size and type of
paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine
<Yes>
PS Font List
You can check the list of fonts available in PS mode with a report.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Output Report>
<Print List>
<PS Font List>
Check that the size and type of paper
displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Output Reports>
<Print List>
<PS Font List>
paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine
Check that the size and type of
<Yes>
Cartridge Log Report
You can check the usage logs of toner cartridges with a report.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Output Report>
<Print List>
<Cartridge Log Report>
Check that the size and
type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Output Reports>
<Print List>
<Cartridge Log Report>
type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine
469
Check that the size and
<Yes>
Maintenance
Consumables
3S2W-06W
The following is a guide to the estimated replacement time for the consumables used in
this machine. Purchase consumables at your local authorized Canon dealer. Observe
safety and health precautions when storing and handling consumables. For optimum
print quality, using Canon genuine Toner, Cartridge and Parts is recommended.
● To handle and store consumables, observe precautions in "Getting Started" provided for this product.
● Depending on the installation environment, printing paper size, or original type, you may need to replace
consumables before the end of the estimated lifetime.
● Specifying an auto shutdown time shorter than the default setting (4 hours) may shorten the life of the toner
cartridges.
◼ Toner Cartridges
Supplied Toner Cartridges
The average yield and the weight of the toner cartridge that comes with the machine are shown below.
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
● Black
Average yield *
1,200 sheets
Weight
Approx. 2.2 kg
● Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan)
Average yield *
1,200 sheets
Weight
Approx. 2.2 kg
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw
● Black
Average yield *
910 sheets
Weight
Approx. 2.1 kg
● Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan)
470
Maintenance
Average yield *
680 sheets
Weight
Approx. 2.1 kg
Replacement Toner Cartridges
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Average yield and weight of toner cartridge
Canon Cartridge 055 Black
● Average yield*
2,300 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 2.2 kg
Canon Cartridge 055 Yellow
Canon Cartridge 055 Magenta
Canon Cartridge 055 Cyan
Canon Cartridge 055 H Black
Canon Cartridge 055 H Yellow
Canon Cartridge 055 H Magenta
Canon Cartridge 055 H Cyan
● Average yield*
2,100 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 2.2 kg
● Average yield*
7,600 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 2.6 kg
● Average yield*
5,900 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 2.6 kg
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw
Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Average yield and weight of toner cartridge
Canon Cartridge 054 Black
Canon Cartridge 054 Yellow
Canon Cartridge 054 Magenta
Canon Cartridge 054 Cyan
Canon Cartridge 054 H Black
Canon Cartridge 054 H Yellow
Canon Cartridge 054 H Magenta
Canon Cartridge 054 H Cyan
● Average yield*
1,500 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 2.1 kg
● Average yield*
1,200 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 2.1 kg
● Average yield*
3,100 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 2.2 kg
● Average yield*
2,300 sheets
● Weight
471
Maintenance
Approx. 2.2 kg
* The average yield is based on "ISO/IEC 19798" (the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner
cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that contain printer
components" issued by ISO [International Organization for Standardization]) when printing A4 size paper with the default
print density setting.
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges
● Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of
counterfeit toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not
responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.
For more information, see global.canon/ctc.
● When replacing toner cartridges, see
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 451) .
472
Troubleshooting (FAQ)
Troubleshooting (FAQ)
Troubleshooting (FAQ) ................................................................................................................................ 474
473
Troubleshooting (FAQ)
Troubleshooting (FAQ)
3S2W-06X
When a problem occurs, check this chapter to find out solutions before contacting Canon.
474
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix ............................................................................................................................................................. 476
Third Party Software ......................................................................................................................................... 478
Feature Highlights ............................................................................................................................................ 479
Going Green and Saving Money ................................................................................................................... 480
Improving Efficiency ..................................................................................................................................... 481
So Much More .............................................................................................................................................. 482
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................... 484
Main Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 485
Available Paper ............................................................................................................................................. 489
Cassette Feeding Module-AF ........................................................................................................................ 493
Printer Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 494
Management Functions ................................................................................................................................ 497
System Environment .................................................................................................................................... 499
Network Environment .................................................................................................................................. 500
Options .............................................................................................................................................................. 501
Optional Equipment ..................................................................................................................................... 502
System Options ............................................................................................................................................ 503
Manuals and Their Contents ............................................................................................................................. 505
Using User's Guide ............................................................................................................................................ 506
Screen Layout of User's Guide ...................................................................................................................... 507
Viewing User's Guide .................................................................................................................................... 510
Basic Windows Operations ............................................................................................................................... 512
Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 519
475
Appendix
Appendix
3S2W-07F
This chapter contains technical specifications of this machine, instructions on how to use the User's Guide, disclaimers,
copyright information, and other important information for customers.
◼ Machine Specifications
See the following section(s) when you want to check the specifications of the main unit and optional equipment,
network environment, print function, and so on.
Specifications(P. 484)
◼ Using Optional Equipment
See the following section(s) when you want to check what options are available to use this machine more conveniently
and more effectively.
Options(P. 501)
◼ Referencing the Manual of This Machine
See the first of the following sections when you want to be sure of the kinds of the manuals describing the functions of
the machine and how to operate the machine. When you want to know how to read and use the User's Guide (this
manual), see the second section.
Manuals and Their Contents(P. 505)
Using User's Guide(P. 506)
◼ Others
See the following section(s) when you want to get useful information, and check the disclaimers and copyright
information.
476
Appendix
Third Party Software(P. 478)
Feature Highlights(P. 479)
Basic Windows Operations(P. 512)
Notice(P. 519)
477
Appendix
Third Party Software
3S2W-07H
For information related to third-party software, click the following icon(s).
LBP664Cx
LBP663Cdw
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw
478
Appendix
Feature Highlights
3S2W-07J
This section describes tips for leveraging the features of the machine by category. You can make use of the features
according to your intended purposes and operating environment.
Going Green and Saving Money(P. 480)
Improving Efficiency(P. 481)
So Much More(P. 482)
479
Appendix
Going Green and Saving Money
3S2W-07K
There are lots of ways to cut back on paper, toner, power, and expenses.
2-Sided Printing
Sleep Mode
You can use the 2-sided printing function to print data from
your computer and print received I-Fax documents. Because
For saving energy and money, a sleep mode that
powers down a machine when nobody is using it has
become an essential feature. This machine will enter
sleep mode automatically, and can also be put to
you'll only be using half the paper you would otherwise, you
can cut your paper costs in half. To save even more, combine
2-sided printing with N on 1 printing of multiple pages on
one sheet of paper. You can print up to 32 pages on a single
sheet, which is both economical and environmentally
friendly.
Printing from a Computer(P. 169)
<Receive>(P. 416)
<I-Fax Settings>
Sides>
<Print on Both
480
sleep whenever you want. Press
once to put the
machine to sleep. Press it again to instantly wake
the machine back into action.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 163)
Appendix
Improving Efficiency
3S2W-07L
Here are some simple operations that can make complicated tasks more efficient.
Print Images Right Off Your USB Memory Device
Remote Management with Remote UI
Plug a USB memory device into the machine and you
can print images and documents directly, without
Remote UI lets you manage a lot from your computer, all
without having to go over to the machine. Configure
settings and keep an eye on the machine's status with an
intuitive, easy-to-understand Web browser interface that
you'll master immediately. Save your time and energy for
things other than taking care of the machine.
using a computer. You can even preview JPEG and
other images before you print, so there is no wasted
paper.
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory
Media Print)(P. 182)
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)
(P. 278)
Make Print Settings Quickly with Intuitive Operation
You can easily specify the page layout as well as binding position, switching
between 1-sided and 2-sided printing, etc. intuitively on the preview image in
the printer driver. The simple click-operation allows you to conveniently make
settings while viewing how settings are applied.
Printing from a Computer(P. 169)
481
Appendix
So Much More
3S2W-07R
There are a variety of features for whatever you need to do - at home, in the office, or even on the road.
Application Library to execute useful functions in onetouch button operation
Using a smartphone/tablet
Application Library is a facility that makes it possible that
frequently used operations such as printing a usual
At times such as when you want to quickly print out a
proposal you completed on a tablet while travelling to a
business destination, Canon PRINT Business comes in
handy. Even in environments without a wireless LAN
router, you can connect to the machine with a mobile
device wirelessly and directly.
PCless, quick, and easy! An even broader range of
possibilities for work/play with functionality made for
this age of speed.
document and checking the consumables information as
well as convenient functions are registered in the form of
applications. You can execute these applications in onetouch button operation from the Home screen. Make the
best use of Application Library for time reduction and
operational accuracy enhancement. For more
information, see the manual on Application Library on the
online manual website.
Easy Printing with Google Cloud Print
Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 200)
Keep Your Printouts Private
482
Appendix
Hook up to Google Cloud Print with your laptop or
cell phone, send your data, and out come your
printed documents. With this machine, Google
Cloud Print, and your mobile device, print whenever
you want from wherever you want.
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 219)
Normally, when you print something from your computer, it
comes out of the printer right away. However, if you have
sensitive documents, this may not be what you want. Just use
secure printing and no one will be able to print your
documents without entering your password on the machine's
operation panel. Don't let your confidential documents lie
exposed on the tray for everyone to see.
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)
(P. 177)
Go Wireless
No cables, easy installation, simple maintenance. If you've got a WPS wireless
LAN router, bypass the settings process altogether and be ready to go before
you know it. Enjoy the kind of clutter-free and easy to use document system that
you can only get from wireless. Compatible with IEEE 802.11b/g/n for stress-free
wireless, and also supports WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP) for
tighter security.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
483
Appendix
Specifications
3S2W-07S
Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.
◼ Machine Specifications
Main Unit(P. 485)
Available Paper(P. 489)
◼ Specifications of Optional Equipment
Cassette Feeding Module-AF(P. 493)
◼ Functional Specifications
Printer Functions(P. 494)
Management Functions(P. 497)
◼ Environment To Use the Machine
System Environment(P. 499)
Network Environment(P. 500)
484
Appendix
Main Unit
3S2W-07U
● For information on paper sizes and types for each paper source, see "
Type
Desktop
Color Supported
Full Color
Resolution for Writing
600 dpi x 600 dpi
Number of Tones
256
Acceptable Paper Stock
Paper Sizes
Available Paper(P. 489) ."
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw:
● Max: 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm
● Min (Paper Drawer): 98.0 mm x 148.0 mm
● Min (Multi-Purpose Tray): 76.2 mm x 127.0 mm
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw:
● Max: 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm
● Min: 76.2 mm x 127.0 mm
Paper Weight
● Paper Drawer: 60 g/m² to 200 g/m²
● Multi-Purpose Tray: 60 g/m² to 200 g/m²
Paper Type
Warm-Up Time *1
Available Paper(P. 489)
After Powering ON
13.0 seconds or less
Returning from the Sleep mode
2.0 seconds or less
First Print Time
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw:
(A4)
● Full Color: Approx. 8.6 seconds
● Black-and-White: Approx. 7.7 seconds
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw:
● Full Color: Approx. 10.5 seconds
● Black-and-White: Approx. 10.4 seconds
Print Speed *2
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw:
(A4)
● Full Color: 27 sheets/minute
● Black-and-White: 27 sheets/minute
485
Appendix
LBP623Cdw:
● Full Color: 21 sheets/minute
● Black-and-White: 21 sheets/minute
LBP621Cw:
● Full Color: 18 sheets/minute
● Black-and-White: 18 sheets/minute
Paper Feeding System/Capacity *3 LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw:
Paper Drawer
250 sheets (80 g/m²)/250 sheets (64 g/m²) x 1
Multi-Purpose Tray
50 sheets (80 g/m²)/50 sheets (64 g/m²) x 1
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw:
Paper Drawer
250 sheets (80 g/m²)/250 sheets (64 g/m²) x 1
Manual Feed Slot
1 sheet
Paper Output System/Capacity *3 LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw:
Output Tray
150 sheets (75 g/m²)
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw:
Output Tray
100 sheets (60 g/m² to 90 g/m²)
Power Source
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw:
AC 220 V - 240 V, 3.3 A, 50 Hz/60 Hz
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw:
AC 220 V - 240 V, 2.4 A, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption *1
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw:
Maximum Power Consumption
1,360 W or less
During Sleep Mode
● Approx. 0.6 W (USB connection)
● Approx. 0.6 W (wired LAN connection)
● Approx. 0.6 W (wireless LAN connection)
With the Main Power Turned OFF
0.3 W or less
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw:
Maximum Power Consumption
850 W or less
486
Appendix
During Sleep Mode
● Approx. 0.8 W (USB connection)
● Approx. 0.8 W (wired LAN connection)
● Approx. 0.8 W (wireless LAN connection)
With the Main Power Turned OFF
0.1 W or less
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
LBP664Cx:
476 mm x 469 mm x 379 mm
LBP663Cdw:
437 mm x 469 mm x 313 mm
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw:
430 mm x 418 mm x 287 mm
Weight
LBP664Cx:
Main Unit *4
Approx. 19.0 kg
Consumables
Consumables(P. 470)
LBP663Cdw:
Main Unit *4
Approx. 18.5 kg
Consumables
Consumables(P. 470)
LBP623Cdw:
Main Unit *4
Approx. 14.0 kg
Consumables
Consumables(P. 470)
LBP621Cw:
Main Unit *4
Approx. 12.8 kg
Consumables
Consumables(P. 470)
Installation Space
(W x D)
See "Getting Started"
Manuals and Their Contents(P. 505)
Memory Capacity
RAM: 1 GB
Environmental Conditions
Temperature: 10 °C to 30 °C
Humidity: 20 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
487
Appendix
*1May
vary depending on the environment and conditions under which the machine is being used.
*2Print
speed is measured based on internal testing using A4 size paper printed with 100% print ratio to original on onesided paper. Internal testing involved continuously printing the same one page of content on plain paper. Print speed
may vary depending on paper type, paper size or paper feeding direction.
The device may automatically pause or slow down in order to adjust printer condition such as controlling temperature of
a certain unit or limiting impact to image quality during continuous printing.
*3May
vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.
*4The
toner cartridges are not included.
488
Appendix
Available Paper
3S2W-07W
The paper types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following table.
◼ Supported Paper Sizes
: Available
: Unavailable
Paper Sizes
Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *2
A4 *3*4
B5
A5
Legal (LGL) *3
Letter (LTR) *3*4
Statement (STMT)
Executive (EXEC)
Oficio *3
Oficio (Brazil) *3
Oficio (Mexico) *3
Letter (Government) *3
Legal (Government) *3
Foolscap/Folio *3
Foolscap (Australia) *3
Legal (India) *3
3x5inch
Envelope No.10 (COM10)
*5
*6
489
Appendix
Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *2
Paper Sizes
Envelope Monarch
*5
*6
Envelope C5
*6
Envelope DL
*6
Custom Paper Size
*7
*1Includes
*8
the optional Cassette Feeding Module-AF.
*2Automatic
2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
*3Allows
you to print received I-Fax documents.
*4Allows
you to print reports or lists.
*5For
*9
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw only.
*6For
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw, it is recommended that you print from the paper drawer to obtain optimum print quality.
Printing from the manual feed slot may produce skewed printouts.
*7The
following custom sizes are available.
● LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw: 98.0 mm x 148.0 mm to 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm
● LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw: 76.2 mm x 127 mm to 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm
*8The
custom size ranging from 76.2 mm x 127 mm to 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm is available.
*9The
following custom sizes are available.
● LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw: 176 mm x 250 mm to 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm
● LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw: 182 mm x 257 mm to 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm
◼ Supported Paper Types
Chlorine-free paper can be used with this machine.
: Available
: Unavailable
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
Paper Type
Plain 1 *3*4
61 g/m² to 74 g/m²
Plain 2 *3*4
75 g/m² to 82 g/m²
Plain 3 *3*4
83 g/m² to 90 g/m²
Plain 4
91 g/m² to 105 g/m²
Heavy 1
106 g/m² to 119 g/m²
Heavy 2
120 g/m² to 128 g/m²
Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *2
490
Appendix
Paper Type
Heavy 3
129 g/m² to 163 g/m²
Thin 1 *3
60 g/m²
Recycled 1 *3*4
61 g/m² to 74 g/m²
Recycled 2 *3*4
75 g/m² to 82 g/m²
Color *3*4
61 g/m² to 74 g/m²
Coated 1
100 g/m² to 120 g/m²
Coated 2
121 g/m² to 150 g/m²
Coated 3
151 g/m² to 200 g/m²
Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *2
Labels
Envelope *5
*1Includes
the optional Cassette Feeding Module-AF.
*2Automatic
2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
*3Allows
you to print received I-Fax documents.
*4Allows
you to print reports or lists.
*5When
custom paper size is specified, <Envelope 1>/<Envelope 2> is displayed. If printing cannot be performed
properly with <Envelope 1> selected, change the selection to <Envelope 2>.
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw
Paper Type
Plain 1 *2*3
61 g/m² to 69 g/m²
Plain 2 *2*3
70 g/m² to 82 g/m²
Plain 3 *2*3
83 g/m² to 90 g/m²
Plain 4
91 g/m² to 105 g/m²
Heavy 1
106 g/m² to 120 g/m²
Heavy 2
121 g/m² to 163 g/m²
Paper Drawer Manual feed slot Automatic 2-sided printing *1
491
Appendix
Paper Type
Thin 1 *2
60 g/m²
Recycled 1 *2*3
61 g/m² to 69 g/m²
Recycled 2 *2*3
70 g/m² to 82 g/m²
Color *2*3
61 g/m² to 69 g/m²
Coated 1
100 g/m² to 120 g/m²
Coated 2
121 g/m² to 150 g/m²
Coated 3
151 g/m² to 200 g/m²
Paper Drawer Manual feed slot Automatic 2-sided printing *1
*4
Labels
Envelope
*4
*1Automatic
2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
*2Allows
you to print received I-Fax documents.
*3Allows
you to print reports or lists.
*4It
is recommended that you print from the paper drawer to obtain optimum print quality. Printing from the manual
feed slot may produce skewed printouts.
492
Appendix
Cassette Feeding Module-AF
3S2W-07X
Paper Sizes
● Max: 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm
● Min: 98.0 mm x 148.0 mm
Paper Weight
60 g/m² to 200 g/m²
Paper Drawers Capacity *
550 sheets (80 g/m²)/640 sheets (64 g/m²) x 1
Dimensions
437 mm x 469 mm x 136 mm
(W x D x H)
Weight
Approx. 6.0 kg
*May
vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.
493
Appendix
Printer Functions
3S2W-07Y
◼ UFR II Printer Function
Type
Print Size
Print Speed
Internal
Available Paper(P. 489)
Same as "Print Speed" in "Main Unit"
Main Unit(P. 485)
Resolution
Data Processing
1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) UFR II
Protocol Supported
TCP/IP: LPD, Port9100, WSD
Resident Fonts
None
Interface
USB
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wired LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
◼ PS Printer Function
Type
Print Size
Print Speed
Internal
Available Paper(P. 489)
Same as "Print Speed" in "Main Unit"
Main Unit(P. 485)
Resolution
Data Processing
1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) Adobe PS 3
494
Appendix
Protocol Supported
TCP/IP: LPD, Port9100, WSD
Resident Fonts
136 Roman
Interface
USB
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wired LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
◼ PCL Printer Function
Type
Print Size
Print Speed
Internal
Available Paper(P. 489)
Same as "Print Speed" in "Main Unit"
Main Unit(P. 485)
Resolution
Data Processing
1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpi (only for PCL6), 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) PCL6, PCL5
Protocol Supported
TCP/IP: LPD, Port9100, WSD
Resident Fonts
LBP664Cx
93 Roman
LBP663Cdw / LBP623Cdw
45 Roman
Interface
USB
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wired LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
495
Appendix
◼ Memory Media Print Function
Printable File Formats
● JPEG (DCF/Exif 2.21 or earlier/JFIF)
● TIFF (JPEG/MH/MR/MMR compression)
● PDF
496
Appendix
Management Functions
3S2W-080
◼ Firewall Settings
● Up to 16 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specified for both IPv4 and IPv6.
● The packet filters described in this section control communications over TCP, UDP, and ICMP.
● Up to 32 MAC addresses can be specified.
◼ IPSec
● IPSec that is supported by the machine conforms to RFC2401, RFC2402, RFC2406, and RFC4305.
● Windows Vista
● Windows 7
Operating system
● Windows 8
● Windows 8.1
● Windows 10
Connection mode
Transport mode
IKEv1 (main mode)
● Pre-shared key
Authentication method
Key exchange protocol
● Digital signature
Hash algorithm
● HMAC-SHA1-96
(and key length)
● HMAC-SHA2 (256 bits or 384 bits)
Encryption algorithm
(and key length)
● 3DES-CBC
● AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)
Diffie-Hellman (DH)
Key exchange algorithm/group (and key length)
● Group 1 (768 bits)
● Group 2 (1024 bits)
● Group 14 (2048 bits)
Hash algorithm
ESP
HMAC-SHA1-96
● 3DES-CBC
Encryption algorithm
(and key length)
● AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)
Hash algorithm/encryption algorithm (and key
length)
AH
Hash algorithm
AES-GCM (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)
HMAC-SHA1-96
● IPSec supports communication to a unicast address (or a single device).
● The machine cannot use both IPSec and DHCPv6 at the same time.
497
Appendix
◼ Registration of Keys and Certificates
● If you install a key or CA certificate from a computer, make sure that they meet the following requirements:
● Key: PKCS#12*1
Format
● CA certificate: X.509 DER/PEM
● Key: ".p12" or ".pfx"
File extension
● CA certificate: ".cer" or ".pem"
Public key algorithm
(and key length)
● RSA (512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, 4096 bits)
● DSA (1024 bits, 2048 bits, 3072 bits)
● ECDSA (P256, P384, P521)
● RSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384*2, SHA-512*2, MD2, MD5
Certificate signature algorithm
● DSA: SHA-1
● ECDSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512
Certificate thumbprint algorithm SHA1
*1Requirements
*2SHA384-RSA
for the certificate contained in a key are pursuant to CA certificates.
and SHA512-RSA are available only when the RSA key length is 1024 bits or more.
● The machine does not support use of a certificate revocation list (CRL).
◼ Definition of "Weak Encryption"
When <Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.> is set to <On>, the use of the following algorithms is prohibited.
Hash:
MD4, MD5, SHA-1
HMAC:
HMAC-MD5
Common key cryptosystem:
RC2, RC4, DES
Public key cryptosystem:
RSA encryption (512 bits/1024 bits), RSA signature (512 bits/1024 bits), DSA (512 bits/1024
bits), DH (512 bits/1024 bits)
● Even when <Prohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.>/<Prohibit Key/Cert. with Weak Encryption> is set to <On>, the
hash algorithm SHA-1, which is used for signing a root certificate, can be used.
498
Appendix
System Environment
3S2W-081
System Requirements for the Remote UI *1 Windows
● Windows 7 / 8.1 / 10: Internet Explorer 11 or later
● Windows 10: Edge
macOS
● Mac OS X 10.5 or later
● Safari 5.0.6 or later
Android
● Chrome
● UC Browser
iOS
● Safari
● UC Browser
I-Fax Receiving Server Software
● Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 SP3
● Microsoft Exchange Server 2010
● Microsoft Exchange Server 2013
● Microsoft Exchange Server 2016
● Lotus Domino R7.0
● Qpopper 4.0.19
System Requirements for the User's Guide Windows
● Internet Explorer 9 and later
● Microsoft Edge
● Firefox
● Firefox ESR
● Chrome*2
macOS
● Safari
● Firefox
● Chrome*2
Linux
● Firefox
iOS
● Safari*2
Android
● Chrome*2
System Requirements for NFC Function
*1Before
*2Only
● Android 5.0 or later
changing the settings of the machine, set your Web browser to enable all cookies and use JavaScript.
when browsing the manual on the Internet.
499
Appendix
Network Environment
3S2W-082
◼ Common Specifications
Protocol Supported
TCP/IP
● Frame type: Ethernet II
● Print applications: LPD, Raw, IPP, IPPS, WSD, Mopria, Google Cloud Print, AirPrint, Windows10
Mobile Print
◼ Wired LAN Specifications
Interface
10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T (RJ-45)
◼ Wireless LAN Specifications
Standard
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
Transmission Scheme
IEEE 802.11b (Modulation system: DS-SS)
IEEE 802.11g (Modulation system: OFDM method)
IEEE 802.11n (Modulation system: OFDM method)
Frequency Range
2.412 GHz to 2.472 GHz
Maximum Radio-Frequency Power Transmitte 15.9 dBm
Communication Mode
● Infrastructure Mode
● Access Point Mode
Security (encryption method)
Infrastructure Mode
● 128 (104)/64 (40) bit WEP
● WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
● WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
Access Point Mode
WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)
Connection Method
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup
500
Appendix
Options
3S2W-083
Installing options on the machine enables you to use more features.
◼ Knowing What Types of Options are Available
Optional Equipment(P. 502)
System Options(P. 503)
◼ Looking for Optional Equipment by Purpose
Adding a Paper Drawer
Cassette Feeding Module-AF(P. 502)
501
Appendix
Optional Equipment
3S2W-084
The functionality of the machine can be fully utilized by using the optional equipment described below. Optional
equipment can be purchased from the retail outlet where you purchased the machine or from your local Canon dealer.
Cassette Feeding Module-AF
Installing this cassette feeding module enables you to load paper of a different
size than that of paper loaded in the standard paper drawer. This surely reduces
the time and labor for paper replacement.
502
Appendix
System Options
3S2W-085
The machine performance can be enhanced even more by installing system options.
Barcode Printing Kit(P. 503)
License Registration(P. 503)
Barcode Printing Kit
This option enables you to generate barcodes in various formats. Note that if you want to print barcodes, PCL must be
enabled. For information on using the Barcode Printing Kit, see the Barcode Printing Guide (PDF manual).
License Registration
To activate certain system options, you need to obtain a license key and register the key to the machine.
◼ Obtaining a License Key
You can obtain a license key by using a web browser. Access the License Management System (http://
www.canon.com/lms/license/) and follow the procedure. As a part of the procedure, you are required to enter the
following numbers.
License Access Number
Check the license access number provided on the License Access Number Certificate that is included in the
package of the option.
Serial Number of the Machine
Check the serial number on the operation panel.
<Status Monitor>
<Device Information>
<Serial Number>
◼ Registering a License Key
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Management Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 108)
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 125)
3
Select <License/Other>
4
Confirm the message on the screen, and select <OK>.
<Register License>.
503
Appendix
5
Enter the license key using the numeric keys, and select <Apply>.
➠ Registration starts. Wait until the <Installation is complete. Changes will be effective after the main power
is turned OFF and ON.> message is displayed.
● If the <The feature required for installation is not present.> message is displayed, enable the functions
that are required to activate the option and register the license key again.
6
Select <Close>.
7
Restart the machine.
504
Appendix
Manuals and Their Contents
3S2W-086
The manuals listed below are included with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Getting Started
Read this manual first. It describes basic setup procedures, from removing the
packing materials to setting up the machine.
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw
LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw
User's Guide (This Manual)
This manual describes all the functions of the machine in a manual that is viewed
using a Web browser. You can browse information by category or enter a
keyword to search for pages on a specific topic. Using User's Guide(P. 506)
505
Appendix
Using User's Guide
3S2W-087
The User's Guide is a manual that can be viewed on your computer or mobile device and it describes all of the
functions of the machine. You can search from your intended use or enter a keyword to quickly find the page you are
looking for. The section describes the screen layout of the User's Guide and how to read the Guide. You can specify
how the appearance of the User's Guide looks.
◼ Screen Layout of User's Guide
This section describes the screens configuring the User's Guide and how to use the on-screen buttons.
Layout of User's Guide(P. 507)
Screen
◼ Viewing User's Guide
This section describes the meaning of the marks used in the User's Guide, how the keys on the operation panel and
the buttons on the computer display are represented, and other matters that help you understand the information
contained in the User's Guide. Viewing User's Guide(P. 510)
◼ Specifying How the Appearance of the User's Guide Looks
You can change the character size used in the User's Guide, and switch the screen layout to fit to the device you use to
view the User's Guide.
How to Find the Topic You Are Looking for
Search the contents
● You can find the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from the "Contents" on the left side of the
screen.
Search by keyword
● Perform a search by entering a keyword, such as "envelope" or "toner cartridge," and the pages containing
the keyword are displayed. You can find the page you are looking for from those results. You can also enter
phrases such as "connecting to a network." The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for
multiple keywords. For the organization of the search screen and how to operate the search screen, see
Search(P. 508) .
506
Appendix
Screen Layout of User's Guide
3S2W-088
The User's Guide is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.
Top Page
Appears when User's Guide is started.
/
Click
to also display all of the sections under the chapters. Click
to return to the previous display.
/
Click to toggle the display between the contents and search. When the table of contents is displayed, each
click on
switches between hiding and showing the display. When the search display is shown, each
click on
switches between hiding and showing the display.
Click to set parameters to determine how the User's Guide is displayed, such as character size or layout.
Click to display information on how to view the User's Guide, how to perform a search, and other
information.
/
Click to display the previous or following topic.
[Notice]
Click to view important information you should know when using the machine.
507
Appendix
Topic Page
Contains information about how to configure and use the machine.
Navigation
See what chapter topic you are currently viewing.
Click to jump to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click "Back" on your Web
browser.
/
Click
to display the hidden detailed descriptions. Click
to close the detailed descriptions.
Click to return to the page top.
Search
Click
to display the search window. Contains a text box to perform a search by keyword and find the page
you are looking for.
508
Appendix
[Enter keyword(s) here]
to display the search results. You can search for pages
Enter a keyword or keywords and click
containing all the keywords by separating the keywords by a space (blank). Also you can only search for
pages containing an exact phrase by enclosing the keywords in double quotation marks.
Search result
Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specified keywords. From the results, locate the
page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page.
● The specified keyword(s) are shown in bold in the search results.
509
Appendix
Viewing User's Guide
3S2W-089
This section describes the marks, buttons, screens, and other items used in the User's Guide. The warnings and
cautions are also given in the "Important Safety Instructions" in the "Getting Started" included with the machine. See
also these instructions.
Marks
Cautions regarding safety, restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine, useful tips, and
other information are indicated using the marks below.
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to
persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay
attention to these warnings.
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if
not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to
these cautions.
Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully,
and make sure not to perform the described operations.
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these
items carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the
machine or property.
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for
a procedure.
Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine.
Keys and Buttons Used in this Manual
Keys on the operation panel and buttons on the computer display appear in the following notation:
Type
Example
Keys on the operation panel
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Paper jammed.>
Settings displayed on the operation panel
Buttons and other text interfaces displayed on the computer display [Preferences]
● A case in which a user taps a button on the display for the touch panel model, and a case in which a
user presses a key on the operation panel for the black and white LCD model are described even
when their operations are the same. For example, the operation for displaying the <Status Monitor>
screen is represented by "Press <Status Monitor> (
510
)."
Appendix
/
/
(Black and White LCD Model)
,
, and
on the operation panel are used to select the target item in settings, but their description is
omitted in the User's Guide. The operation for selecting <XXXXX> using
or
and pressing
is
represented as shown below in the User's Guide.
1
Select <XXXXX>.
Computer Screens Used in This Manual
Unless otherwise noted, displays used in the User's Guide are those for the LBP664Cx. Depending on the model
or operating system you are using, the appearance of the displays used in this manual may slightly differ from
the actual displays. Also, the appearance of drivers and software may differ depending on their version.
Illustrations Used in This Manual
Unless otherwise noted, illustrations used in the User's Guide are those for the LBP664Cx. When differences are
significant, multiple illustrations are used with the model names, such as "LBPXXX / LBPXXX." The illustrations of
the toner cartridge are those for the Canon Cartridge 055.
511
Appendix
Basic Windows Operations
3S2W-08C
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 512)
Enabling [Network discovery](P. 512)
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 513)
Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 514)
Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 514)
Checking the Printer Port(P. 515)
Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 516)
Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected(P. 517)
When Printing from the Windows Store App(P. 518)
● Depending on the computer that you use, the operation may differ.
◼ Displaying the Printer Folder
Windows Vista
[Start] select [Control Panel]
[Printer].
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] select [Devices and Printers].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel]
Windows 10
[ ] select [Windows System]
Windows Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel]
select [Control Panel]
[View devices and printers].
[View devices and printers].
[Control Panel]
[Hardware and Sound]
[Devices and Printers].
double-click [Printers].
Windows Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel]
[Hardware]
[Devices and Printers].
◼ Enabling [Network discovery]
Enable [Network discovery] to view the computers on your network.
Windows Vista
[Start] select [Control Panel]
[Network discovery].
[View network status and tasks]
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
select [Turn on network discovery] under
[Change advanced sharing settings]
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
[Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
512
Appendix
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
[Change advanced sharing
Windows 10
[ ] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Network and Sharing Center]
discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
[Change advanced
select [Turn on network
[Change advanced sharing
◼ Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server
1
Open Windows Explorer.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [All Programs] or [Programs]
[Accessories]
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
select [File Explorer].
[Windows Explorer].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start]
select [File Explorer].
Windows 10/Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [File Explorer].
2
Select the printer server in [Network] or [My Network Places].
● To view computers on the network, you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for
computers.
➠ Shared printers are displayed.
513
Appendix
◼ Printing a Test Page in Windows
You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows.
1
Load A4 size paper in the paper drawer.
2
Open the printer folder.
3
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
4
Click [Print Test Page] in [General] tab.
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 128)
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 512)
[Properties].
➠ The test page is printed.
◼ Checking the Bit Architecture
If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32-bit or 64-bit Windows follow the procedure below.
1
Display [Control Panel].
514
Appendix
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
select [Control Panel].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 10/Server 2016
Proceed to step 2.
2
Display [System].
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012
Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security]
Windows 10/Server 2016
Click [ ] [Settings] [System]
[System].
select [About].
Windows Server 2008
Double-click [System].
3
Check the bit architecture.
For 32-bit versions
[32-bit Operating System] is displayed.
For 64-bit versions
[64-bit Operating System] is displayed.
◼ Checking the Printer Port
1
2
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 512)
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
515
Appendix
3
In the [Ports] tab, check that the port is selected correctly.
If you are using a network connection and have changed the machine's IP address
● You need to add a new port.
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 54)
◼ Checking Bidirectional Communication
1
2
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 512)
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
516
Appendix
3
In the [Ports] tab, make sure that the [Enable bidirectional support] check box is
selected.
◼ Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected
If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN network, click
SSID of the connected wireless LAN router.
517
,
,
, or
in the system tray to display the
Appendix
◼ When Printing from the Windows Store App
Windows 8/Server 2012
Display the charms on the right side of the screen
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Display the charms on the right side of the screen
use [Print].
Windows 10
Tap or click [Print] on the application
Tap or click [Devices]
The driver that you use
Tap or click [Devices]
[Print]
The driver that you use
[Print].
The driver that you
[Print].
● If you print using this method, only a limited number of print settings are available.
● If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed, go to
the desktop and follow the instructions in the displayed dialog box. This message appears when the
machine is set to display the user name during printing and similar instances.
518
Appendix
Notice
3S2W-08E
◼ IPv6 Ready Logo
The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-2
established by the IPv6 Forum.
◼ Product Information required by COMMISSION REGULATION (EU) No 801/2013 amending
Regulation (EC) No 1275/2008
Power consumption of the product in networked standby if wired network ports are connected and all wireless
network ports are activated (if they are available at the same time).
Model Name
Power consumption of the product in networked standby
LBP664Cx / LBP663Cdw / LBP623Cdw / LBP621Cw 3.0 W or less
● The above value(s) are the actual values for single machine, chosen arbitrarily, and may therefore vary from
the value of the machine in use. Optional network ports are not connected and/or activated in the
measurement.
◼ WEEE and Battery Directives
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE
Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this
indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a
concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when
you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible
impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated
with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural
resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, waste authority,
approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee, or www.canoneurope.com/battery.
519
Appendix
◼ Environmental Information
Reducing your environmental impact while saving money
Power Consumption and Activation Time
The amount of electricity a device consumes depends on the way the device is used. This product is designed and set
in a way to allow you to reduce your electricity costs. After the last print it switches to Ready Mode. In this mode it can
print again immediately if required. If the product is not used for a time, the device switches to its Power Save Mode.
The devices consume less power (Watt) in these modes.
If you wish to set a longer Activation Time or would like to completely deactivate the Power Save Mode, please
consider that this device may then only switch to a lower energy level after a longer period of time or not at all.
Canon does not recommend extending the Activation Times from the optimum ones set as default.
Energy Star ®
The Energy Star® programme is a voluntary scheme to promote the development and purchase of energy efficient
models, which help to minimise environmental impact.
Products which meet the stringent requirements of the Energy Star® programme for both environmental benefits and
the amount of energy consumption will carry the Energy Star® logo accordingly.
Paper types
This product can be used to print on both recycled and virgin paper (certified to an environmental stewardship
scheme), which complies with EN12281 or a similar quality standard. In addition it can support printing on media
down to a weight of 64g/m².
Lighter paper means less resources used and a lower environmental footprint for your printing needs.
Duplex printing (Standard duplex printing products only)
Duplex printing capability enables you to print on both sides automatically, and therefore helps to reduce the use of
valuable resources by reducing your paper consumption.
The duplex function has been auto enabled during the set up and driver installation and Canon strongly recommends
that you do not disable this function. You should continue to use the duplex function to reduce the environmental
impact of your work with this product at all times.
◼ Disclaimers
● The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
● CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR
EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
● If you do not have access to Adobe Reader to view the manuals in PDF format, try other programs such as PDF
Preview developed by Vivid Document Imaging Technologies.
◼ Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X, Safari, AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of
Apple Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Word and Excel are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome and Android are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.
UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may
be registered in certain jurisdictions.
UFST: Copyright © 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.
520
Appendix
Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright © 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763; 6,639,593;
6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as defined by Adobe Systems
Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'
implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item
refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed
by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript
language.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
The PDF logo is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other
countries.
Copyright © 2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Protected by U.S. Patents 6,185,684; 6,205,549; 7,213,269; 7,272,628; 7,278,168; Patents pending in the U.S. and other
countries.
521
Appendix
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as defined by Adobe Systems
Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'
implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item
refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed
by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript
language.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Adobe LiveCycle® Policy Server, PostScript, the PostScript Logo, and PostScript 3 are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.
◼ Copyright
Reproduction of the contents of this document in whole or in part without prior permission is prohibited.
◼ Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such images as scanned,
printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil
liability. A non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are
uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce any particular document,
and/or of the use of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance with your
legal advisor for guidance.
● Paper Money
● Travelers Checks
● Money Orders
● Food Stamps
● Certificates of Deposit
● Passports
● Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
● Immigration Papers
● Identifying Badges or Insignias
● Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
● Selective Service or Draft Papers
● Bonds or Other Certificates of Indebtedness
● Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental Agencies
● Stock Certificates
● Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of Title
● Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of Copyright Owner
V_180829
522
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,
Version 1.1.
This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:
http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
----------------------------------------------------------SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007
----------------------------------------------------------PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide
development of collaborative font projects, to support the font
creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to
provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and
improved in partnership with others.
The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modified and
redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The
fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,
redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved
names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,
however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The
requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to
any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS
"Font Software" refers to the set of files released by the Copyright
Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may
include source files, build scripts and documentation.
"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specified as such after the
copyright statement(s).
"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software
components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).
"Modified Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,
deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the
components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting
the Font Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical
writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,
modify, redistribute, and sell modified and unmodified copies of the
Font Software, subject to the following conditions:
523
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in
Original or Modified Versions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modified Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,
redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy
contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be
included either as stand-alone text files, human-readable headers or
in the appropriate machine-readable metadata fields within text or
binary files as long as those fields can be easily viewed by the user.
3) No Modified Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font
Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the
corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the
primary font name as presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font
Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any
Modified Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the
Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written
permission.
5) The Font Software, modified or unmodified, in part or in whole,
must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be
distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to
remain under this license does not apply to any document created using
the Font Software.
TERMINATION
This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are
not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
524
Third-Party Services
If you use third-party services through the PRODUCT, use of the services are subjected the conditions below.
When you access and/or obtain some third party content (such as text, images, videos, audios, or software)
through the SOFTWARE, except as expressly permitted by the content owner or by applicable law, you may
not (a) scrape, build databases or otherwise create permanent copies of such content, or keep cached copies
longer than permitted by the cache header; (b) copy, translate, modify, create a derivative work of, sell, lease,
lend, convey, distribute, publicly display or sublicense to any third party; (c) misrepresent the source or
ownership; and (d) remove, obscure, or alter any copyright, trademark or other proprietary rights notices, falsify
or delete any author attributions, legal notices or other labels of the origin or source of material.
-1-
The Software Subjected to the Other License Conditions
Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding
license conditions.
Table of Software
Names of Software
Terms and Conditions of the
License:
See Page
Adobe PostScript 3
3
Adobe PDF Scan Library
10
expat
13
HarfBuzz
14
libjingle
15
Lua
16
LuaSocket
17
Lune
18
MD4
19
Net-SNMP
20
OpenSSL
28
-2-
Adobe PostScript 3
Copyright 2007-2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated and its licensors.
All rights reserved.
Portions include software under the following terms:
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions of Pool.c_Copyright 1987 - NeXT, Inc., and portions of Graphics.c_Copyright
unpublished work.
1988 NeXT, Inc. as an
All Rights Reserved.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Apache Software License, Version 1.1
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
Portions Copyright (c) 1998-2000 The Apache Software Foundation.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgments normally appear.
4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact
apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name,
without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE
FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
-3-
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software
Foundation and was originally based on software copyright (c) 1999, International Business Machines, Inc.,
http://www.ibm.com.
For
more
information
on
the
Apache
Software
Foundation,
please
see
<http://www.apache.org/>.
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 1985, 1986 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
-4-
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by James A. Woods, derived from original work by
Spencer Thomas and Joseph Orost.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and
this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other
materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University
of California, Berkeley.
The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Portions Copyright (c) 1993
X Consortium
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THEX CONSORTIUM BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER INAN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR INCONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X
Consortium.
______________________________________________________________________________________
NOTICE REGARDING SABLOTRON
March 27, 2003
-5-
Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the "Sablotron
XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the
"License"). You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations
under the License.
The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance are
Copyright (C) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated are
available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from:
http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp
The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:
https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the
University of California.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
-6-
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu.
This code accompanies the book:
Alexandrescu, Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied". Copyright
(c) 2001. Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
The author or Addison-Welsey Longman make no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions developed by the University of California, Berkeley.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright © 1991-2005 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and
associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and associated documentation (the
"Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons
to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and
this permission notice appear in all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified
Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that
the data or software has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-7-
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
Unicode and the Unicode logo are trademarks of Unicode, Inc., and may be registered in some jurisdictions. All
other trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Adobe shall retain and reproduce, and require its Sublicensees to retain and reproduce JIM's following
copyright notice within each copy of the licensed programs in any form, in whole or in part: "© 1981, 1990 JMI
Consultants, Inc. All rights reserved."
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990, 1993
The Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
-8-
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Loki Library
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu // This code accompanies the book:
Alexandrescu,
Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied". Copyright (c) 2001.
Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
The author or Addison-Wesley Longman make no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty .
______________________________________________________________________________________
-9-
Adobe PDF Scan Library
Portions use software under the following terms:
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
Copyright (c) 1998-2000 The Apache Software Foundation.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgments normally appear.
4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name,
without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE
FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
- 10 -
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software
Foundation and was originally based on software copyright (c) 1999, International Business Machines, Inc.,
http://www.ibm.com.
For
more
information
on
the
Apache
Software
Foundation,
please
see
<http://www.apache.org/>.
______________________________________________________________________________________
March 27, 2003
Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the "Sablotron
XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the
"License"). You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations
under the License.
The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance are
Copyright (C) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated are
available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from:
http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp
The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:
https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 1997-1999 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is
hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose.
Silicon Graphics makes no
It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
- 11 -
The Loki Library
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu .
This code accompanies the book:
Alexandrescu,
Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied".
Portions Copyright (c) 2001. Addison-Wesley. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software
for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
The author or
Addison-Wesley Longman make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is
provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty .
______________________________________________________________________________________
- 12 -
expat
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
- 13 -
HarfBuzz
Copyright (C) 2006
Behdad Esfahbod
Copyright (C) 1998-2004
David Turner and Werner Lemberg
Copyright (C) 2008 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies)
Copyright (C) 2004,2007
Red Hat, Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, without written agreement and without license or royalty fees, to use, copy,
modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose, provided that the above copyright
notice and the following two paragraphs appear in all copies of this software.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER HAS NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS,
OR MODIFICATIONS.
- 14 -
libjingle
Copyright 2004--2007, Google Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- 15 -
Lua
Copyright © 1994–2014 Lua.org, PUC-Rio.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
- 16 -
LuaSocket
LuaSocket 2.0.2 license
Copyright © 2004-2007 Diego Nehab
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
- 17 -
Lune
Copyright (c) 2018 ifritJP
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
- 18 -
MD4
"RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm"
- 19 -
Net-SNMP
Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate
parts below.
Please make sure that you read all the parts.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of
the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written
permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
- 20 -
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
*
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
*
Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) ----Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
*
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- 21 -
*
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
*
The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara,
California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
*
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
- 22 -
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
*
Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2003-2012, Sparta, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
*
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- 23 -
*
Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network
Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
*
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
*
Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and
Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
- 24 -
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003
oss@fabasoft.com
Author: Bernhard Penz <bernhard.penz@fabasoft.com>
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
*
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
*
The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries,
brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
- 25 -
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 8: Apple Inc. copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2007 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3.
Neither the name of Apple Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 9: ScienceLogic, LLC copyright notice (BSD) -----
- 26 -
Copyright (c) 2009, ScienceLogic, LLC
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
*
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
*
Neither the name of ScienceLogic, LLC nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
- 27 -
OpenSSL
OpenSSL License
--------------/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project.
All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
*
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
*
distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
*
software must display the following acknowledgment:
*
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
*
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
*
endorse or promote products derived from this software without
*
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
*
openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
*
nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
*
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
*
acknowledgment:
*
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
*
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
- 28 -
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com).
This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
----------------------/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to.
The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code.
The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
- 29 -
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
*
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
*
must display the following acknowledgement:
*
"This product includes cryptographic software written by
*
Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
*
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
*
being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
*
the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
*
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
- 30 -
* derivative of this code cannot be changed.
i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
- 31 -
Third-Party Services
If you use third-party services through the PRODUCT, use of the services are subjected the conditions below.
When you access and/or obtain some third party content (such as text, images, videos, audios, or software)
through the SOFTWARE, except as expressly permitted by the content owner or by applicable law, you may
not (a) scrape, build databases or otherwise create permanent copies of such content, or keep cached copies
longer than permitted by the cache header; (b) copy, translate, modify, create a derivative work of, sell, lease,
lend, convey, distribute, publicly display or sublicense to any third party; (c) misrepresent the source or
ownership; and (d) remove, obscure, or alter any copyright, trademark or other proprietary rights notices, falsify
or delete any author attributions, legal notices or other labels of the origin or source of material.
-1-
The Software Subjected to the Other License Conditions
Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding
license conditions.
Table of Software
Names of Software
Terms and Conditions of the
License:
See Page
Adobe PostScript 3
3
expat
10
libjingle
11
MD4
12
Net-SNMP
13
OpenSSL
21
-2-
Adobe PostScript 3
Copyright 2007-2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated and its licensors. All rights reserved.
Portions include software under the following terms:
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions of Pool.c_Copyright 1987 - NeXT, Inc., and portions of Graphics.c_Copyright 1988 NeXT, Inc. as an
unpublished work. All Rights Reserved.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Apache Software License, Version 1.1
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
Portions Copyright (c) 1998-2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgments normally appear.
4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact
apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name,
without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE
FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
-3-
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software
Foundation and was originally based on software copyright (c) 1999, International Business Machines, Inc.,
http://www.ibm.com.
For
more
information
on
the
Apache
Software
Foundation,
please
see
<http://www.apache.org/>.
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 1985, 1986 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
-4-
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by James A. Woods, derived from original work by
Spencer Thomas and Joseph Orost.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and
this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other
materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University
of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Portions Copyright (c) 1993 X Consortium
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEX CONSORTIUM BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER INAN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR INCONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X
Consortium.
______________________________________________________________________________________
NOTICE REGARDING SABLOTRON
March 27, 2003
-5-
Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the "Sablotron
XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the
"License"). You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations
under the License.
The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance are
Copyright (C) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated are
available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from:
http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp
The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:
https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the
University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
-6-
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu. This code accompanies the book:
Alexandrescu, Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied". Copyright
(c) 2001. Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Welsey Longman make no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions developed by the University of California, Berkeley.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright © 1991-2005 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and
associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and associated documentation (the
"Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons
to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and
this permission notice appear in all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified
Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that
the data or software has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-7-
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
Unicode and the Unicode logo are trademarks of Unicode, Inc., and may be registered in some jurisdictions. All
other trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Adobe shall retain and reproduce, and require its Sublicensees to retain and reproduce JIM's following
copyright notice within each copy of the licensed programs in any form, in whole or in part: "© 1981, 1990 JMI
Consultants, Inc. All rights reserved."
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
-8-
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Loki Library
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu // This code accompanies the book: Alexandrescu,
Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied". Copyright (c) 2001.
Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Wesley Longman make no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty .
______________________________________________________________________________________
-9-
expat
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
- 10 -
libjingle
Copyright 2004--2007, Google Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- 11 -
MD4
"RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm"
- 12 -
Net-SNMP
Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate
parts below. Please make sure that you read all the parts.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of
the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written
permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
- 13 -
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) ----Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- 14 -
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara,
California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
- 15 -
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2003-2012, Sparta, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- 16 -
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network
Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and
Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
- 17 -
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003
oss@fabasoft.com
Author: Bernhard Penz <bernhard.penz@fabasoft.com>
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries,
brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
- 18 -
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 8: Apple Inc. copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2007 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of Apple Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 9: ScienceLogic, LLC copyright notice (BSD) -----
- 19 -
Copyright (c) 2009, ScienceLogic, LLC
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of ScienceLogic, LLC nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
- 20 -
OpenSSL
OpenSSL License
--------------/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
*
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
*
distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
*
software must display the following acknowledgment:
*
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
*
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
*
endorse or promote products derived from this software without
*
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
*
openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
*
nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
*
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
*
acknowledgment:
*
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
*
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
- 21 -
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
----------------------/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
- 22 -
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
*
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
*
must display the following acknowledgement:
*
"This product includes cryptographic software written by
*
Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
*
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
*
being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
*
the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
*
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
- 23 -
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
- 24 -
Third-Party Services
If you use third-party services through the PRODUCT, use of the services are subjected the conditions below.
When you access and/or obtain some third party content (such as text, images, videos, audios, or software)
through the SOFTWARE, except as expressly permitted by the content owner or by applicable law, you may
not (a) scrape, build databases or otherwise create permanent copies of such content, or keep cached copies
longer than permitted by the cache header; (b) copy, translate, modify, create a derivative work of, sell, lease,
lend, convey, distribute, publicly display or sublicense to any third party; (c) misrepresent the source or
ownership; and (d) remove, obscure, or alter any copyright, trademark or other proprietary rights notices, falsify
or delete any author attributions, legal notices or other labels of the origin or source of material.
-1-
The Software Subjected to the Other License Conditions
Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding
license conditions.
Table of Software
Names of Software
Terms and Conditions of the
License:
See Page
Adobe PostScript 3
3
expat
10
libjingle
11
MD4
12
Net-SNMP
13
OpenSSL
21
-2-
Adobe PostScript 3
Copyright 2007-2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated and its licensors. All rights reserved.
Portions include software under the following terms:
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions of Pool.c_Copyright 1987 - NeXT, Inc., and portions of Graphics.c_Copyright 1988 NeXT, Inc. as an
unpublished work. All Rights Reserved.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Apache Software License, Version 1.1
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
Portions Copyright (c) 1998-2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgments normally appear.
4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact
apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name,
without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE
FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
-3-
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software
Foundation and was originally based on software copyright (c) 1999, International Business Machines, Inc.,
http://www.ibm.com.
For
more
information
on
the
Apache
Software
Foundation,
please
see
<http://www.apache.org/>.
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 1985, 1986 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
-4-
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by James A. Woods, derived from original work by
Spencer Thomas and Joseph Orost.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and
this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other
materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University
of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Portions Copyright (c) 1993 X Consortium
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEX CONSORTIUM BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER INAN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR INCONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X
Consortium.
______________________________________________________________________________________
NOTICE REGARDING SABLOTRON
March 27, 2003
-5-
Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the "Sablotron
XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the
"License"). You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations
under the License.
The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance are
Copyright (C) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated are
available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from:
http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp
The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:
https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the
University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
-6-
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu. This code accompanies the book:
Alexandrescu, Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied". Copyright
(c) 2001. Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Welsey Longman make no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions developed by the University of California, Berkeley.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright © 1991-2005 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and
associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and associated documentation (the
"Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons
to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and
this permission notice appear in all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified
Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that
the data or software has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-7-
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
Unicode and the Unicode logo are trademarks of Unicode, Inc., and may be registered in some jurisdictions. All
other trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Adobe shall retain and reproduce, and require its Sublicensees to retain and reproduce JIM's following
copyright notice within each copy of the licensed programs in any form, in whole or in part: "© 1981, 1990 JMI
Consultants, Inc. All rights reserved."
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
-8-
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Loki Library
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu // This code accompanies the book: Alexandrescu,
Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied". Copyright (c) 2001.
Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Wesley Longman make no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty .
______________________________________________________________________________________
-9-
expat
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
- 10 -
libjingle
Copyright 2004--2007, Google Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- 11 -
MD4
"RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm"
- 12 -
Net-SNMP
Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate
parts below. Please make sure that you read all the parts.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of
the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written
permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
- 13 -
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) ----Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- 14 -
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara,
California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
- 15 -
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2003-2012, Sparta, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- 16 -
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network
Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and
Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
- 17 -
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003
oss@fabasoft.com
Author: Bernhard Penz <bernhard.penz@fabasoft.com>
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries,
brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
- 18 -
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 8: Apple Inc. copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2007 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of Apple Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 9: ScienceLogic, LLC copyright notice (BSD) -----
- 19 -
Copyright (c) 2009, ScienceLogic, LLC
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of ScienceLogic, LLC nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
- 20 -
OpenSSL
OpenSSL License
--------------/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
*
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
*
distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
*
software must display the following acknowledgment:
*
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
*
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
*
endorse or promote products derived from this software without
*
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
*
openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
*
nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
*
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
*
acknowledgment:
*
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
*
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
- 21 -
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
----------------------/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
- 22 -
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
*
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
*
must display the following acknowledgement:
*
"This product includes cryptographic software written by
*
Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
*
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
*
being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
*
the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
*
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
- 23 -
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
- 24 -
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising